Outboards

rP
~OUTBOARDS • •
OUTBOARDS
MODELS
MERCURY/MARINER
30/40 (4-Stroke)
With Serial Numbers

United States . .. . .. OG760300 and Above
" _.J
Printed in U.S.A. C l 99S, Mercury Marine 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Notice
Throughout this publication, "Dangers", "Warnings" and "Cautions" (accompanied by the In-
ternational HAZARD Symbol A) are used to alert the mechanic to special instructions con-
cerning a particular service or operation that may be hazardous if performed incorrectly or
carelessly. OBSERVE THEM CAREFULLYl
These "Safety Alerts" alone cannot eliminate the hazards that they signal. Strict compliance
to these special instructions when performing the service, plus "Common Sense" operation ,
are major accident prevention measures.
ACAUTION
Hazards or unsafe practices which could result in minor personal injury or product
or property damage.
Notice to Users of This Manual

This service manual has been written and published by the Service Department of Mercury
Marine to aid ou r dealers' mechanics and company service personnel when servicing the
products described herein.
It is assumed that these personnel are famil iar with the servicing procedures of these prod-
ucts, or like or similar products manufactured and marketed by Mercury Marine, that they
have been trained in the recomme nded servicing procedures of these products which in-
cludes the use of mechanics' common hand tools and the special Mercury Marine or recom-
mended tools from other suppliers.
We could not possibly know of and advise the service trade of all conceivable procedures
by which a service might be performed and of the possible hazards and/or results of each
method. We have not undertaken any such wide evaluation. Therefore, anyone who uses
a service procedure and/or tool , which is not recommended by the manufacturer, first must
completely satisfy himself that neither his nor the products safety will be endangered by the
service procedure selected.
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on the
latest product information available at the time of publication. As required , revisions to this
manual will be sent to all dealers contracted by us to sell and/or service these products.
It should be kept in mind, while working on the product , that the electrical system and ignition
system a re capable of violent and damaging short circuits or seve re electrical shocks. When
performing any work where electrical terminals could possibly be grounded or touched by
the mechanic, th e battery cables should be disconnected at the battery.
Any time the intake or exhaust openings are exposed during service they should be covered
to protect against accidental entrance of foreign material which could enter the cylinders and
cause extensive internal damage when the engine is started.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page i

It is important to note, during any maintenance procedure replacement fasteners must have
the same measurements and strength as those removed. Numbers on the heads of the met-
ric bolts and on the surfaces of metric nuts indicate their strength. American bolts use radial
lines for this purpose, while most American nuts do not have strength markings. Mis-
matched or incorrect fasteners can result in damage or malfunction, or possibly personal
injury. Therefore, fasteners removed should be saved for reuse in the same locations when-
ever possible. Where the fasteners are not satisfactory for re-use, care should be taken to
select a replacement that matches the original.
Cleanliness and Care of Outboard Motor

A marine power product is a combination of many machined, honed, polished and lapped
surfaces with tolerances that are measured in the ten thousands of an inchlmm. When any
product component is serviced, care and cleanliness are important. Throughout this manu-
al, it should be understood that proper cleaning , and protection of machined surfaces and
friction areas is a part of the repair procedure. This is considered standard shop practice
even if not specifically stated.
Whenever components are removed for service, they should be retained in order. At the
time of installation, they should be installed in the same locations and with the same mating
surfaces as when removed .
Personnel should not work on or under an outboard which is suspenOed. Outboards should
be attached to work stands, or lowered to ground as soon as possible.
We reserve the right to make changes to this manual without prior notification.
Refer to dealer service bulletins for other pertinent information concerning the products de-
scribed in this manual.
Page ii 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Service Manual Outline
Important Information
Section 1 - Important Information
A ~ Specifications
B - Maintenance
C - General Information Electrical
o - Outboard Motor Installation
Section 2 - Electrical
A - Ignition
B - Charging & Starting System Fuel System
C - Timing,Synchronizing & Adjusting
D - Wiring Diagrams
Section 3 - Fuel System
Powerhead
A - Fuel Pump
B - Carburetor
C - Emissions
Section 4 - Powerhead Mid-Section
A - Cylinder Head
B - Cylinder Block/Crankcase
C - Lubrication
Section 5 - Mid-Section Gear Housing
A - Clamp/Swivel Bracket & Drive Shaft Housing
B - Power Trim
C - Manual Tilt Assist
Attachmentsl
Section 6 - Gear Housing Control
A - Non-Bigfoot Gear Housing
B - Bigfoot Gear Housing
Section 7 - Attachments/Control Linkage
Manual Starter
A - Throttle/Shift Linkage
B - Tiller Handle
Section 8 - Manual Starter
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page iii

SPECIFICATIONS
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
Section 1A - Specifications
Table of Contents
Specifications .............. . . .. .... • .... lA-1 Propeller Information Charts .. . .. . . • ...... lA-7
Specifications
Models 30/40 (4-Stroke)

HORSEPOWER Model 30 30 hp (22.4 Kw) @ 5750 rpm
(kW) Model 40 40 hp (29.8 Kw) @ 5750 rpm
Electric
OUTBOARD
30/40 ELPT 212 Ib (96.2 kg)
WEIGHT
40 ELPT BIGFOOT 2351b (106.6 kg)
RECOMMENDED GASOLINE Automotive Unleaded
FUEL with a Minimum Pump Posted
Octane Rating of 87
OIL FILTER pin 35-822626A2
OIL FILTER WRENCH pin 91-802653
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY Either 3 Quarts or 3 Liters
ENGINE OIL SAE 1OW-30 viscosity oil is recom-
mended for use in all temperatures.
SAE SAE
SAE 25W-40 viscosity oil may be used at
C" 25W-40
F" temperatures above 400 F (4 0 C) .
.100 .36 Use Quicksilver 4-Cycle Marine Oil with

+60 .27 the proper viscosity for the expected
OIL temperature in you r area (see range
.60 .,6
thermometer on left). If not available, use
+40 .4 _ a premium quality 4-cycle engine oi l, cer-
tified to meet or exceed anyone of the
+20 -7 following American Petroleum Institute
- 16 (API) service classifications SH, SG, SF,
0
CF-4 , CE, CD , COIl.
IMPORTANT: Use resistive spark plugs only.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 1A-1

SPECIFICATIONS
Type Capacitor Discharge Ignition

Spark Plug:
Type NGK DPR6EA-9
Gap 0.035 in. (1.0 mm)
Hex Size 18 mm
Firing Order 1-2-3
Ignition Timing:
@ Idle (800 rpm) 100 A.T.D.C
@ WOT (6000 rpm) 28 0 B.T.D.C
IGNITION
Charge Coil Resistance 660 -710 Q (GRNIWHT - WHTlGRN)
SYSTEM
Crank Position Sensor Resistance 300 - 350 Q (RED - WHT)
Readings taken @
Ignition Coil Resistance:
68 CF (20cC).
Primary 0.08 - 0.7 Q (BLK - BLKlWHT)
Secondary (W/o Boots) 3.5 - 4.7 kQ (BLK - High Tension)
ECM Engine Speed Limiter
Soft Reduction (Retards Timing) 6200 rpm
Spark Cut-Out Reduction (Percent-
ages of ignition spark are Cut-Out) 6250 rpm
ECM Overheat/Low Oil Pressure
Speed Control Approximately 2000 rpm
Engine Temperature Sensor See Graph Section 2A-lgnition
Alternator Type: Single Phase (12 Pole)
6 Amp. Manual Lighting Coil Output 6 Amps.
Lighting Coil Resistance 0.9 - 1.1 Ohms (YEL-YEL)
CHARGING 12.6 V-15 Amps. (185 Watts)
15 Amp. Electric Alternator Output
SYSTEM
(Rectified/Regulated)
Readings taken @
Battery Charging Coil Resistance 0.22 - 0.24 Ohms (YEL-YEL)
68°F (20CC).
Power Bobbin Resistance
(For Electrothermal Valve) 6.7-7.1 Ohms (YEUBLK-YEUBLK)
Quicksilver Tachometer Setting "6P" or h4"
Manual Start Recoil Starter
Electric Start:
Starter Type Bendix
STARTING 1.1 kW
Output
SYSTEM
Ampere Draw Under:
(Load) 106.0 Amps
(No Load) 21.1 Amps
Battery Rating
Minimum Requirement 465 Marine Cranking Amps (MCA)
BATTERY or 350 Cold Cranking Amps (CCA)
For operation below 32° F (0° C) 1000 Marine Cranking Amps (MCA) or
775 Cold Cranking Amps (CCA)
ENRICHMENT Auto Enrichener Resistance 15 - 25 Ohms (YEUBLK - YEUBLK)
CONTROL Electrothermal ram projection 0.3 in. (7 mm) after 5 min. of power
SYSTEM
Readings taken @
68°F (20°C).
Fuel Pump Type External (Plunger/Diaphragm)
Fuel Pump:
FUEL Pressure 3-6 psi
SYSTEM 0.23 - 0.38 in. (5.85 - 9.65 mm)
Plunger Stroke
Fuel Tank Capacity Accessory
Page 1A-2 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

SPECIFICATIONS
Idle rpm (Out Of Gear) 900 ± 25 rpm

Idle rpm (In Forward Gear) 800 ±25 rpm
Wide Open Throttle rpm (WOT)
Range 5500-6000
Main Jet Size #98
Pilot Jet #38
CARBURETOR Idle Jet #42
Float Height 0.47-0.63 in. (12.0-16.0 mm)
Cb
III' I
~odI ~
~
Type 4 Siroke Cycle Over Head Camshaft

CYLINDER
Displacement 45.6 cu. in. (747cc)
BLOCK
Number of Cylinders 3
STROKE Length 2.953 in. (75 mm)
Diameter
Standard 2.5591 in. (65 mm)
CYLINDER Oversize-O.010 in. (0 .25 mm) 2.5689 in. (65.25 mm)
BORE Oversize-0.020 in. (0.50 mm) 2.5787 in. (65.5 mm)
Taper/Out of Round Maximum 0.003 in. (0.08 mm)
Bore Type Cast Iron
Piston Type Aluminum
0.0. at Skirt
PISTON Standard 2.5570 - 2.5578 in. (64.950 - 64.965 mm)
Oversize-0.Ol0 in. (0.25 mm) 2.5669 - 2.5675 in. (65.2 - 65.2 15 mm)
Oversize-0.020 in. (0.50 mm) 2.5768 - 2.5774 in. (65.450 - 65.465 mm)
PISTON Piston to Cylinder Clearance 0.0014 - .0026 in. (0.035 - 0.065 mm)
CLEARANCE
Ring End Gap (Installed)
Top 0.006 - 0.012 in. (0. 15 - 0.03 mm)
Middle 0.012 - 0.020 in. (0.30 - 0.50 mm)
RINGS Bottom (Oil Ring) 0.008 - 0.028 in. (0.20 - 0.70 mm)
Side Clearance:
Top 0.0008 - 0.0024 in. (0. 02 - 0.06 mm)
Middle 0.0008 - 0.0024 in. (0.02 - 0.06 mm)
Compression Ratio 9.8:1
COMPRESSION Cylinder Compression* 180 -210 psi (Peak)
RATIO (Electric Models Only. Cold Engine @
W.O.T.)
PISTON PIN Piston Pin Diameter 0.6285 - 0.6287 in. (15.965 -15.970 mm)
CONNECTING 011 Clearance (Big End) 0.0008 . 0.0020 in. (0.020 . 0.052 mm)
ROD Small End Inside Diameter 0.6293·0.6298 in. (15.985 - 15.998 mm)
Main Bearing Clearance 0.0005 - 0.0017 in. (0.012 - 0.044 mm)
CRANKSHAFT
Crankshaft Run-out 0.0018 in. (0.046 mm)
*NOTE: Manual start models are equipped with compression relief mechanism which will
not affow compression testing.
90·857046 AUG UST 1998 Page 1A·3

SPECIFICATIONS
Intake "A" 1.216 - 1.220 in. (30.89 - 30.99 mm)

Exhaust " A"
Intake "8 "
Exhaust "B"
o 1.216 -
1.022 -
1.022 -
1.220 in.
1.025 in.
1.025 in.
(30.89
(25.95
(25.95
- 30.99
- 26.05
- 26.05
mm)
mm)
mm)
Run-out Limit ...-B 0.0039 in. (0.1 mm)

Camshaft Bearing Diameter "b" 1.4541 - 1.4549 in.
(36.935 - 36.955 mm)
CAMSHAFT
Free Length "a" 1.491-1 .569 in. (37.85-39.85 mm)

Tilt Limit " b" Less than 0.060 in. (1.7 mm)
---@
VALVE SPRING
Compressed Pressure (Installed)

Intake 19.8 - 22.0 Ibs. (9.0 - 10.0 kg)
I---------t-,
Exhaust
LL~im~it~~~&~E~X~h~au~s~t~)
Tilt
Di'.;' ~~~_L
& Exhaust) ___~0~.0~4~3~in~.~(~I~.ldm:m~)
19.8 - 22.0 Ibs. (9.0 - 10.0 kg)
Left Hand
0.004 in. (0.1 mm)
___ ~
* Lines Indicate
56899
straight edge
measurement
CYLINDER HEAD Camshaft Bore Inside Diameter "a" 1.4567 - 1.4577 in.
(37.000 - 37.025 mm)
Page 1A·4 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

SPECIFICATIONS
ValveNalve Seat/Valve Guides:

Valve Clearance (cold)
Intake 0.006 - 0.010 in. (0.15 - 0.25 mm)
Exhaust 0.010 - 0.014 in. (0.25 - 0.35 mm)
Valve Dimensions:
"A" Head Diameter
Intake 1.256 - 1.264 in. (31.9 - 32.1 mm)
Exhaust 1.020 - 1.028 in. (25.9 - 26.1 mm)
"8" Face Width
Intake 0.079 - 0.124 in. (2.00 - 3.14 mm)
Exhaust 0.079 - 0.124 in. (2.00 - 3.14 mm)
"C " Seat Width
Intake 0.035 - 0.043 in. (0.9 - 1.1 mm)
Exhaust 0.035 - 0.043 in. (0.9 - 1.1 mm)
"0" Margin Thickness
VALVES Intake 0.020 - 0.035 in. (0.5 - 0.9 mm)
Exhaust 0.020 - 0.035 in. (0.5 - 0.9 mm)
Stem Outside Diameter
Intake 0.2156 - 0.2161 in. (5.475 - 5.490 mm)
Exhaust 0.2150 - 0.2156 in. (5.460 - 5.475 mm)
Guide Inside Diameter
Intake 0.2165 - 0.2170 in. (5.500 - 5.51 2 mm)
Exhaust 0.2165 - 0.2170 in. (5.500 - 5.51 2 mm)
Stem To Guide Clearance
Intake 0.0004 - 0.0015 in. (0.010 - 0.037 mm)
Exhaust 0.0010 - 0.0020 in. (0.025 - 0.052 mm)
Stem Run~out Limit (max.) 0.0006 in. (0.016 mm)
~ Valve Dimensions
)\ . \~" . ~~:>x:
:, "C" 1\ =t
~. I
"0"
~" A "~
Head Diameter Face Width Seat Width Margin Thickness
ROCKER SHAFT Outside Diameter 0.6288 - 0.6296 in.

(15.971 - 15.991 mm)
Inside Diameter of 80re 0.6299 - 0.6306 in.
ROCKER ARM
(16.000 - 16.018 mm)
Valve Opening Temperature 1360 F - 1430 F (580 C - 62' C)
THERMOSTAT Full Open Temperature 158' F (70' C)
Valve Lift (Minimum) 0.12 in. (3 mm)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 1A-5

SPECIFICATIONS
Pump Type Trochoid

Engine Oil Pressure (Warm Engine)
@ 3000 rpm 30-40 psi (207-278 kPa)
Engine Oil Pan Capacity Either 3 Ots. or 3 Liters
Oil Pump:
Outer Rotor to Housing "a" 0.0035 - 0.006 in. (0.09 - 0. 15 mm)
Inner Rotor to Outer Rotor "b" 0.005 in. (0.12 mm)
Rotor to Housing "c" 0.001 - 0.003 in. (0.03 - 0. 08 mm)
LUBRICATION
SYSTEM
Transom Height:
Short Shaft 15 in. (38 em)
Long Shaft 20 in. (51 em)
MID-SECTION Steering Pivot Range 90·
Tilt Pin Positions 5 + Shallow Wate r
Full Till Up Angle 70·
Allowable Transom Thickness 2-3/8 in. (60.3 mm)
Gear Ratio 2.00: 1
Gearcase Capacity 14.9 fl OZ (440 mL)
Lubricant Type Quicksilver Gear Lube ~ P re m i um Blend
Forward Gear
Number of Teeth 26 Spiral/Bevel
GEAR HOUSING Pinion Gear
(2.00:1) Number of Teeth 13 Spiral/Bevel
Pinion Height 0. 025 in. (0.64 mm)
Forward Gear Backlash No Adjustment
Water Pressure
@ 800 rpm (Idle) 2-4 psi (14·28 kPa)
@ 6000 rpm (WOT) 12-17 psi (69·103 kPa)
Gear Ratio 2.31:1
Gearcase Capacity 22.5 fl oz (655 mL)
Lubricant Type Quicksilve r Gear Lu be~ Pre mium Blend
Forward Gear
Number 01 Teeth 30 Spiral/Bevel
Pinion Gear
Number 01 Teeth 13 Spi ral/Bevel
GEAR HOUSING Pinion Height 0.025 in. (0.64 mm)
BIGFOOT Pinion Gear Locating Tool 91-12349A2
(2.3:1) Flat Number #8
Disc Number #3
Forward Gear Backlash 0.012-0. 01 9 in . (0.30-0.48 mm)
Backlash Indicating Tool 91-78473
Mark Number #4
Water Pressure
@ 800 rpm (Idle) 2-4 psi (1 4-28 kPa)
@ 6000 rpm (WOT) 10-15 psi (69·103 kPa)
Page 1A-6 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

SPECIFICATIONS
Propeller Information Charts
Mercury/Mariner 30 (4-Stroke) 2.00:1 Non-Bigfoot

Wide Open Throttle RPM : 5500-6000
Recommended Transom Heig hts : 15", 20", 22.5"
Right Hand Rotation Standard
Gear Reduction : 2.00:1
Approx. Approx. Speed

No. of Gross Boat Boat Range Propeller
Diameter Pitch Blades Material Wgt. (Ibs) Length (mph) Part Number
10" 19" 3 Alum Up to 600 Up to 14' 45-53 48-73146A40
10" 17" 3 Alum Up to 700 Up to 14' 39-46 48-73144A40
10" 16" 3 Steel 600-800 Up to 14' 36-42 48-91818A5
10" 16" 3 Alum 600-800 Up to 14' 36-42 48-73142A40
10-1 /8" 15" 3 Steel 700-900 13-14' 33-39 48-76232A5
10-1 /8" 15" 3 Alum 700-900 13-14' 33-39 48-73 140A40
10-1 /4" 14" 3 Steel 800-1000 14-15' 30-36 48-76230A5
10-1 /4" 14" 3 Alum 800-1000 14-1 5' 30-36 48-73138A40
10-3/8" 13" 3 Steel 900-11 00 14-16' 27-33 48-76228A5
10-3/8" 13" 3 Alum 900-1100 14-16' 27-33 48-73136A40
10-5/8" 12" 3 Steel 1000-1 200 15-17' 24-29 48-79792A5
10-5/8" 12" 3 Alum 1000-1200 15-17' 24-29 48-73134A40
11 -5/8" 11 " 3 Steel 1100-1400 15-17' 21-26 48-823478A5
10-7/8" 11 " 3 Alum 1100-1400 15-17' 21-26 48-85632A40
11-5/8" 10-1/2" 3 Alum 1300-1700 15-18' 19-24 48-827312A 10
11-1 /4" 10" 3 Alum 1400-1900 16' + 18-22 48-73132A40
12-1/4" 9" 3 Steel 2000+ pontoon 15-19 48-97868A 10
12-1/4" 9" 3 Alum 2000+ pontoon 15-19 48-87818A10
12-1 /2" 8" 3 Alum 2400+ Pontoon/ 1-17 48-42738A 10
houseboat
12-1/2" 8" Cup 3 Alum pontoon 48-42738A 12
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 1A·7

SPECIFICATIONS
Mercury/Mariner 40 (4-Stroke) 2.00:1 Non-Bigfoot

Wide Open Throttle RPM : 5500-6000
Recommended Transom Heights; 15", 20", 22.5"
Right Hand Rotation Standard
Gear Reduction ; 2.00: 1
Approx. Approx. Speed

No. of Gross Boat Boat Range Propeller
Diameter Pitch Blades Material Wgt. (Ibs) Length (mph) Part Number
10" 19" 3 Alum Up to 800 Upt0 14' 45-53 48-73146A40
10" 17" 3 Alum Up to 1000 Up t0 15' 39-46 48-73144A40
10" 16" 3 Steel 900-11 00 Up to 15' 36-42 48-91818A5
10" 16" 3 Alum 900-11 00 Up t0 15' 36-42 48-73142A40
10-1 /8" 15" 3 Steel 1000-1200 13-1 5' 33-39 48-76232A5
10-1 /8" 15" 3 Alum 1000-1200 13-15' 33-39 48-73140A40
10-1/4" 14" 3 Steel 1100-1300 14-1 6' 30-36 48-76230A5
10-1/4" 14" 3 Alum 1100-1300 14-1 6' 30-36 48-73138A40
10-3/8" 13" 3 Steel 1200-1500 14-1 7' 27-33 48-76228A5
10-3/8" 13" 3 Alum 1200-1500 14-1 7' 27-33 48-73136A40
10-5/8" 12" 3 Steel 1400-1700 15-1 7' 24-29 48-79792A5
10-5/8" 12" 3 Alum 1400-1700 15-17' 24-29 48-73134A40
11-5/8" 11 " 3 Steel 1600-2000 16- 18' 21-26 48-823478A5
10-7/8" 11 " 3 Alum 1600-2000 16-18' 21 -26 48-85632A40
11-5/8" 10-1 /2" 3 Alum 1800-2400 16' + 19-24 48-827312A 10
11 -1/4" 10" 3 Alum 2000-2600 17' + 18-22 48-73132A40
12-1/4" 9" 3 Steel 2300+ pontoon 15-19 48-97868A 10
12-1 /4" 9" 3 Alum 2300+ pontoon 15-19 48-87818A10
12-1/2" 8" 3 Alum 2700+ Pontoon/ 1-17 48-42738A 10
houseboat
12-1 /2" 8" Cup 3 Alum pontoon 48-42738A 12
Page 1A-8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MAINTENANCE
Section 1B - Maintenance
Table of Contents
Special Tools ............. ..... . ... . . . . . 18-1 Changing Engine Oil ... . ....... • . ... • .... 18-11
Quicksilver Lubricant/Sealant ........ . . . . . 18 -2 Oil Changing Procedure . ....•......... 18-11
Inspection And Maintenance Schedule . . . . . 18-4 Changing Oil Filter ................... . 18-12
Before Each Use .................... . 18-4 Oil Filli ng ........................... . 18-12
After Each Use. . . . . . . ... . . ... . . 18-5 Gear Case Lubrication . . . ... . ... . . . 18-13
Every 100 Hours of Use or Once yearly, 3·1/4 In. (83mm) Diameter Gear Case .. 18-13
Whichever occurs first ............... . 18-5 4-1 /4 In. (10Bmm) Diameter Gear Case 1 B-14
Every 300 Hours of Use or Three Years . 18-5 Storage Preparation ............ . 1 B-16
Before Periods of Storage ............ . 18-5 Fuel System ........... . . .. . . ...... . 18·16
Corrosion Control Anode ............... . . 18-6 Protecting External Outboard
Spark Plug Inspection ................... . 1B-7 Components ..... . . .. . .. . . .. . .... . . 18-16
Battery Inspection ...................... . 18-7 Protecting Internal Engine Components 18-16
Fuse Replacement - Electric Start Models . . 18-8 Gear Case ....... .... . 18 -16
n ming Belt Inspection .................. . 18-8 Positioning Outboard for Storage . . . .. . 18 -16
Lubrication Points ..... .. ....... . ....... . 18-9 Battery Storage ..................... . 18-17
Checking Power Trim Fluid .. . 18-11
Special Tools
1. Flushing Attachment PI N 44357 A2
2. Crankcase Oil Pump PI N 90265A2
3. O il Filter Wrench PI N 91-802653
90·857046 AUG UST 1998 Page 1B-l

MAINTENANCE
Quicksilver Lubricant/Sealant
1. Quicksilver Anti~Corrosion Grease PIN 92~78376A6
2. 2-4-C Marine Lubricant with Teflon PIN 92-825407A12
3. Special Lubricant 101 PIN 92-13872A 1
4 . Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid PIN 92-1901 OOA 12
Page 18-2 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MAINTENANCE
5. Quicksilver 4-Stroke Outboard Oil PI N 92-828000A 12
6. Gear Lube-Premium Blend PIN 92-19007A24
7. Quicksilver4-Cycle Marine Engine Oil PIN 92-832 111A1
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 1B-3

MAINTENANCE
Inspection And Maintenance Schedule

To keep your outboard in the best operating condition , it is important that your outboard re-
ceive the periodic inspections and maintenance listed in the Inspection and Maintenance
Schedule. We urge you to keep it maintained properly to ensure the safety of you and your
passengers and retain its dependability.
Neglected Inspection and maintenance service of your outboard or attempting to

perform maintenance or repair on your outboard if you are not familiar with the cor-
rect service and safety procedures could cause personal injury, death, or product
failure.
Before Each Use
1. Check engine oil level.
2. Check that lanyard stop switch stops the engine.
3. Visually inspect the fuel system for deterioration or leaks.
4. Check outboard for tightness on transom.
5. Check steering system for binding or loose components.
6. Visually check steering link rod fasteners for proper tightness .
7. Check propeller blades for damage.
Page 18-4 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

MAINTENANCE
After Each Use

1. Flush out the outboard cooling system if operating in salt or polluted water.
2. Wash off all salt deposits and flu sh out the exhaust outlet of the propeller and gear case
with fresh water if operating in salt water.
Every 100 Hours of Use or Once yearly, Whichever occurs first
1. Lu bricate all lubrication pai nts. Lubricate more frequently when used in salt water.
2. Change engine oil and replace the oil filter. The oil should be changed more often when
the engine is operated under adverse conditions such as extended trolling.
3. Inspect thermostat visually for corrosion , broken spri ng, and to dete rmine that the valve
is com pletely closed at room temperature . If questionabl e, inspect thermostat as out-
lined in Section 4B "Thermostat".
4. Inspect and clean spark plugs.
5. Check engine fu el filter for contaminants.
6. Adjust carburetor(s) (if required) .
7. Check engine timing setup.
8. Check corrosion control anodes. Check more freq uently when used in salt water.
9. Drain and replace gear case lubricant.
10. Lubricate splines on the drive shaft.
11. Check and adjust valve clearance , if necessary.
12. Check power trim fluid .
, 3. Inspect battery.
14. Check control cable adjustments .
15. Inspect timing belt.
16. Remove engine deposits with Quicksilver Power Tune Engine Cleaner.
17. Check tightness of bolts, nuts, and other fasteners.
Every 300 Hours of Use or Three Years
1. Replace water pump impeller (more often if overheati ng occurs or reduced water pres-
sure is noted).
Before Periods of Storage

1. Refer to Storage proced ure (this section).
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 18-5

MAINTENANCE
Corrosion Control Anode

Your outboard has control anodes at different locations. An anode helps protect the out-
board against galvanic corrosion by sacrificing its metal to be slowly eroded instead of the
outboard metals.
Each anode req uires periodic inspection especially in salt wate r which will accelerate the
erosion. To maintain this corrosion protection , always replace the anode before it is com -
pletely eroded. Neve r paint or apply a protective coating on the anode as this will reduce
effectiveness of the anode.
1. An anode is installed on the bottom of the transom bracket assembly. Trim tab is also
an anode on the 3-1/4 in. (83 mm) diameter gear case. The 4-1 /4 in. (108 mm) diameter
gear case has three anodes. One of the anodes is the trim tab and two anodes are lo-
cated on the side.
c
o
a - Bottom Anode
b - Trim Tab
c - Side Anodes
2. Three anodes are installed in the engi ne block. Remove the three ignition coils for clear-
ance. Remove anodes at locations shown. Install each anode with rubber seal and
cover. Tighten bolts to 70 Ib-in. (8 Nm) torque. Rei nstall the ignition coils. Tighten coil
bolts to 70 Ib-in. (8 Nm) torque
a - Anodes-Engine Block
b - Ignition Calls
c - Rubber Seal
d - Cover
Page 1 B·6 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MAINTENANCE
Spark Plug Inspection

Inspect spark plugs at the recommended intervals.
1. Remove the spark plug leads by twisting the rubber boots slightly and pull off.
2. Remove the spark plugs to inspect and clean . Replace spark plug if electrode is worn
or the insulator is rough , cracked, broken, blistered or fouled.
3. Set the spark plug gap. See Specification Chart.
4. Before reinstalling spark plugs, clean away dirt on the spark plug seats. Install plugs fin-
ger tight, and tighten 1/4 turn or torque to 20 Ib-n (27 Nm).
Battery Inspection
The battery should be inspected at periodic intervals to ensure proper engine starting capa-
bility.
IMPORTANT: Read the safety and maintenance instructions which accompany your
battery.
1. Turn off the engine before servicing the battery.
2. Add water as necessary to keep the battery full.
3. Make sure the battery is secure against movement.
4. Battery cable terminals should be clean , tight, and correctly installed. Positive to positive
and negative to negative.
5. Make sure the battery is equipped with a nonconductive shield to prevent accidental
shorting of battery terminals.
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page lB·7

MAINTENANCE
Fuse Replacement - Electric Start Models

The electric starting circuit is protected from overload by an SFE 20 AMP fuse. If the fuse
is blown, the electric starter motor will not operate. Try to locate and correct the cause of
the overload. tf the cause is not found , the fuse may blow again. Replace the fuse with a
fuse of the same rating.
1. Open the fuse holder and look at the silver colored band inside the fuse. If band is broken
replace the fuse . Replace fuse with a new fuse with the same rating.
a - Blown Fuse
Timing Belt Inspection

1. Inspect the timing belt and replace if any of the following conditions are found.
a. Cracks in the back of the bett or in the base of the bett teeth.
b. Excessive wear at the roots of the cogs.
c. Rubber portion swollen by oil.
d. Belt surfaces roughened.
e. Signs of wear on edges or outer surfaces of belt.
a - Timing Bett
Page 19-8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MAINTENANCE
Lubrication Points
Lubricate Point 1 with Quicksilver Anti-Corrosion Grease or 2-4-C Marine Lubricant
with Teflon
1. Propeller Shaft - Refer to Propeller Replacement for removal and installation of the pro-
peller. Coat the entire propeller shaft with lubricant to prevent the propeller hub from cor-
roding and seizing to the shaft.
--~
Lubricate Points 2 thru 7 with Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant with Teflon or Spe-
cial Lubricant 101.
2. Swivel Bracket - Lubricate through fitting.
3. Tilt Support Lever - Lubricate through fitting .
4. Tilt Tube-Lubricate through fitting .
go-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 18-9

MAINTENANCE
5. Steering Cable Grease Fitting (If equipped) - Rotate steering wheel to furry retract the
steeri ng cable end into the outboard tilt tube. Lubricate through fitti ng.
fflf--.~--
\!
6
a ~ Steering Cable End
b ~ Fitting
6. This grease fitting is for lubricating the threaded rod for the co-pilot.
-1J J- //'IJ
"
~
~
--
e = ~\
-"'({ , \
,-
~0
~~I OJ I
fi
0
nfiih.> ;rt.;;;ri,j;;; I must

adding lubricant. Adding lubricant to steering cable when fully extended could
cause steering cable to become hydraulically locked. An hydraulically locked steer·
ing cable will cause loss of steering control, possibly resulting in serious injury or
death.
Lubricate Point 7 with light weight oil.
7. Stee ring Link Rod Pivot Points - Lubricate pOints.
--
Page 18 · 10 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MAINTENANCE
Checking Power Trim Fluid

t . Tilt outboard to the full up position and engage the tilt support lock.
2. Remove fill cap and check fluid leve1. The fluid level shou ld be even with the bottom of
the fill hole. Add Quicksilver Power Trim & Steering Fluid. If not avai lable, use automo-
tive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid .
a - Fill Cap
Changing Engine Oil

Engine Oil Capacity
3 U.S. Quarts (3.0 Liters)
Oil Changing Procedure

Pump Method
1. Place the outboard in an vertical upright position .
2. Remove dipstick and thread a Quicksilver Crankcase Oil Pump onto the dipstick tube .
Pump out the engine oil into an appropriate container.
a • Crankcase Oil Pump
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 18-11

MAINTENANCE
Drain Plug Method

1. Tilt the outboard up to the trailer position.
2. Tu rn the steering on the outboard so that the drain hole is facing downward. Remove
drain plug and drain engine oil into an appropriate container. Lubricate the seal on the
drain plug with oil and reinstall.
a ~ Drain Hole
Changing Oil Filter

1. Place a rag or towel below the oil filter to absorb any spilled oil.
2. Unscrew old filter by turning the filter cou nterclockwise.
3. Clean the mounting base. Apply film of clean oil to filter gasket. Do not use grease.
Screw new filter on until gasket contacts base, then tighten 3/4 to 1 turn.
91 -802653
a - Oil Filter
Oil Filling
1. Remove the oil fill cap and add oil to to proper operating level.
2. Idle engine for five minutes and check for leaks. Stop engine and check oil level on dip-
stick . Add oil if necessary.
a - Oil Fill Cap
Page 18-12 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MAINTENANCE
Gear Case Lubrication

3-1/4 In. (83mm) Diameter Gear Case
When adding or changing gear case lubricant, visually check for the presence of water in
the lubricant. If water is present, it may have settled to the bottom and will drain out prior
to the lubricant, or it may be mixed with the lubricant, giving it a milky colored appearance.
If water is noticed, have the gear case checked by your dealer.Water in the lubricant may
result in premature bearing failure or, in freezing temperatures , will turn to ice and damage
the gear case .
Whenever you remove the fill/drain plug, examine the magnetic end for metal particles. A
small amount of metal filings or fine metal particles indicates normal gear wear. An exces-
sive amount of metal filings or larger particles (chips) may indicate abnormal gear wear and
should be checked by an authorized dealer.
DRAINING GEAR CASE
1. Place outboard in a vertical operating position.
2. Place a drain pan below outboard.
3. Remove vent plug and fill/drain plug and drain lubricant.
3
,,
, ,
t
GEAR CASE LUBRICANT CAPACITY

Gear case lubricant capacity is approximately 14.68 fl oz (440 ml).
90-857046 AUGUST 199B Page 18· 13

MAINTENANCE
CHECKING GEAR CASE LUBRICANT LEVEL AND REFILLING GEAR CASE

2. Remove vent plug.
3. Place lubricant tube into the fill hole and add lubricant until it appears at the vent hole.
IMPORTANT: Replace sealing washers if damaged.
4. Stop adding lubricant. Install the vent plug and sealing washer before removing the lubri-
cant tube .
5. Remove lubricant tube and reinstall cleaned fill/drain plug and sealin g washer.
o -0-""" C
,", , , ,
[ ,
~
&\
---==---
~
~ ,
I
.a
~ ....
b
a - Vent Plug/Sealing Washer

b - Lubricant Tube
c - Vent Hole
d - Fill/Drain Plug and Sealing Washer
4-1/4 In. (108mm) Diameter Gear Case

When adding or changing gear case lubricant, visually check for the presence of water in
the lubricant. If water is present, it may have settled to the bottom and will drain out prior
to the lubricant, or it may be mixed with the lubricant, giving it a milky colored appearance.
If water is noticed, have the gear case checked by your dealer. Water in the lubricant may
result in premature bearing failure or, in freezing temperatures, will turn to ice and damage
the gear case.
Whenever you remove the fill/drain plug, examine the magnetic end for metal particles. A
small amount of metal filings or fine metal particles indicates normal gear wear. An exces·
sive amount of metal filings or larger particles (chips) may indicate abnormal gear wear and
should be checked by an authorized dealer.
Page 18· 14 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

MAINTENANCE
DRAINING GEAR CASE

2. Place a drain pan below outboard .
3. Remove vent plugs and fill/drain plug and drain lubricant.
e
, "
..
I/, I/,
..
,
/I,
3
GEAR CASE LUBRICANT CAPACITY

Gear case lubricant capacity is approximately 22.5 11 oz (666 ml).
CHECKING LUBRICANT LEVEL AND FILLING GEAR CASE
2. Remove the front vent plug and rear vent plug.
3. Place lubricant tube into the fill hole and add lubricant until it appears at the front vent
hole. At this time install the front vent plug and sealing washer.
4. Continue adding lubricant until it appears at the rear vent hole.
5. Stop adding lubricant. Install the rear vent plug and sealing washe r before removing lu·
bricant tube.
6. Remove lubricant tube and reinstall cleaned fill/drain plug and sealing washer.
0 11lill-
,,
",
~ =
~
"•
!~ ~
I "! 0
c ,, ~
"• ...
~ @
a - Front Vent Plug

b - Rear Vent Plug
c - Front Vent Hole
d - Rear Vent Hole
e - Fill/Drain Plug and Sealing Washer
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 16-1 5

MAINTENANCE
Storage Preparation
The major consideration in preparing your outboard for storage is to protect it from rust , cor-
rosion , and damage caused by freezing of trapped water.
The following storage procedures should be followed to prepare you r outboard for out-of-
season storage or prolonged storage (two month s or longer).
ACAUTION
Never start or run your outboard (even momentarily) without water circulating
through the cooling water intake in the gear case to prevent damage to the water
pump (running dry) or overheating of the engine.
Fuel System
IMPORTANT: Gasoline containing alcohol (ethanol or methanol) can cause a forma-
tion of acid during storage and can damage the fuel system. If the gasoline being use
contains alcohol, it Is advisable to drain as much of the remaining gasoline as posw
sible from the fuel tank, remote fuel line, and engine fuel system.
Fill the fuel system (tank, hoses , fuel pump , and carburetor) with treated (stabilized) fuel to
help prevent formation of varnish and gum. Proceed with following instructions.
1. Portable Fuel Tank - Pour the required amount of Quicksilver Gasoline Stabilizer (follow
instructions on container) into fuel tank. Ti p fuel tank back and forth to mix stabilizer with
the fuel.
2. Permane ntly In stalled Fuel Tank - Pour the required amount of Qu icksilve r Gasoline
Stabilizer (follow instructions on container) into a separate container and mix with
approximately one quart (one liter) of gasoline. Pou r this mixture into fuel tank .
3. Place the outboard in water or connect flushi ng attachment for circulating cooling water.
Run the engine for ten minutes to allow treated fuel to reach the carburetor.
Protecting External Outboard Components

1. Lubricate all outboard components listed in the Inspection and Maintenance Schedule.
2. Touch up any paint nicks.
3. Spray QuicksilverCorrosion Guard on external metal surfaces (except corrosion control
anodes).
Protecting Internal Engine Components
1. Remove the spark plugs and inject a small amount of engine oil inside of each cyl inder.
2. Rotate the flywheel manually several times to distribute the oil in the cylinders. Rei nstall
spark plugs.
3. Change the engine oil.
Gear Case
1. Drain and refill the gear case lubricant (refer to maintenance proced ure).
POSitioning Outboard for Storage
Store outboard in an upright (vertical) position to allow water to drain out of outboard.
Page 1B-16 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MAINTENANCE
ACAUTION
If outboard is stored tilted up in freezing temperature , trapped cooling water or rain
water that may have entered the propeller exhaust outlet in the gear case could
freeze and cause damage to the outboard.
Battery Storage
1. Follow the battery manufacturer's instructions for storage and recharging.
2. Remove the battery from the boat and check water level. Recharge if necessary.
3. Store the battery in a cool , dry place.
4. Periodically check the water level and recharge the battery during storage.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 18-17

GENERAL INFORMATION
Section 1C - General Information
Table of Contents
Serial Number Location . . .. . .. . . 1C-1 Power Trim System . . . . .. . . .. . .......... . 1C-9
Conditions Affecting Performance 1C-2 General Information ................ . . 1C-9
Weather ......... . ........ . . 1C-2 Power Trim Operation . .. .. . .... . ..... . 1C-9
Boat . . . .. . . . . ... . . .. . 1C-3 Trim "In" Angle Adjustment . .. . . . .... . . 1C-10
Engine . .. . .. .. .. . . 1C-4 Trim Tab Adjustment ..... .. .. . .. . . . . . ... . 1C-11
Following Complete Submersion .....• . 1C-5 Compression Check .. . . . .. .. . . . .. . . . ... . 1C-12
Submerged While Running Cylinder Leakage Testing ................ . 1C- 13
(Special Instructions) . .. . . .. . . . ..•.... 1C-5 Analysis . . . . . ... . ................ . 1C- 13
Salt Water Submersion Painting Procedures . . . . . . . .. .... . . . .. . 1C-14
(Special Instructions) . . .......... • .... 1C-5 Cleaning & Painting Aluminum Propellers
Fresh Water Submersion & Gear Housings . .. . .... .. . . . .... . . . . 1C-14
(Special Instructions) . .. . . . .... . • • . . . . 1C-5 Decal Application . . . .... . .. . .... . .. ..... . 1C-15
Propeller Selection . .. . .. . ........ . • . . ... 1C-6 Decal Removal . . . .. . . .. ............. . 1C-15
Propeller Removal/Installation .... . . • . . ... 1C-7 Instructions for "Wet" Application ...... . 1C-15
Standard Models ... ..... .. . ... . . . . . . . 1C-7
Serial Number Location

The Outboard serial number is located on the lower starboard side of the engine block . A
serial nu mber is also located on the starboard side of the swivel bracket.
a - Serial Nu mber
b · Model Year
c- Model Description
d - Year Manufactured
e- Certified Europe Insignia
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 1C-1

GENERAl-INFORMATION
Conditions Affecting Performance

Weather
Raled~ ______________________ _
Horsepower Loss :
Due 10 Atmosphere I
} Conditions I
Summerhp
----1Seconda;~s~u~;--- ---- ~-~
____ ...frO~lIer~e..£.om i!}9TO_ _____ ~ /
Large for -=>ummer /'
Horsepower /' /
/' 1/
b""'~ /
/' J,
/1
,< /' I
q,..'Ii ~y /
~<' / I
""~/
/ ~(,\v" / 1
/ 9.\01'''' /. 9.\~" 1
/ ~~~'I>\\(,\ I
/ ~\~ 1
/ .........- ~\o'f' .. IRPM Drop DUElII ......._
?/ ~.........- 110 Weather I
~ I I
ENGtNE RPM Rated RPM
It is a known fact that weather conditions exert a profound effect on power output of internal
combustion engines. Therefore, established horsepower ratings refer to the power that the
engine will produce at its rated rpm under a specific combination of weather conditions .
Corporations internationally have settled on adoption of I.S.0. (International Standards Or-
ganization) engine test standards, as set forth in I.S.O. 3046 standardizing the computation
of horsepower from data obtained on the dynamometer, correcting all values to the power
that the engine will produce at sea level , at 30% relative humidity at 77 0 F (25 0 C) tempera-
ture and a barometric pressure of 29.61 inches of mercury.
Summer Conditions of high temperature, low barometric pressure and high humidity all
combine to reduce the engine power. This, in turn, is reflected in decreased boat speeds--as
much as 2 or 3 miles-per-hour (3 or 5 Km per-hour) in some cases . (Refer to previous chart.)
Nothing will regain this speed for the boater, but the coming of cool , dry weather.
In pointing out the practical consequences of weather effects, an engine--running on a hot,
humid summer day--may encounter a loss of as much as 14% of the horsepower it would
produce on a dry, brisk spring or fall day. The horsepower, that any internal combustion en-
gine produces, depends upon the density of the air that it consumes and, in turn, this density
is dependent upon the temperature of the air, its barometric pressure and water vapor (or
humidity) content.
Accompanying this weather-inspired loss of power is a second but more subtle loss. At rig-
ging time in early spring , the engine was equipped with a propeller that allowed the engine
to turn within its recommended rpm range at full throttle. With the coming of the summer
weather and the consequent drop in available horsepower, this propeller will, in effect, be-
come too large. Consequently, the engine operates at less than its recommended rpm.
Page 1C-2 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

GENERAL INFORMATION
Due to the horsepower/rpm characteristics of an engine, this will result in further loss of
horsepower at the propeller with another decrease in boat speed. This secondary loss, how-
ever, can be regained by switching to a smaller pitch propeller that allows the engine to again
run at recommended rpm .
For boaters to realize optimum engine performance under changing weather conditions, it
is essential that the engine have the proper propeller to allow it to operate at or near the top
end of the recommended maximum rpm range at wide-open-throttle with a normal boat
load.
Not only does this allow the engine to develop full power, but equally important is the fact
that the engine also will be operating in an rpm range that discourages damaging detona-
tion. This, of course, enhances overall reliability and durability of the engine.
Boat
WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION
1. Proper positioning of the weight inside the boat (persons and gear) has a significant ef-
fect on the boat's performance, for example:
a. Shifting weight to the rear (stern)
(1 .) Generally increases top speed.
(2.) If in excess, can cause the boat to porpoise.
(3.) Can make the bow bounce excessively in choppy water.
(4.)WiII increase the danger of the following - wave splashing into the boat when
coming off plane.
b. Shifting weighllo the front (bow)
(1.) Improves ease of planing off.
(2.)Generally improves rough water ride.
(3.) If excessive, can make the boat veer left and right (bow steer).
BOTTOM
For maximum speed, a boat bottom should be nearly a flat plane where it contacts the water
and particularly straight and smooth in fore-and-aft direction.
1. Hook: Exists when bottom is concave in fore-and-aft direction when viewed from the
side. When boat is planing, "hook" causes more lift on bottom near transom and allows
bow to drop, thus greatly increasing wetted surface and reducing boat speed. "Hook"
frequently is caused by supporting boat too far ahead of transom while hauling on a trail-
er or during storage.
2. Rocker: The reverse of hook and much less common. "Rocker" exists if bottom is con-
vex in fore-and-aft direction when viewed from the side, and boat has strong tendency
to porpoise.
3. Surface Roughness; Moss, barnacles, etc. , on boat or corrosion of outboard 's gear
housing increase skin friction and cause speed loss. Clean surfaces when necessary.
WATER ABSORPTION
It is imperative that all through hull fasteners be coated with a quality marine sealer at time
of installation. Water intrusion into the transom core and/or inner hull will result in additional
boat weight (reduced boat performance), hull decay and eventual structural failure.
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 1C-3

GENERAL INFORMATION
CAVITATION
Cavitation is caused by water vapor bubbles forming either from a sharp edge or angle on
the gear case or from an irregularity in the propeller blade itself. These vapor bubbles flow
back and collapse when striking the surface of the propeller blade resulting in the erosion
of the propeller blade surface. If allowed to continue, eventual blade failure (breakage) will
occur.
Engine
DETONATION
Detonation in a 4-cycle engine resembles the "p inging" heard in an automobile engine. It
can be otherwise described as a tin-like "rattling" or "plinking" sound.
Detonation is an explosion of an unburned portion of the fuel/air charge after the spark plug
has fired. Detonation creates severe shock waves in the engine, and these shock waves
often find or create a weakness; The dome of a piston, cylinder head/gasket, piston rings
or piston ring lands, piston pin and roller bearings.
A few of the most common causes of detonation in a marine 4-cycle application are as fol-
lows:
• Over-advanced ignition timing.
• Use of low octane gasoline.
• Propeller pitch too high (engine rpm below recommended maximum range).
• Lean fuel mixture at or near wide-open-throttle.
• Spark plugs (heat range too hot - incorrect reach - cross-firing).
• Inadequate engine cooling (deteriorated cooling system).
• Combustion chamber/piston deposits (result in higher compression ratio).
Detonation usually can be prevented if:
1. The engine is correctly set up.
2. Diligent maintenance is applied to combat the detonation causes.
51115
Damaged Piston Resulting from Detonation
Page 1C-4 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

GENERAL INFORMATION
Following Complete Submersion

Submerged While Running (Special Instructions)
When an engine is submerged while running , the possibility of internal engi ne damage is
greatly increased . If, after engine is recovered and with spark plugs removed , engine fails
to turn over freely when turning flywheel , the possibility of internal damage (bent connecting
rod and/or bent crankshaft) exists. If this is the case, the powerhead must be disassembled.
Salt Water Submersion (Special Instructions)

Due to the corrosive effect of salt water on internal engine components, complete disassem-
bly is necessary before any attempt is made to start the engine.
Fresh Water Submersion (Special Instructions)

1. Recover engine as quickly as possible.
2. Remove cowling.
3. Flush exterior of outboard with fresh water to remove mud, weeds , etc. DO NOT attempt
to start engine if sand has entered powerhead , as powerhead will be severely damaged.
Disassemble powerhead if necessary to clean components.
4. Remove spark plugs and get as much water as possible out of powerhead . Most water
can be eliminated by placing engine in a horizontal position (with spark plug holes down)
and rotating flywheeL
5. Change engine oil and filter as outlined in Section 1 B " Changing Engine Oil ". Run
outboard for short time and check for presence of water in oil, if water present (milky
appearance) drain and refill as previously mentioned.
6. Pour alcohol into carburetor throats (alcohol will absorbed water). Again rotate flywheel.
7. Turn engine over and pour alcohol into spark plug openings and rotate flywheel.
S. Turn engine over (place spark plug openings down) and pour engine oil into throat of
carburetors while rotating flywheel to distribute oil throughout crankcase.
9. Again turn engine over and pour approximately one teaspoon of engine oil into each
spark plug opening. Again rotate flywheel to distribute oil in cylinders.
10. Remove and clean carburetors and fuel pump assembly.
11. Dry all wiring and electrical components using compressed air.
12. Disassemble the engine starter motor and dry the brush contacts , armature and other
corrodible parts.
13. Reinstall spark plugs , carburetors and fuel pump.
14. Attempt to start engine, using a fresh fuel source. If engine starts, it should be run for
at least one hour to eliminate any water in engine.
15. If engine fails to start, determine cause (fuel, electrical or mechanical). Engine should
be run within 2 hours after recovery of outboard from water, or serious internal damage
may occur. If unable to start engine in th is period, disassemble engine and clean all
parts. Apply oil as soon as possible.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 1C-5

GENERAL INFORMATION
Propeller Selection
For in-depth information on marine propellers and boat performance - written by marine en-
gineers - see your Authorized Dealer for the illustrated "What You Should Know About
Quicksilver Propellers ... and Boat Performance Information" (Part No. 90-86144).
For best all around performance from your outboard/boat combination, select a propeller
that allows the engine to operate in the upper half of the recommended full throttle rpm range
with the boat normany loaded (refer to Specifications). This rpm range allows for better ac-
celeration while maintaining maximum boat speed.
If changing conditions cause the rpm to drop below the recommended range (such as warm-
er, more humid weather, operation at higher elevations, increased boat load or a dirty boat
bottom/gear case) a propeller change or cleaning may be required to maintain performance
and ensure the outboard's durability.
Check full-throttle rpm using an accurate tachometer with the engine trimmed out to a bal-
anced-steering condition (steering effort equal in both directions) without causing th e pro-
pener to "break loose".
Refer to ~Quicksilver Accessory Guide" for a complete list of available propellers.
1. Select a propener that will allow the engine to operate at or near the top of the recom-
mended fun throttle rpm range (listed in "Specifications," preceding) with a normal load.
Maximum engine speed (rpm) for propeller selection exists when boat speed is maxi-
mum and trim is minimum for that speed. (High rpm , caused by an excessive trim angle,
should not be used in determining correct propeller.) Normally, there is a 150-350 rpm
change between propeller pitches.
2. If full throttle operation is below the recommended range, the propeller MUST BE
changed to one with a lower pitch to prevent loss of performance and possible engine
damage.
3. After initial propeller installation, the following common conditions may require that the
propeller be changed to a lower pitch:
a. Warmer weather and great humidity will cause an rpm loss.
b. Operating in a higher elevation causes an rpm loss.
c. Operating with a damaged propeller or a dirty boat bottom or gear housing will cause
an rpm loss.
d. Operation with an increased load (additional passengers, equipment, pulling skiers,
etc.).
Page 1C-6 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

GENERAL INFORMATION
Propeller Removal/Installation
Standard Models
If the propeller shaft is rotated while the engine is in gear, there is the po,;sib
engine will crank over and start. To prevent this type of accidental engine start-
ing and possible se rious injury caused from being struck by a rotating propeller,
always shift outboard to neutral pos ition and remove spark plug leads when you
are servicing the propeller.
1. Shift outboard to neutral position.
+N+ +N+
;8
~-S;;::::sz
D· I
2. Remove the spark plug leads to prevent engine from starting .
3. Straighten the bent tabs on the propeller nut retainer.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 1C-7

GENERAL INFORMATION
4. Place a block of wood between gear case and propeller to hold propeller and remove
propeller nut.
5. Pull propeller straight off shaft . If propeller is seized to the shaft and cannot be removed ,
have the propeller removed by an authorized dealer.
6. Coat the prope ller shaft with Quicksilve r Anti-Corrosion Grease or 2-4-C Mari ne Lubri -
cant with Teflon.
o L
IMPORTANT: To preventthe propeller hub from corroding and seizing lothe propeller
shaft, especially in salt water, always apply a coat of the recommended lubricant to
the entire propeller shaft at the recommended maintenance intervals and also each
time the propeller is removed.
7. Flo-Torgue I Drive Hub Propellers
a- FOlWard Thrust Hub

b- Propeller
c- Prope ller Nut Retainer
d- Propeller Nut
Page 1C-8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

GENERAL INFORMATION
8. Flo-Torgue II prive Hub Propellers
@!II IIII'
~
a - Forward Thrust Hub
b- Propeller
c - Drive Sleeve
d· Rear Thrust Hub
e- Retainer
f - Propeller Nut
9. Place propeller nut retainer over pins. Place a block of wood between gear case and
propeller and tighten propeller nut to 551b-ft (75 Nm), aligning flat sides of the propeller
nut with tabs on the propeller nut retainer.
10. Secure propeller nut by bending tabs up and against the flats on the propeller nut.
a b
a· Retainer Pins
b- Tabs
11 . Rei nstall spark plug leads.
Power Trim System

General Information
The power trim system is filled at the manufacturer and is ready for use.
Trim outboard through entire trim and tilt range several times to remove any air from the sys-
tem.
The trim system is pressurized and is not externally vented.
Power Trim Operation
With most boats, operating around the middle of the "trim" range will give satisfactory reo
suits. However, to take full advantage of the trimming capability there may be times when
you choose to trim your outboard all the way in or out. Along with an improvement in some
performance aspects comes a greater responsibility for the operator, and this is being aware
of some potential control hazards. The most significant control hazard is a pull or ''torq ue''
that can be felt on the steering wheel or tiller handle. T his steering torque results from the
outboard being trimmed so that the propeller shaft is not parallel to the water surface. 8
90-657046 AUGUST 1998 Page 1C-9
I
~
GENERAL INFORMATION
Av<OOd po:s'iilble or or out be-

yond a neutral steering condition, a pull on the steering wheel or tiller handle in ei·
ther direction may result. Failure to keep a continuous firm grip on the steering
wheel or tiller handle when this condition exists can result In loss of boat control
as the outboard can turn freely. The boat can now " spin out" or go into a very tight
maximum turn which , if unexpected, can result in occupants being thrown within
the boat or out of the boat.
Consider the following lists carefully :
TRIMMING IN OR DOWN CAN:
1. Lower the bow.
2. Result in quicker planing off, especially with a heavy load or a stern heavy boat.
3. Generally improve the ride in choppy water.
4. Increase steering torque or pull to the right (with the normal right hand rotation
propeller).
5. In excess, lower the bow of some boats to a point where they begin to plow with their
bow in the water while on plane . Th is can result in an unexpected turn in either direction
called Mbow steering" or "over steering" if any turn is attempted or if a significant wave
is encountered.
Avoid possible serious injury or death. Adjust outboard to an Intermediate trim po·
sitlon as soon as boat is on plane to avoid possible ejection due to boat spin-out.
Do not attempt to turn boat when on I if outboard Is trimmed extremely in or
down and there is a on the I wheel or tiller handle.
TRIMMING OUT OR UP CAN:
1. Lift the bow higher out of the water.
2. Generally increase top speed.
3. Increase clearance over submerged objects or a shallow bottom.
4. Increase steering torque or pull to the left at a normal installation height (with the normal
right hand rotation propeller).
5. In excess, cause boat "porpoising ~ (bouncing) or propeller ventilation .
S. Cause engine overheating if any water intake holes are above the water line.
Trim "In" Angle Adjustment

Some outboard boats, particularly some bass boats, are built with a greater than normal
transom angle which will allow the outboard to be trimmed further "in" or "under". This great-
er trim "under" capability is desirable to improve acceleration , reduce the angle and time
spent in a bow high boat, altitude during planing off, and in some cases, may be necessary
to plane off a boat with aft live wells , given the variety of available propellers and height
range of engine installations.
However, once on plane , the engine should be trimmed to a more intermediate position to
a avoid a bow-down planing condition called "plowing". Plowing can cause "bow steering"
or "over steering" and inefficiently consumes horsepower. In this condition , if attempting a
turn or encountering a diagonal, moderate wake , a more abrupt turn than intended may re-
sult.
Page 1C-10 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

GENERAL INFORMATION
In rare circumstances, the owner may decide to limit the trim in. Th is can be accomplished
by repositioning th e tilt stop pins into whatever adjustment holes in the transom brackets
is desired.
Avoid possible serious injury or death. Adjust outboard to an i trim po-

sition as soon as boat is on plane to avoid possible ejection due to boat spin-out.
Do not attempt to turn boat when on plane if outboard is trimmed extremely in or
down and there is a pull on the steering wheel or tiller handle.
a a
o
o
a- Tilt Stop Pins
Trim Tab Adjustment

Propeller steering torque will cause your boat to pull in one direction. This steering torque
is a normal thin g that results from you r outboard not being trimmed so the propeller shaft
is parallel to the water surface. T he trim tab can help to compensate for th is steering torque
in many cases and can be adjusted within limits to reduce any unequal steering effort.
NOTE: Trim tab adjustment will have little effect reducing steering torque if the outboard is
installed with the anti-ventilation plate approximately 2 inches (50mm) or more above the
boat bottom.
Operate your boat at normal cruising speed , trimmed to desired position. Turn you r boat left
and right and note the direction the boat turns more easily.
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 1C-11

GENERAL INFORMAnON
If adjustment is necessary, loosen trim tab bolt and make small adjustments at a time. If the
boat turns more easily to the left, move the trailing edge of trim tab to the left. If the boat turns
more easily to the right move the trailing edge of trim tab to the right. Retighten bolt and ret-
est.
--
[
--
a - Trim Tab
Compression Check
1. Remove spark plugs.
2. Install compression gauge in spark plug hole.
3. Hold throttle plate at W.O.l.
4. Crank the engine over until the compression reading peaks on the gauge. Record the
reading .
5. Check and record compression of each cylinder. The highest and lowest reading
recorded should not differ by more than 15% (see example chart below). A reading
below 120 psi might indicate a total engine wear problem.
Example of compression test differences
Ma ximum (ps i) Minimum (psi)

180 162
150 127.5
6. Compression check is important because an engine with low or uneven compression

cannot be tuned successfully to give peak performance. It is essential , therefore, that
improper compression be corrected before proceeding with an engine tuneup.
7. Cylinder scoring: If powerhead shows any indication of overheating, such as discolored
or scorched paint, visually inspect cylinders for scoring or other damage as outlined in
Section 4 uPowerhead."
IMPORTANT: Performing a compress ion check on engines containing the compres-
s ion relief cam w ill give inaccurate (low ) readings, instead use the following " Cylin-
der Leakage Testing" procedu re.
Page 1C·12 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

GENERAL INFORMATION
Cylinder Leakage Testing

NOTE: Cylinder leakage testing", along with compression testing, can help the mechanic
pinpoint the source of a mechanical failure by gauging the amount of leakage in an engine
cylinder. Refer to the manufactures tester instructions for proper testing procedures .
• Courtesy of Snap-an-Tools
Cylinder Leakage Tester (Snap-On-Tools MT324)

NOTE: Spark plug hole is a 12 mm diameter. Use Snap·On • Tool MT26· 18 adapter with
valve core removed.
Analysis
Due to standard engine tolerances and engine wear, no cylinder will maintain a 0% of leak·
age. It is important only that cylinders have somewhat consistent reading between them .
Differences of 15 to 30% indicate excessive leakage. Larger engines tend to have a larger
percentage of cylinder leakage than smaller engines.
If excessive leakage is present, first check that the piston is at top dead center of it's com·
pression stroke. Leakage will naturally occur if the exhaust or intake valve is open.
To determine the cause of high percentage leaks, you must locate where the air is escaping
from. Listen for air escaping thru the carburetor intake, adjacent spark plug holes, exhaust
pipe , crankcase fill plug. Use the following table to aid in locati ng the source of cylinder leak·
age:
Air Escaping From: Indicates Possible Defective:

Carburetor Intake Valve
Exhaust System Exhaust Valve
Crankcase Fill Plug Piston or Rings
Adjacent Cylinders Head Gasket
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 1C·13

GENERAL INFORMATION
Painting Procedures
Cleaning & Painting Aluminum Propellers & Gear Housings
PROPELLERS
1. Sand the entire area to be painted with 3M 120 Regalite Polycut or coarse Scotch-Brite,
disc or belts.
2. Feather edges of all broken paint edges. Try not to sand through the primer.
3. Clean the surface to be painted using PPG Industries DX330 Wax and Grease Remover
or equivalent (Xylene or M.E.K.).
4. If bare metal has been exposed, use Quicksilver's Ught Gray Primer.
5. Allow a minimum of 1 hour dry time and no more than 1 week before applying the finish
coat.
6. Apply the finish coat using Quicksilver's EDP Propeller Black.
GEAR HOUSINGS
The following procedures should be used in refinishing gear housings. Thi s procedure wilt
provide the most durable paint system available in the field . The materials recommended
are of high quality and approximate marine requirements . The following procedure will pro-
vide a repaint job that compares with a properly applied factory paint finish. It is recom-
mended that the listed materials be purchased from a local Ditzler Automotive Finish Supply
Outlet. The minimum package quantity of each material shown following is sufficient to refin-
ish several gear housings.
Procedure:
1. Wash gear housing with a muriatic acid base cleaner to remove any type of marine
growth, and rinse with water, if necessary.
2. Wash gear housing with soap and water, then rinse .
3. Sand blistered area with 3M 180 grit sandpaper or P180 Gold Film Disc to remove paint
blisters only. Feather edge all broken paint edges.
4. Clean gear housing thoroughly with (OX-330) wax and grease remover.
5. Spot repair surfaces where bare metal is exposed with (DX-S03) alodine treatment .
IMPORTANT: Do not use any type of aerosol spray paints as the paint will not properly
adhere to the surface nor will the coating be sufficiently thick to resist future paint
blistering.
6. Mix epoxy chromate primer (DP·40) with equal part catalyst (DP-401) per manufactur-
ers instructions, allowing proper induction period for permeation of the epoxy primer and
catalyst.
7. Allowa minimum of one hour drying time and no more than one week before top coating
assemblies.
8. Use Ditzler Urethane DU9000 for Mercury Black, DU34334 for Mariner Grey, and
DU3S466 for Force Charcoal, and DU33414M for Sea Ray White . Catalyze all four col-
ors with Ditzler DUS catalyst mixed 1:1 ratio. Reduce with solvents per Ditzler label.
Page 1C-14 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

GENERAL INFORMATION
ACAUTION
Be sure to comply with instructions on the label for ventilation and respirators. Us~
ing a spray gun, apply one half to one mil even film thickness. Let dry, flash off for
five minutes and apply another even coat of one half to one mil film thickness . This
urethane paint will dry to the touch in a matter of hours, but will remain sensitive
to scratches and abrasions for a few days.
9. The type of spray gun used will determine the proper reduction ratio of the paint.
IMPORTANT: Do not paint sacrificial zinc trim t ab or zinc anode.
10. Cut out a cardboard "pl ug" for trim tab pocket to keep paint off of mating suliace to main-
tain good continuity ci rcuitry between trim tab and gear housing.
Decal Application
Decal Removal
1. Mark decal location before removal to assure proper alignment of new decal.
2. Carefu lly soften decal and decal adhesive with a heat gun or heat blower while removing
old decal.
3. Clean decal co ntact area with a 1:1 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water.
4. Thoroug hly dry decal contact area and check for a completely cleaned suliace.
Instructions for " Wet" Application
NOTE: The foflowing decal installation instructions are provided for a "Wet" installation. All
decals should be applied wet.
TOOLS REQUIRED
1. Plastic Squeegee"
2. Stick Pin
3. Dish Washing Liquid/Detergent without ammonia" "Joy" and "Drift" are known to be
compatible for this process.
.. Automotive Body Filler Squeegee
... Do not use a soap that contains petroleum based
solvents.
SERVICE TIP: Placement of decals using the "Wet" application will allow time to posi-
tion decal. Read entire installation instructions on this technique before proceeding.
TEMPERATURE
IMPORTANT: Installation of vinyl decals should not be attempted while in direct sun-
light. Air and surface temperature should be between 60°F (15°C) and 100°F (38°C)
for best application.
SURFACE PREPARATION
IMPORTANT: Do not use a soap or any petroleum based solvents to clean application
surface.
Clean entire appl ication surface with mild dish washing liquid and water. Rinse surface thor-
oughly with clean water.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 1C-15

GENERAL INFORMATION
DECAL APPLICATION
1. Mix ' /2 ounce (16 ml) of dish washing liquid in one gallon (4 I) of cool water to use as
wetting solution.
NOTE: Leave protective masking, if present, on the face of decal until final steps of decal
installation. Th is will ensure that the vinyl decal keeps it's shape during installation.
2. Place the decal face down on a clean work su rtace and remove the paper backing from
~adhesive side" of decal.
3. Using a spray bottle, flood the entire ~adhesive side" of the decal with the pre-mixed wet-
ting solution.
4. Flood area where the decal will be positioned with wetting solution.
5. Position pre-wetted decal on wetted surtace and slide into position.
6. Starting at the ce nter of the decal, "lightly" squeegee out the air bubbles and wetting
solution with overlapping strokes to the outer edge of the decal. Continue going over the
decal surtace until all wrinkles are gone and adhesive bonds to the cowl surtace.
7. Wipe decal surtace with soft paper towel or cloth .
B. Wait 10 - 15 minutes.
9. Starting at one corner, "carefully and slowly" pull the masking off the decal surtace at
a 1BO° angle.
NOTE: To remove any remaining bubbles, pierce the decal at one end of the bubble with
stick pin and press out the entrapped air or welting solution with your thumb (moving toward
the puncture).
Page 1C·16 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION
Section 1D - Outboard Motor Installation
Table of Contents
Electric Fuel Pump ... . .. . 10-1 Wiring Harness . . . .. . . . .. .. . . .. . .. . . 10-7
Boat Horsepower Capacity 10-1 Battery Cable Connections .. . . . . . • . . . 10-8
Start in Gear Protection .. . ............. .• 10-2 Single Outboards ............ • • .. . • ... 10-8
Selecting Accessories For The Outboard .. . 10-2 Dual Outboards . . . .. .. . ..... . . . . . . .. . 10-8
Installation Specifications .. . . .. . . . . . ..... . 10-2 Shift and Throttle Cable .. . .. . .. . ... . .. . . . 10-9
Lifting Outboard ........... . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Shift Cable Installation . . .. . . .. . .. . . . . . 10-9
Steering Cable . .. ... . ................ . . . 10-3 Throttle Cable Installation .......... . . . 10-1 1
Steering Cable Seal ......... . . . . . ..... . . 10-4 Trim-In Stop Adjustment - Power
Steering Link Rod .. . . . . . ............. . 10-4 Trim Models .................. . .... . . .. . 10·12
Installing Outboard - Thumb Screw Models . 10-5 Trim Tab Adjustment ................•.... 10-12
Installing Outboard - Non Thumb Screw
Models. .... . ....... . . . . . .. . ....... 10-6
Electric Fuel Pump

If an electric fuel pump is used , the fuel pressure must not exceed 4 psig at the engin e. If
necessary, install a pressu re regulator to regulate the pressure.
Boat Horsepower Capacity

U-S_ COAST GUARD CAPACITY
MAXIMUM HORSEPOWER XXX
MAXIMUM PERSON
CAPACITY (POUNDS) xxx
MAXIMUM WEIGHT
CAPACITY xxx
Do not overpower or overload the boat. Most boats will carry a required capacity plate indi-
cating the maximum acceptable power and load as determined by the manufacturer follow-
ing certain federal guidelines. If in doubt, contact your dealer or the boat manufacturer.
Using an outboard that the horsepower a boat can: 1.

cause loss of boat control 2. place too much weight at the transom, altering the de-
signed flotation characteristics of the boat or 3. cause the boat to break apart, par-
ticularly around the transom area. Overpowering a boat can result in serious injury,
death, or boat damage.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 10-1

Start in Gear Protection

The remote control connected to the outboard must be equipped with a start-in-gear protec-
tion device. Th is prevents the engine from starting in gear.
engine. The design of this outboard requires that the remote control used with
must have a built in start-in-gear protection device.
Selecting Accessories For The Outboard

Genuine Quicksilver Parts and Accessories have been specifically designed and tested for
this outboard.
Some accessories not manufactured or sold by Quicksilver are not designed to be safely
used with this outboard or outboard operating system. Acquire and read the Installation, Op-
eration, and Maintenance manuals for all selected accessories.
Installation Specifications
Transom Opening " A" (Minimum)

Single Engine (Remote) 19 in. (483 mm)
Single Engine (liIIer) 30 in. (762 mm)
Dual Engines 40 in . (1016 mm)
Engine Center Line For Dual Engines " B" (Minimum)

26 in. (660mm)
Page 1D-2 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

Lifting Outboard
1. Use lifting eye on engine.
Steering Cable
STARBOARD SIDE ROUTED CABLE
1. Lubricate the entire cable end with 2-4-C Lubricant with Teflon.
??1
::: I GFTl',"
~ "II '=)
[jLD> 2-4-C wlT.flon (92-850736Al)
2. Insert steering cable into tilt tube .
3. Torque nut to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 N·m).
3
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 1D·3 I
~
Steering Cable Seal

1. Mark tilt tube 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) from end. Install seal components.
2. Thread cap to the mark.
~
. . ~ 1/4 In. (6.4mm)
I-
I
- a t~~
a - 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) Mark
b • Plastic Spacer
c - O-Ring Seal
d - Cap
Steering Link Rod

1. Install steering link rod per illustration.
®--l 00
a - Special Bolt (10-90041) Torque to 20 lb. h. (27.1 N·m)
b - Nylon Insert Locknut (1 1-34863) Torque to 20 lb. h. (27. 1 N·m)
c - Spacer (12-71970)
d - Flat Washer (2)
e - Nylon Insert Locknut (11-34863) Tighten Locknut Until it Seats, Then Back Nut
Off 1/4 Turn
f • Use Middle Hole
IMPORTANT: The steering link rod that connects the steering cable to the engine
must be fastened using special bolt ("a" • Part Number 1()"90041) and self locking
nuts ("b" & "e" - Part Number 11-34863). These locknuts must never be replaced with
common nuts (non locking) as they will work loose and vibrate off, freeing the Un\<.
rod to disengage.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Disengagement of a steeri ng link rod can r.'Iull

sharp turn. This potentially violent action can cause occupants to
board exposing them to serious or death.
Installing Outboard - Thumb Screw Models
OOllb,oalrd must transom one two ways:

tened to transom with thumb screws, and mounting bolts (provided), or 2. secured
to the transom using the optional outboard mounting kit (shown below). Should the
outboard strike an underwater object or be steered into a sharp turn , failure to fas-
ten outboard correctly to the boat transom with mounting bolts or optional mount-
kit could result in outboard ejecting suddenly off boat transom causing serious
death, boat damage, or loss of outboard.
IMPORTANT: Optional outboard mounting kits shown, must be used if outboard will not be
permanently fastened to the transom with mounting bolts.
a - Outboard Mounting Kit Part No. 812432A4
1. Center outboard on the transom. Install the outboard so that the anti-ventilation plate
is in line or within 1 in . (25 mm) below the bottom of the boat.
--=l1M~~'~a
0-1 in. ~
(0 - 25 mm)
a - Anti-Ventilation Plate
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 10-5

2. Fasten outboard with provided mounting hardware shown.
a - 1/2 in. Diameter Bolts (2)

b - Flat Washers
c • Locknuts
d • Marine Sealer - Apply to Shanks of Bolts, Not Threads
e - Thumb Screws - Tighten Securely
Installing Outboard - Non Thumb Screw Models

1. Attach (tape) engine mounting template (located in this manual) to boat transom.
, .
•
2. Mark and drill four 17/32 in. (13.5 mm) mounting holes.
3. Install the outboard so that the anti-ventilation plate is in-line or within 1 in. (25 mm) be-
low the bottom of the boat.
~1j~~§r---<
0-1 in, J--N~'A
(0 - 25 mm)
a - Anti-Ventilation Plate
Page 10-6 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

4. Fasten outboard with provided mounting hardware shown.
a - 1/2 in. Diameter Bolts (2)

b - Flat Washers
c • Locknuts
d - Marine Sealer - Apply to Shanks of Bolts , Not Threads
Wiring Harness
IMPORTANT: Warning Horn Requ irement - The remote control or key switch assem-
bly must be wired with a wa rn ing horn. Thi s warning horn is used with the engine
warning system.
1. Route wiring harness into bottom cowl.
2. Connect wiring. Place harness into the holder.
a - Power Trim Connections

b - Holder - Place Harness Into Holder
90·857046 AUGUST 1998

Battery Cable Connections

Single Outboards
a - Red Sleeve (Positive)

b - Black Sleeve (Negative)
c - Starting Battery
Dual outboards
1. Connect a common ground cable (wire size same as engine baHery cables) between
negative (- ) terminals on starting batteries.
~_/
I
a - Ground Cable (Same Wire Size As Engine Battery Cable) - Connect Between
Negative (-) Terminals
Page 10·8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Shift and Throttle Cable

Install cables into the remote control following the instructions provided with the remote con-
trol.
NOTE: Install the shift cable to the engine first. The shift cable is the first cable to move when
the remote control handle is moved out of neutral.
Shift Cable Installation
1. Position remote control into neutral.
• •
2. Shift outboard into neutral.

3. Measure the distance between pin and center of lower hole.
I I I I I
",I , ,101, .1,1, .1,1, ",I, ",I , ,1010 ,),1. ,1,1 ,1,1.
14--@
a - Distance Between Pin And Center of Lower Hole

b - Pin
c - Lower Hole
4. Fit shift cable through rubber grommet.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 1D-9

5. PuSh in on the cable end until resistance is felt.
6. While pushing in on the cable end , adjust the cable barrel to attain the measured dis·
tance taken in Step 3.
r:::]::::I::XI)::I:::I:r.:I,;::I)::J:::I:::J
14--@
a - Adjust Cable Barrel To Attain The Measured Distance Taken In Step 3

b - Cable Barrel
7. Place cable barrel into the barrel holder. Fasten cable with retainer.
a - Place Barrel Into Barrel Holder

b - Retainer
8. Check shift cable adjustments as follows:

a. Shift remote control into forward . The propeller shaft should be locked in gear. If not,
adjust the barrel closer to the cable end.
b. Shift remote control into neutral. The propeller shaft should turn freely without drag.
If not, adjust the barrel away from the cable end. Repeat steps a and b.
c. Shift remote control into reverse while turning propeller. The propeller shaft should
be locked in gear. If not, adjust the barrel away from the cable end . Repeat steps a
thru c.
d. Shift remote control back to neutral. The propeller shaft should turn freely without
drag. If not, adjust the barrel closer to the cable end. Repeat steps a thru d. 8
Page 10·10 90-857046 AUGUST 1998
I
Throttle Cable Installation

1. Position remote control into neutral .
• •
2. Fit throttle cable through rubber grommet.
3. Install throttle cable with retainer pin. Lock retainer pin in place.
4. Adjust the throttle cable barrel until a 1/16 in. (1 .6 mm) gap exists between the oval
shaped boss and the cam.
~----::::::...21~
/ 1~6~in. (1.6 mm)
~ b
a - Throttle Cable
b - Retainer Pin
c - Throttle Cable Barrel
d - Oval Shaped Boss
e -Cam
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 10-11

OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTAllATION
5. Fasten control cables with the cable latch.

'V I
/
/..i..!:.
IMPORTANT: After installation, move the remote control handle a few times from the
neutral position to the wide-open-throttle position in forward gear. Check for the spe-
cified gap between the oval shaped boss and the throttle cam . If necessary, readjust
the barrel.
Trim-In Stop Adjustment - Power Trim Models

If an adj ustment is required , purchase a stainless steel tilt pin (PIN 17-49930A 1) and insert
it through whatever pin hole is desired. The non-stainless steel shipping bolt should not be
used in this application other than on a temporary basis.
a - Tilt Pin
Trim Tab Adjustment

The trim tab can be adjusted with in limits to help compensate for steering torque.
Adjust trim tab as follows:
1. If boat tends to pull to the right, move the rear edge of the trim tab to th e right.
2. If boat tends to pull to the left, move the rear edge of the trim tab to the left.
NOTE: Trim tab adjustment wilf have little effect reducing steering torque if the anti-ventila-
tion plate is raised 2 inches (50 mm) or more above the boat bottom.
Page 10-12 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

IGNITION
ELECTRICAL
I
Section 2A - Ignition
Table of Contents
- - - - - ,
Table of Contents ... . . • .... • .... • ....... 2A·l Tool: Multimeter/DVA Tester 91-99750A 1 2A-13
Specifications......... . .... . ....... . .... 2A-2 Ignition Diagnostic Procedures....... 2A·14
Special Tools .... . ......... • .... . ..• . . .. 2A-3 Testing Ignition Components. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2A-17
Flywheel..... .. . . . . .... • .. • .... 2A·6 Resistance Tests... .... . .......... 2A-17
Electrical Components ......... . . . . . . . . . . 2A-8 Spark Plug Cap Removal . . . . . . 2A-18
Ignition Description ................... ... 2A·l0 Spark Plug Cap Resistor Test . . . .. . . 2A-19
Ignition Component Description . . . . . . ..... 2A-l0 Flywheel Removal and Installation...... 2A-21
Electronic Control Module (ECM) .... .. . 2A-l0 Stator Removal and Installation .. . . . .. . 2A·24
Crank Position Sensor.... .... .. 2A-l1 Timing Belt Removal and Installation. ... . 2A·25
Stator Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2A·l1 ECM Removal and Installation ............ 2A-26
Flywheel Assembly............. . . .... 2A-12 Ignition Coil Removal and Installation. ... . . 2A-27
Ignition Coils .. .... .. . . ... . . • . . .. 2A-12 Voltage Regulator Removal and Installation. 2A·28
Ignition Test Procedures ............. . .... 2A·12 Crank Position Sensor Removal/Ins!. 2A-29
Direct Voltage Adapter (OVA) . . . . . . . ... 2A-12 Temperature Sensor RemovaVlnsl. 2A·30
Ignition Troubleshooting .................. 2A·1 3
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2A-1

IGNITION
Specifications

Spark Plug:
Type NGK DPR6EA-9
Gap 0.035 in. (1.0 mm)
Hex Size 18 mm
Firing Order 1-2-3
Ignition Timing:
@ Idle (800 rpm) 10" B.T.D.C
@ WOT (6000 rpm) 28" B.T.D.C
IGNITION
Charge Coil Resistance 660 - 71011 (GRNIWHT - WHT/GRN)
SYSTEM
Crank Position Sensor Resistance 300 - 350 11 (RED - WHT)
Readings taken @
68' F (20' q.
Primary 0.08 - 0.711 (BlK - BlKIWHT)
Secondary (w/o Bools) 3.5 - 4.7 kl1 (BlK - High Tension)
Soft Reduclion (Relards Timing) 6200 rpm
6 Amp. Manual Lighting Coil Output 6 Amps .
Lighting Coil Resistance 0.9 - 1.1 Ohms (YEl-YEL)
CHARGING
15 Amp. Electric Alternator Output 12.6 V-15 Amps. (185 Watts)
SYSTEM
Readings taken @
Battery Charging Coil Resistance 0.22 - 0.24 Ohms (YEl-YEl)
68°F (20°C).
(For Electrothermal Valve) 6.7-7.1 Ohms (YEUBlK-YEUBlK)
Quicksilver Tachometer Setting "6P" or "4"
Page 2A·2 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

IGNITION
Special Tools
1. Flywheel Holder PIN 91-83163M
2. Flywheel Puller PIN 91-83164M
3. TIming Light PIN 91-99379
4. Direct Voltage Adapter PIN 91-89045

•
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2A-3

IGNITION
5. DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multi-meter PIN 91 -854009A 1
6. Digital Diagnostic Tester 91-823686A2
7. Cartridge 91-822608--5
8. Adapter Harness 84-822560A 7 and 84-822560A 10
Page 2A-4 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

IGNITION
Notes:
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2A-S

IGNmON
FLYWHEEL
3--c:::::J
"-1
9110
7 ~~ 8 I 6
\ 10 ___ @ 5
: ~
( I
I 4
/
0
~~~ @}
11
12
~ Loctite 222
[iiill::D 4-Stroke Outboard Oil (92-B2BOOOA 12)
Page 2A-6 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

IGNITION
FLYWHEEL
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. OESCRIPTION lb. in. lb. ft. N·m
1 1 FLYWHEEL COVER ELECTRIC
- 2- - 4- --
SCREW (M6 x 25) 45 5.1
3 1 DECAL-EPA Information
----
4 1 FLYWHEEL (ELECTRIC)
--
5 1 FLYWHEEL (MANUAL)
6 1 DECAL-Waming Spinning flywheel
--
7 1 DECAL-Timing Marks
8 1 DECAL-Waming-Neutral
9 1 NUT 116 157
10 1 WASHER
11 3 SCREW (M5 x 25) 85 9.6
--
1 STATOR (ELECTRIC)
12
1 STATOR (MANUAL)
--
13 1 LOAD RING
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2A-7

IGNITION
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
[]::JP Dielectric Grease (92-823506-- 1)
~~
~ Loctite Pipe Sealant WlTeflon (92-88504)
26
\
=
1
31
I
22
10 -
5
8 "f~
5 I
7
= = = = = ;\
\ 6
30 29
./
Page 2A-8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

IGNITION
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb. In. lb. ft. N·m
~-
1 SOLENOID ASSEMBLY
2 BUSHING
3 2 GROMMET
4 2 NUT (8·32) (ELECTRIC) 25 2.8
5 3 NUT (1/4·20) 60 6.8
6 1 BATIERY CABLE (POSITI VE)
7 1 INSULATOR BOOT
8 1 CABLE
9 1 BATIERY CABLE (NEGATIVE)
10 1 STARTER MOTOR (See breakdown on Starter Motor)
3 M8 x 4~ 260 22 29
11
1 M8 x2~ 260 22 29
~ ~~, iM4NI::"~'
75 8.5
12 SCREW [ : 75 8.5
13 1 J CLI
14 1 ,~" '" vn 50 5.7
15 1 SENSOR-Crank Position
16 2 SCREW (M5 x 16) 45 5.1
17 3 SCREW (M6 x 25)
18 3
19 1 PLATE
20 3
21 3 ~ GROMMET
22 1 ECM
23 3 "'"
24 3 '(M6 x 40) 45 5.1
25 3 (PLUG(NG.K DPR6EA·9) 150 12.5 17
1 DECAL -Coil Identification 1#
26 1 DECAL-COi~2#
1 n~' ,·Coil i i ~
,!~2~~0) .
27 3
28 3 I 75 8.5
1
29
1 ENG INE WIRING ~
30 1 FUSE (SFE 20 """! (EL
31 1 ni vi
32 1 I
33 2 (M6 x 16) EL
34 1 I o nov HANDLE)
~~
AR
-
1 J CLI P (MANUAL)
37 1 REGULATOR
38 1 J·CLlP
~
'(M6x40) ELECTRIC 105 11 .9
39
40 1 I(M6x10)
1
@ PJollG 1 (M6 x 16)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2A-9

IGNITION
Ignition Description
The ignition system uses COl (Capacitor Discharge Ignition). This system provides quick
voltage buildup and strong spark required for high power and high performance engines.
The COl ignition system does not incorporate mechanically operated points, therefor mak-
ing this CO l unit virtually maintenance free.
As the flywheel rotates, electrical power (alternating current) is produced by the capacitor
charging coil. This power is rectified by diodes so that direct current voltage is utilized by
the ignition system. When the ignition driver is off, the D.C. voltage is stored by the capacitor.
Once capacitor voltage is charged to its potential, a gate signal is applied on the SCR and
the residual current is dissipated through the capacitor charging coils.
The electronic control module (ECM) activates the ignition driver in the ECM which allows
the capacitor to discharge, causing the spark to occur. Ignition timing is regulated by the
ECM which receives status input from a variety of sensors. These sensors include the crank
position sensor, engine temperature and oil pressure sender.
The voltage discharged to the primary winding of th e ignition coil causes a surge of high volt-
age to be induced in the secondary winding of the ignition coil. This induced voltage of suffi-
cient amplitude causes th e spark plugs to fire.
Ignition Component Description

Electronic Control Module (ECM)
Under normal operating conditions the ECM unit controls the following:
1. Controls ignition spark timing by monitoring the crank position sensor, the engine tem-
perature sensor, and the oil pressure sensor.
2. Maintains normal idle timing (see specification).
3. Engine stall.
a. The stall saver feature will advance the ignition timing to 15° BTDC if engine falls
below 615 RPM .
4. Advances spark timing quickly to 28° BTOC under hard acceleration conditions.
5. Limits RPM of the engine in the event of a over speed condition (cavitation , no load on
propeller, and/or under propped), as listed in the following steps:
a. Soft Reduction : Ignition timing is gradually retarded to keep engine RPM below
6200.
b. Spark Cut-Out Reduction: Percentages of ignition spark will be cut-out according to
the degree of over speed RPM reached .
Page 2A-10 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

IGNITION
RPM % Spark Cut-Out

6250 11 %
6281 33%
6313 66%
6. Over Heat Protection: Limits engine RPM to 2000 if the engine temperature exceeds
192.2° F (89 0 C). The ECM will sound the over heat warning horn (a continuous tone)
and turn on the optional Over Heat Warning lamp. Over heat warning will subside if the
engine temperature drops below 183.20 F (84 0 C) and engine RPM is momentarily
dropped below 1000 RPM as a reset condition. The ECM incorporates a 20 second
warning system delay to compensate for a warm restart (heat soak) condition .
7. Low Oil Pressure Protection: Limits the engine RPM to 2000 if oil pressure drops below
2.25 +/- 0.75 psi. Th e ECM will sound the low oil pressure warni ng horn (intermittent
1 second on - 1 second off) and tu rn on the optional Low Oil Pressure Warning lamp.
Low oil pressure warning will reset by shutting th e engine off and restarting at a normal
oil pressure. The ECM incorporates a 10 second warning system delay to allow engine
to achieve operating oil pressure.
NOTE: The ECM controls all timing operations. There are no timing adjustment required on
this engine.
Crank Position Sensor
~IIID.mlml~
Contains a permanent magnet and is positioned 0.030 ± 0.010" (0.762 ± 0.2S4mm) from
the flywheel teeth. Th e ti med passing of the flywheel teeth through the sensor's magnetic
field enables the ECM to determine engine RPM and crankshaft angle.
Stator Assembly
The stator assembly located under the flywheel contains the Ignition, auto enrichener, and
battery charge coils. All of these coils make up the stator assembly.
As the flywhee l permanent magnets pass the respective stator coil windings, an AC pulse
current is produced at each coi l winding when magnet polarity changes. (South to North),
(North to South) etc.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2A- 11

IGNITION
Flywheel Assembly
The flywheel assembly contains six permanently charged magnet segments which are
bonded and retained to the inner wall of the flywheel. Each magnet contains a north and a
south pole providing a 12 pole system.
Ignition Coils
The primary (+) side of the ignition coil receives voltage discharged from a capacitor in the
ignition (C Ol ) circuit located inside the ECM. The voltage is multiplied by the coil until it can
jump the spark plug gap. Each ignition coil will produce a high voltage spark at each crank·
shaft revolution , producing a spark at each cyli nder at the proper time (pre·determined by
the ECM). Ignition coil maximum output is approximately 40,000 volts.
Ignition Test Procedures

Direct Voltage Adapter (OVA)
~ I~~C:;~'~~~~ the ignition system, high voltage is present. DO NOT

TOUCH OR 0 any ignition parts while engine is running, while key
switch is on or while battery cables are connected .
ACAUTION
Failure to comply with the following items may result in damage to the ignition sys-
tem .
1. DO NOT reverse battery cable connections. T he battery negative cable is H ground.
2. DO NOT uspark" battery terminals with battery cable connections to check polarity.
3. DO NOT disconnect battery cables while engine is run ning.
4. DO NOT crank engine with COl or Ignition Coils not grounded.
Page 2A-12 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

IGNITION
ACAUTION
To protect against meter and/or component damage, observe the following precau-
tions:
• 400 VOC· test position (or higher) MUST BE used for all tests.
• INSURE th e Positive (+) lead/terminal of OVA is con nected to the Positive (+) recep-
tacle of meter
• DO NOT CHANGE meter selector switch position while engine is running and/or be-
ing "cranked".
• ALL COM PONENTS MUST BE GROUNDED during tests. Running or "cranking" en-
gine with COl or Ignition Coils ungrounded may damage components.
• If using a meter with a built-in OVA, the OVA/400 or OVA/SaO VOC test position should be
used.
NOTE: Test leads are not supplied with the Direct Voltage Adapter. Use test leads supplied
with multi meter.
Test procedures and specifications are provided for checking primary ignition voltage
while the engine is running and/or being " cranked " with all harnesses connected.
Ignition Troubleshooting
Tool: Multimeter/DVA Tester 91-99750A 1

"elector voltage .Flead-
Component OVA Lead OVA Lead
Sw. ing(1 )
Test Red Black
Position @300-3000 RPM
Coil Coil (-) Black (B) Coil (+) Orange
400 OVA" 250 - 320 (1)
Primary Lead (2) " (0) Lead (2) "
Stator Charge
400 OVA" GreenlWhite (2) Ground 250 - 330 (1 )
Coil
Stator Charge
400 OVA" White/Green Lead (2) Ground 250 - 330 (1)
Coil
*If using a meter that requires a OVA adapter, place selector switch to the 400 VOC position .
*"- Reverse Polarity
(1) Readings may vary at cranking speed or at idle speed.

(2) Back probe the electrical lead bullet connector in order to make connection .
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2A-13

IGNITION
Multimeter Ohm Checks

Tested Part Multimeter Wires Connected To : Meter Scale Meter Reading
Red GreenlWhite (2)
Stator Charge Coil Rx l Q 660-710
Black White/Green (1)
Power Bobbin Red Yel/Blk
Charge Coil Rx1Q 6.7-7.1
Black YelIBlk
Red Yel
Stator Battery Charge
Rx1Q 0.9-1.1
Coil (6 Amp.)
Black Yel
Stator Battery Charge Red Yel
R x 1Q 0.22-0.24
Coil (15 Amp.)
Black Yel
Red Red (1)
Crank Position Sensor R xl Q 300 - 350
Black White (2)
Ignition Coil Primary Red BlacklWhite
(with wires Rx l Q 0. 18 - 0.24
disconnected) Black Black (B)
Ignition Coil Red High Tension Lead
Secondary
(test with coil leads Black Black (B) R x lk Q 2.72 - 3.68
disconnected)
NOTE: Copper is an excellent conductor, however, resistance may notably val}' between
low and high temperature. Therefore, reasonable differences can be accepted between
resistance readings and specifications.
The above readings are for a cold (room temperature) engine. Resistance will increase if
the engine is warm.
Ignition Diagnostic Procedures

TROUBLESHOOTIN G TIP: With engine ru nning, use inductive timing light to check spark
advance of each cylinder as throttle is opened and closed. If timing advances and retards
on each cylinder, ignition system is MOST LIKELY functioning properly.
IMPORTANT: If outboard appears to have an ignition system failure, it is recom-
mended that before beginning in-depth troubleshooting:
a. Ensure that the engine is mechanically sound condition. (Fuel System, Cylinder
Compression etc.).
b. Check all engine ground leads for loose or corroded connections.
c. Disconnect and reconnect ignition harness connectors to verity proper continuity.
SUGGESTED TESTING PROCEDURES
NOTE: The following recommended tests and probable causes are not listed in any specific
order. The technician should use this table as a guide to help isolate and test the specific
problem/condition. Always perform the OVA tests first (if applicable), then perform resis-
tance test to validate suspected component failure.
Page 2A-14 90-857046 AUGUST 199B

IGNITION
'Recommended Test
(1) DVA TEST (Direct Voltage Adapter)
(2) OHM TEST (Resistance Testing)
(3) Replace Component and Retest
(4) Mechanical TesVRepair
PROBLEM/CONDITION Probable Cause · Perform

Test No.
No Spark Condition (All Cylinders) Crank Position Sensor 2
Stator 1-2
(ECM) 3
Stop Circuit Short to Ground:
a - stop circuit lead 2
b - lanyard stop switch 2
c - Iiller handle slop bullon (if supplied) 2
d - remote control harness 2
Ignition Coil 2
a - primary Circuit Shorted to Ground 2
Spark Plugs 3
Open Ground Condition:
a • ignition coil 2
b • stator ground 3
c - (ECM) 3
No Spark Condition (One Cylinder) High Tension Lead 2
Spark Plug Cap (Resislor) 2
Spark Plug 3
Weak Spark Condition Ground Connection at:
a - Ignition Coil Primary Leads 2
b - SIalor 2
c - (ECM) Primary Coil Supply Leads 3
High Resistance To Ground at:
a - stop/lanyard switch (water/corrosion) 2
Weak Charge Coil 1-2
Ignillon Coil/High Tension Lead(s) 1-3
Spark Plug(s) 2
Spark Plug Cap (Resislor) 3
Spark Plug Cap Leak 3
(ECM) Failure 3
Timing Fluctuates Loss Of all Pressure/Over Heating:

NOTE: It is considered normal a • timing retards and fluctuates, rpm 4
for the timing to fluctuate approxi- will drop below 2000 rpm
Flywheel Key Sheared 4
mately 1° - Z' within the desig-
(ECM) Unil 3
nated timing window.
'Recommended Test (cant-)

(1) DVA TEST (Direcl Vollage Adapter)
(2) OHM TEST (Resistance Testing)
(3) Replace Component and Retest
(4) Mechanical Test/Repai r
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2A-15

IGNITION
PROBLEM/CONDITION Probable Cause *Perform

Test No.
Timing Will Not Advance Low Oil Pressure/Engine Over Heating:
a ~ timing retards and fluctuates, rpm 4
will remain below 2000 rpm
(ECM) 3
Engine Misfires At High RPM
Low Oil Pressure/Engine Over Heating:
a - timing retards and fluctuates, rpm 4
will remain below 2000 rpm
Ignition CoiVHigh Tension Lead(s) 2
Spark Plug Cap(s) 2
Spark Plug(s) 3
(ECM) Unit 3
Ground Connection:
a - (ECM) 3
b ~ ignition coil 2
c ~ stator 2
Engine Hard To Start Cold Oebris In Carburetor Enrichener Circuit 4
Weak Spark Condition 1
Throttle Plate in Open Position 4
Engine Hard To Start Hot Weak Spark Condition 4
Vapor Lock 4
Engine Will Not Run Over 2000 RPM Low Oil Pressure/Engine Over Heating:
a - timing retards and fluctuates, rpm
will remain below 2000 rpm 4
Stator 1-2
Ignition Coil/High Tension Lead(s) 2
(ECM) 3
Spark Plug(s) 3
Engine Occasionally Misfires Charge Coil 1-2
Ignition Coil/High Tension Lead(s) 2
Spark Plug Cap(s) 2
Spark Plug(s) 3
Ground Connection at:
a ~ ignition coil 2
b - (ECM) 3
c - stator 2
High Resistance To Ground at:
a ~ stopl1anyard switch (water/corro-
sion) 2
(ECM) 3
Engine Surges Over Boat Under Propped 4
6200 RPM While Under Load Propeller Hub Spun 4
NOTE: The engine (ECM)
will retard timing and
reduce RPM above 6200
RPM.
Page 2A-16 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

IGNITION
Testing Ignition Components

Resistance Tests
When performing resistance tests, all component leads must be disconnected. Readings
may very slightly due to temperature changes.
NOTE: Readings listed taken at 68' F (21J' C).
STATOR (IGNITION CHARGE COIL)
METER SCALE READING

METER TEST LEADS (11)
RED BLACK
RX1 660-710
GRNIWHT WHT/GRN
STATOR AUTO ENRICHENER (POWER BOBBIN CHARGE COIL)
METER SCALE READING

METER TEST LEADS (11)
RED BLACK
YEUBLK RX1 6.7 -7.1
YEUBLK
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2A-17

IGNITION
IGNITION COIL (PRIMARY)
m ·
.... :.'.. ~.
- -
~-
METER TEST LEADS METER SCALE READING

(11)
RED BLACK
BLKlWHT BLACK RX1 0.18-0.24
Spark Plug Cap Removal

NOTE: High tension cables must have spark plug cap removed before testing. Cap contains
5k ohm resistor.
IMPORTANT: To remove spark plug cap from high tension leads, turn cap counter-
clockwise while applying Slight outward pressure. DO NOT PULL HARD or lead may
be damaged. To install cap, turn cap clockwise threading cap onto high tension lead.
r +-
J
..
§
Page 2A·18 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

IGNITION
IGNITION COIL (SECONDARY)

........,
~
~::.'.. :
- .,-

(0)
RED BLACK
RX1K 2,72 - 3.68
HIGH TEN SION lEAD BlK
Spark Plug Cap Resistor Test-PIN VOFP

(0)
RED BLACK
RX1K 0
WIRE END PLUG END
Spark Plug Cap Resistor Test-PIN VD05FP

(0)
RED BLACK
RX1K 3,5 - 5,2
WIRE END PLUG END
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2A-19

IGNITION
CRANK POSITION SENSOR
~JIIJJJ!lIJD)IDIIIJJIIII'H"5X'»
METER TEST LEADS METER READING
SCALE (11)
RED BLACK
RX1 300 - 350
RED WHT
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Insert digital or analog ohmmeter test leads into both Black sensor leads. With engine at
temperature (F) indicated, ohm rating should be as indicated.
270
255
240
225
210
195 Temperature Sensor
Ii:' 180
~ 165
f! 150
:l 135
'! 120
~
Q) 105
Co I'--
E 90 -
{!!. 75 r---
60 -
-
45
30
15
o
o 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
Resistance (1Ul)
Page 2A-20 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

IG NITION
Flywheel Removal and Installation
po,.sit,l\ start
type of accidental engine starting and possible serious injury, al-
leads from
Removal
1. Remove flywheel cover (manual start models refer to section 8).
a - Bolts (4)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2A-2 1

IGNITION
2. Loosen flywheel nut. Hold flywheel using flywheel holder (91-83163M).

3. Remove nut and washer.
9 1-83163M
a - Flywheel Holder (91-83163M)

b - Breaker Bar with 30 mm Socket
c - Nut
d - Washer
4. Loosen flywheel using puller (91-83164M). Remove flywheel and key.

~::o-----@
91-83164M
a - Flywheel Puller (91-83164M)

b - Flywheel
C - Key
Page 2A-22 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

IGNITION
Installation
1. Place flywheel key inlo slot
2. Install flywheel. Apply oil to threads on crankshaft.
3. Install washer and nut.
4. Hold flywheel using flywheel holder (91-83163M) and tighten nut to the specified torque.
~
@--
. ~
91-83163M
a - Key
b - Flywheel
c - Washer
d - Nut
e - Torque Wrench
f - Flywheel Holder (91-83163M)
Flywheel Nut Torque

116 lb. ft . (157 N·m)
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2A·23

IGNITION
Stator Removal and Installation

1. Remove stator harness from j-clips.
2. Remove cable tie from bundled wi re connectors.
3. Disconnect stator wires.
4. Remove stator mounting bolts.
5 . Reverse steps for installation (refer to wiring diagram Section 20 for correct stator wire
connections).
NOTE: Apply Loctite 222 to threads of stator screws.
~ 51 0> Loclile "222" (92-8098 18)

a - Stator
b - J-Clips
c - Cable Tie
d - Screws (3)
Stator Screw Torque

85 lb. in. (9 .6 N·m)
Page 2A-24 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

IGNITION
Timing Belt Removal and Installation

Removal
1. Remove timing belt from driven sprocket.
a - Timing Belt
Installation
1. Align marks on driver and driven gear with marks on cylinder block as shown.
2. Install timing belt onto drive sprocket. Slide timing belt onto driven sprocket.
NOTE: Install timing belt with parts name up.
a - Drive Gear Mark

b - Driven Gear Mark
c - Cylinder Block Marks
d - Timing Belt
e - Parts Name Up On Timing Belt
~
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2A-25
~
sQ
i
IGNITION
ECM Removal and Installation

1. Remove and install EC M as shown.
a - Bolts (3)
b - Harness Clip
ECM Mounting Bolt Torque

45 lb. in. (5.1 N·m)
Page 2A·26 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

IGNITION
Ignition Coil Removal and Installation

1. Disconnect spark plug leads from spark plugs.
2. Remove bundled wi res from J-clip.
3. Cut cable tie securing bundled wire connectors.
4. Disconnect wires (BlK and BlKIWHT).
5. Remove ignition coil mounting bolts.
6. Reverse steps for installation.
a - Spark Plug Leads

b - J-Clip
c - Cable Tie
d - Mounting Bolts-M6x20
Ignition Coil Mounting Bolt Torque

75 lb . in. (8.5 N·m)
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2A·27

IGNITlON
Voltage Regulator Removal and Installation

1. Remove bundled wire connectors from j-clip.
2. Remove cable tie .
3. Disconnect voltage regulator wires.
4. Remove mounting bolts and ground wires.
5. Reverse steps for instaliation (refer to wi ring diagram section 20 for correct wire con-
nections).
a - Voltage Regulator
b - J-Clip
c - Cable Tie
d - Bolts (2)
e - Ground Wires
Voltage Regulator Mounting Bolt Torque

105 lb. in. (11.9 N·m)
Page 2A-28 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

IGNITION
Crank Position Sensor Removal and Installation

1. Disconnect sensor from wi ring harness.
2. Remove sensor mounting bolts.
a - Crank Position Sensor

b - Harness Connector
c - Bolts (2)-M5x16
Crank Position Sensor Mounting Bolt Torque

45 lb. in. (5.1 N·m)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2A-29

IGNITION
Temperature Sensor Removal and Installation

1. Disconnect sensor from wiring harness.
2. Remove sensor from exhaust cover.
a - Harness Connector
b - Temperature Sensor
c - Exhaust Cover
Temperature Position Sensor Mounting Torque

35 lb. in. (3.9 N·m)
Page 2A·3Q 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL
I
Section 28 - Charging & Starting System
Table of Contents
- - - -- :
Table of Contents .... . . • . .. • . . ...• . ... . . 28-1 Analog Meter . . . . . . ... ... ..•.. .. . 28-8
Specifications . . .. .. .. .. . _. . . . . • . . . . . . 28-1 Digital Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-9
Starter Motor ........ .. . .. . . .. ... ,. , . .. . 28-2 Starting System Components . . ..... . 28 -10
8attery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-3 Description . ............... .. . . 28-10
Recommended 8attery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-3 Troubleshooting the Starting Circuit . . . . . . .. 28-10
Operating Engine Without 8attery . . . ... 28-3 Starter Solenoid Test ..... . .. .... . . . . . . 28-11
8attery Charging System Troubleshooting 28-3 Starter Motor ... . . . ...... . . . .. . . . ....... 28-14
8attery Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-4 Removal . .. . . . . . . ... . . . . . . • . . . . . . . 28-14
Description (15 Ampere) .. . . . . . . . . .... 28-4 Disassembly . . .......... . .. ... . . . . 28 -14
Wiring Diagram (15 Ampere). . . . ... . . . . 28-4 Cleaning and Inspection ..... . .. . • . .... 28 -16
Alternator System Test .... ......... .. . ... 28-5 Testing .. . . . . ... . . . .. . . 28-17
6 Ampere Stator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-5 8rush Replacement . . . . . . . . . • . . . 28-19
15 Ampere Stator .. .. ... . . . . .. . .. .... 28 -6 Reassembly .... .. . .. . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . 28-20
Stator Ohms Test .. .. . . . ..... . . . ... . ..... 28-7 Installation. . . .............. . .... . . . . 28-23
Rectifier/Regulator (PIN 854514) Diode Test 28-8
Specifications
6 Amp. Manual Lighting Coil Output 6 Amps.
Lighting Coil Resistance 0.9 ·1 .1 Ohms (YEL-YEL)
CHARGING 12.6 V-15 Amps. (185 Watts)
15 Amp. Electric Alternator Output
SYSTEM
Readings taken @
Battery Charging Coil Resistance 0. 22 - 0.24 Ohms (YEL-YEL)
68°F (20°C).
(For Electrothermal Valve) 6.7-7. 1 Ohms (YEUBLK-YEUBLK)
Quicksilver Tachometer Setting "6P" or "4"
Manual Start Recoil Starter
Electric Start:
Starter Type Bendix
STARTING 1.1 kW
Output
SYSTEM
Ampere Draw Under:
(Load) 106.0 Amps
(No Load) 21.1 Amps
Battery Rating
Minimum Requirement 465 Marine Cranking Amps (MCA)
BATTERY or 350 Cold Cranking Amps (CCA)
For operation below 32" F (0" C) 1000 Marine Cranking Amps (MCA) or
775 Cold Cranking Amps (CCA)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 26-1

CHARGING & STARTIN G SYSTEM
STARTER MOTOR
~
I 11
STARTER MOTOR
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb. in. lb. ft . N·m
1 1 STARTER MOTOR
2 2 THRU BOLT 70 8 .0
3 1 DRIVE KIT
4 1 DRIVE ASSEMBLY
5 1 DRIVE CAP
6 1 ARMATURE
7
--
1 COMMUTATOR CAP
-
8 1 BRUSH & SPRING KIT
9 1 BRUSH HOLDER
10 2 SCREW
11 1 DECAL·Waming-High voltage
Page 28·2 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

Battery
Recommended Battery
A 12 volt battery with a minimum rating of 465 marine cranking amps (MCA) or 350 cold
cranking amps (CCA). For operation below 32° F (0° C) a rating of 1000 Marine Cranking
Amps (MCA) or 775 Cold Cranking Amps (CCA) is recommended.
Operating Engine Without Battery

If desired (or in an emergency), engines equipped with an electric start and alternator can
be started and operated without a battery (either disconnected or removed) if "WARNING",
below, is followed.
Battery Charging System Troubleshooting

ACAUTION
The charging system may be damaged by: 1) reversed battery cables , 2) running the
engine with battery cables disconnected and stator leads connected to rectifier, 3)
an open circuit, such as a broken wire or loose connection.
A fault in the battery charging system usually will cause the battery to become under·
charged. Check battery electrolyte level, and charge battery. See "Electrolyte Level", and
"Charging a Discharged Battery".
If battery will NOT accept a satisfactory charge, replace battery.
If battery accepts a satisfactory charge , determine the cause of the charging system prob-
lem as follows.
1. Check for correct battery polarity [RED cable to POSITI VE (+) battery terminall . If polar-
ity was incorrect, check for damaged rectifier. See "RECTIFIER TEST'.
2. Check for loose or corroded battery connections.
3. Visually inspect wiring between stator and battery for cuts, chafing; and disconnected ,
loose or corroded connection.
4. Excessive electrical load (from too many accessories) will cause battery to run down.
If visual inspection determines that battery connections and wi ring are OK, perform the fol·
lowing stator and rectifier tests .
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2B-3

CHARGING" STARTING SYSTEM
Battery Charging System

Description (15 Ampere)
The battery charging system components are the stator battery charge coils, regulator and
battery. Alternating current (generated in battery charge coils) flows to the regulator, which
changes the alternating current to a regulated direct current for charging the battery.
Wiring Diagram (15 Ampere)
Blk = Black
Blu = Blue
Brn = Brown a
=
Gry Gray
=
Grn Green
=
Orn Orange
Pnk = Pink
=
Pur Purple
Red = Red
Tan =Tan
Wht = White
Vel =Yellow
1'-- BlK ..r

YEl_BlK===='.J
YEl_BlK
c
WHT_GRN _ _ _ _J
GRN_WHT·- - - - - - - - - '
e
a • Voltage Regulator
b • To Starter Motor Bolt Boss
c - 12V Battery
d - Fuse-20A
e -ECM
f • Stator
go·857046 AUGUST 1998

Alternator System Test

6 Ampere Stator
ACAUTION
When testing any charging system, the technician must use an ammeter capable
of reading the maximum current output for the test being performed or higher. Fail-
ure to use a amp meter that can handle the specific current load could possibly
damage the meter being used.
IMPORTANT: Rectifier (optional accessory) must be functioning properly for accu-
rate test results to be obtained.
1. Remove RED lead from (+) terminal of rectifier.
2. Connect RED (+) ammeter lead to rectifier (+) terminal and BLACK (-) ammeter lead
to RED rectifier lead.
3. With engine running at th e indicated RPM, the ammeter should indicate the following
approximate amperes:
8
-'"
Co
E
6
5 1/
-«-..
c 4
~
~
"
u
-....
~
0
c
3
-
~
«
2
o
o 1 2 3 4 5 6
RPM x 1000
4. If proper ampere readings are not obtained, replace stator.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2B-5

15 Ampere Stator
1. Check battery voltage at battery with engine running.
2. If battery voltage is above 14.5-1 5.0 volts, replace voltage regulator/rectifier. Check con-
dition of battery as overcharging may have damaged battery.
3. If battery voltage is below 14.5 volts, charge battery; refer to "CHARGING A DIS-
CHARGED BATIERY". If battery can NOT be satisfacto rily charged, replace battery.
4. If battery accepts a satisfactory charge, check battery voltage while cranki ng engine;
refer to "CHARGING A DI SCHARGED BATIERY". lf cranki ng voltage is not acceptable,
replace battery.
5. If cranking voltage is acceptable, disconnect the RED (voltage reg ulator) wire bullet con-
nector from the RED/PU R wire .
6. Connect RE D (+) ammeter lead to RED wire and th e BLACK (-) ammeter lead to the
Red/PUR wi re.
7. Secure starter wires away from flywheel.
8. With engine running at the indicated RPM's , the ammeter should indicate the following
appropriate amperes:
-
16
t4
u;-
Q. 12 /
E
--..
..:
10
/
c:
~
~
8
""
-..
~
0
co
c:
~
6
'"
..: 4
o
o 1 2 3 4 5 6
RPM x 1000
9. A reading of 15 amperes at 5000 RPM indicates the charging system is functioning prop-
erly.
10. If ammeter reads less than required amperes @ 5000 RPM, test the stator (refer to "Sta-
tor Ohms Test"). If stator tests OK, replace rectifier/regu lator.
Page 28-6 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Stator Ohms Test
STATOR (BATTERY CHARGE COIL)
6 Amp. Stator
METER READING
METER TEST LEADS
SCALE (11)
RED BLACK
YEL VEL RXI 0.9 · 1.1
15 Amp. Stator
METER READING
METER TEST LEADS
SCALE (11)
RED BLACK
VEL VEL RXI 0.22·0.24
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 28 ·7

CH ARGING & STARTING SYSTEM
Rectifier/Regulator (P/N 854514) Diode Test

Analog Meter
NOTE: Voltage regulatorlrectifier specifications are given for informational purposes only,
use the appropriate troubleshooting techniques previously mentioned to find the faulty com-
ponent in the charging system.
/ YEl =
Blk Black
Gry = Grav
[l~~~~)jo~..~
Red = Red
0> -4--- RED BlK =
Yel Yellow
) ~l
GRY
DIODE TEST:
1. Set Ohm meter to R X 10 scale.
2. Connect Red (+) meter lead to RE D regulator lead.
3. Connect Black (- ) meter lead to either YELLOW regulator lead.
TEST RESULTS :
100 - 400 O HMS
DIODE TEST:
1. Set Ohm meter to R X 1k scale.
2. Connect Black (-) meter lead to RED regulator lead.
3. Connect Red (+) meter lead to YELLOW regu lator lead. Test. Then change Red (+) me-
ter lead to the othe r YELLOW regulator lead for 2N D test reading.
TEST RESULTS (1ST READI NG):
20,000 to co O HMS
TEST RESULTS (2ND READING):
00 O HMS (No need le movement)
SCR TEST:
2. Con nect Red (+) meter lead to regulator case.
3. Connect Black (-) meter lead to one YE LLOW regulator lead. Test. Connect Black (-)
meter lead to the other YE LLOW lead.
TEST RESULTS (BOTH TESTS):
B,OOO - 15,000 O HMS (Bk - 15K)
TACHOMETER CIRCUIT TEST:
2. Connect Red (+) meter lead to GREY regulator lead .
3. Connect Black (-) meter lead to regulator case.
TEST RESULTS:
10,000 - 50,000 O HMS (10k - 50k)
Page 2B-8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Digital Meter
NOTE: Voltage regulatorlrectifier specifications are given for informational purposes only,
use the appropriate troubleshooting techniques previously mentioned to find the faulty com-
ponent in the charging system.
=
Blk Black
=
Gry Gray
=
Red Red
=
Yel Yellow
DIODE TEST:
1. Set meter to -M-.
2. Connect Black (-) meter lead to RED regulator lead.
3. Connect Red (+) meter lead to either YELLOW regulator lead.
TEST RESULTS:
0.4-0.8 V
DIODE TEST:
1. Set meter to '"*.

2. Connect Red (+) meter lead to RED regulator lead.
3. Connect Black (-) meter lead to either YELLOW regulator lead.
TEST RESULTS (1ST READING):
00or OUCH or OL
SCR TEST:
1. Set meter to -M-.
2. Connect Black (-) meter lead to regulator case.
3. Connect Red (+) meter lead to either YELLOW regulator lead.
TEST RESULTS (BOTH TESTS):
1.5 V - 00 or OUCH or OL
TACHOMETER CIRCUIT TEST:
1. Not measurable with digital meter.
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2B·9

Starting System Components

Description
The function of th e starting system is to crank the engine. The battery supplies electrica l
energy to cran k the starter motor. When th e ignition switch is turned to "START' position,
the sta rter solenoid is activated and completes the starting circuit between the battery and
starter.
The neutral start switch ope ns th e start circuit when the shift control lever is not in neutral.
This prevents accidental starting when engine is in gear.
The startin g system consists of the following components.
1. Battery
2. Starter Solenoid
3. Neutral Safety Switch
4. Starter Motor
5. Ignition Switch
ACAUTION
The starter motor may be damaged if operated continuously. DO NOT operate con-
tinuously for more than 30 seconds. Allow a 2 minute cooling period between start-
ing attempts.
Troubleshooting the Starting Circuit

Before beginning the starti ng ci rcuit troubleshooting flow chart , following , check first for the
following conditions:
1. Make sure that battery is fully charged.
2. Check that control lever is in "NEUTRAL" position.
3. Check terminals for corrosion and loose connections.
4. Check cables and wi ring for frayed and worn insu lation.
5. Check 20 Amp fuse.
Page 2B·10 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

Starter Solenoid Test

1. Inspect starter solenoid for cracks , loose terminals or loose terminal lead connections.
2. Connect ohm meter between terminals of starter solenoid.
3. Con nect the BLACK lead from solenoid to battery negative (-) terminal and momentarily
connect the YELLOW/RED lead to the positive (+) terminal of battery.
4. Verify continuity between the starter solenoid terminals when 12 volts are applied.
It---fa
,
b
a - YELLOW/R ED Lead
b - Starter Solenoid
c - BLACK Lead
d - Battery
The following "STARTING CIRCUIT TROU BLESHOOTING FLOW CHARr is designed as

an aid to troubleshooting the starting circuit. Thi s flow chart will accurately locate any exist-
ing malfunction. Location of uTEST POINTS" (called out in the chart) are numbered in dia-
gram below.
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2B· 11

NEUTRAL START SWITCH
20 AMP FUSE Yell Red - <.<E(; --'-- Yell Red J--L~,

• Red/Pur- ( <"c-----,
@
®
STARTER Yell Red
Red
®
~t-- Yel---r--~
o Blk
1 Blk
...L -
~'m IGN ITI ON SWITCH
Blk= Black
Blu = Blue
=
Brn Brown
Gry = Gray
=
Grn Green
=
Orn Orange
=
Pnk Pink
L-_+_____-_e.J- Bik l
Pur= Purple BATTERY
=
Red Red
Tan = Tan
Wht = White
Yel = Yellow
Starting Circuit Troubleshooting Flow Chart
I Starter Motor Does Not Turn I

I
SAFETY WARNING: Disconnect BLACK (starter molor)
cable from starter solenoid test point 1 BEFORE making
tests 1-lhru-7 to prevent unexpected engine cranking.
I
TEST 1
Use an ohmmeter (R x 1 scale) and connect meter leads be-
tween NEGATIVE H battery post and common powemead
ground.
I I
No continuity indicated; there is an open circuit in the BLACK
NEGATIVE (-) battery cable between the NEGATIVE (.) battery
I Continuity Indicated
Proceed to TEST 2, on next page.
I
post and the powemead.
• Check cable for loose or corroded connections.
• Check cable for open.
Page 28-12 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CHARG tNG & STARTING SYSTEM
I
• Battery Voltage
TEST 2
a. Disconnect BLACK ground wire(s) from Test Point 2.
b. Connect vollmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 2.
No voltage reading; c. Tum ignition key to ' Start" position.
proceed to TE ST 3.
I
TEST 3 12 Volt Reading·
a. Reconnect BLACK ground wire(s). Check BLACK ground wire for poor connection
b. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 3. or open circuil. Reconnect ground wire to start·
c. Turn ignition key to · Start" position. er solenoid; proceed to TEST 7.
Electric Start Tiller Handle Model

No voltage reading; 12 Volt Reading
Neutral start switch is open or BLACK leads are
proceed to TEST 4. Defective starter solenoid. disconnected or damaged.
TEST 4
a. Connect voltmeter between common 12 Volt Reading·
engine ground and Test Point 4 . Neutral start switch is open, or YELlOWf
No vollage reading; b. Turn ignition key to ' Start" position. RED or BLACK wi re is open between Test
proceed to TEST 5. Points 4 and 3.
TEST 5
Connect voltmeter between common 12 Volt Reading"
No voltage reading; engine ground and Test Point 5. Defective ignition switch.
proceed to TEST 6.
TEST 6
Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 6.
No voltage reading; check BLACK wire be· 12 Volt Reading"

tween battery (+) positive terminal and Test Check fuse in RED wire between test points 5 and 6.
Point6. Check lor open RED wire between test points 5 and 6.
TEST 7
a. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 1.
b. Tum ignition key to ' Start~ position.
No vOllage reading; De· 12 Volt Reading·

fective starter solenoid. Shoutd hear solenoid click; proceed to TEST 8.
TEST S
a. Reconnect Yellow (starter motor) cable to starter solenoid Test Point 1.
b. Connect Voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 7
c. Turn ignition key to ' Start" position.
No yollage reading; check Yellow cable 12 Volt Reading·

for poor connection or open circuit. Check BLACK ground cable at starter for
loose or corroded connection, or open circuit.
If cable is O.K., check staner motor.
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 28·13

Starter Motor
Removal
1. Disconnect battery leads and black starter motor lead from battery.
2. Remove 3 bolts . Remove starter.
a • Bolts (3)
b - Starter Motor Lead
Disassembly
1. Remove 2 thru bolts and commutator end cap, taking care not to lose brush springs.
a
a - Thru Bolts
b - Commutator End Cap
c - Brush Springs
Page 28-14 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

2. Press down the pi nion stopper and remove the ci rclip. Remove the pinion.
a - Pinion
b - Pinion Stopper
c - Circlip (discard and use new ci rclip on assembly)
3. Pull armature from starter frame. Remove locknut.
,
4. Remove components from armature.
,--
1
1
1
1
1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -I
1
~Q~O--:
a - Space r
~~ ~
b - Spring
c - Drive Assembly
d - Drive End Cap
e - Armature Shaft
f - Washer
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 28·15

CHARGING a. STARTING SYSTEM
Cleaning and Inspection
1. Clean all motor parts .
2. Check pinion teeth for chips, cracks or excessive wear.
3. Replace the drive clutch spring andlor collar, if tension is not adequate , or if wear is ex·
cessive.
4. Check that the brush holder is not damaged or is not holding the brushes against the
commutator.
5. Replace brushes that are pitted or worn to less than 1/4 in. (6.4mm) in length. Refer to
"BRUSH REPLACEMENT', following .
6. Replace a damaged or excessively worn bushing in the end cap.
7. Check the armature conductor (commutator bar junction) for a firm connection . A poor
connection usually results in a burned commutator bar.
8. Re·surface and undercut a rough commutator, as follows:
ACAUTION
Do not turn down the commutator excessively.
a. Re·surface the commutator and undercut the insulation between the commutator
bars 1/3 in. (0.8mm) to the full width of the insulation, make sure that the undercut
is flat.
b. Clean the commutator slots after undercutting.
c. Oe·burr the commutator lightly with No. 00 sandpaper, then clean the commutator.
d. Check the armature on a growler for shorts. See "TESTING", following .
9. Open·circuited armatures often can be saved where and open circuit is obvious and re·
pairable. The most likely place for an open circuit is at the commutator bars . Long crank·
ing periods overheat the starter motor so that solder in the connections melts. The poor
connections cause arcing and burning of the commutator bars.
10. Repair bars, that are not too badly burned, by re·soldering the leads in bars (using rosin
flu x solder) and turning down the commutator in a lathe to remove burned material, then
undercut the mica.
11 . Clean out the copper or brush dust from slots between the commutator bars.
12. Check the armature for shorts and ground . See ''TESTING''.
Page 28·16 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Testing
ARMATURE TEST FOR SHORTS
Check armature for short circuits by placing on growler and holding hack saw blade over
armature core while armature is rotated . If saw blade vibrates, armature is shorted. Re-
check after cleaning between commutator bars. If saw blade still vibrates, replace armature.
ARMATURE TEST FOR GROUND

1. Set ohmmeter to (A x 1 scale). Place one lead of ohmmeter on armature core (or shaft)
and other lead on commutator, as shown.
2. If meter indicates continuity, armature is grounded and must be replaced.
'! ::~<.?
r :.~j
l; (~
[.
:.-l .'
:' ~
ft1- _ _,g
~ :'''~
... "
,
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2B-17

CHECKING POSITIVE BRUSHES AND TERMINALS

1. Connect ohmmeter (R x 1 scale) leads between positive brushes.
2. Ohmmeter must indicate fun continu ity (zero resistance) . If resistance is indicated,
check lead to positive terminal solder connection . If connection cannot be repaired,
brushes must be replaced . Refer to "BRUSH REPLACEMENT'.
11 673
a - Positive Brushes
TESTING NEGATIVE BRUSHES FOR GROUND

Set ohmmeter to (R x 1 scale). Place one lead of ohmmeter on the negative brush and the
other lead on the end cap (bare metal). If the meter indicates NO continuity, replace the neg-
ative brush. Repeat this procedure on the other negative brush.
a - Negative (- ) Brushes
b - End Cap
Page 26-18 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CHARGING & STARnNG SYSTEM
Brush Replacement
IMPORTANT: Replace brushes Ihat are pitted or worn to less than 1/4 in. (S.4mm) in
length.
a ~ Positive (+) Terminal

b - Long Brush Lead
c - Push Lead Into Slot
d ~ Insulating Washer
e - Flat Washer
f - Lock Washer
g - Nut
a - Positive (+) Brushes

b - Negative (-) Brushes
c - Brush Holder
d - Bolts (Fasten Negative Brushes and Holder)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 28-19

Reassembly
1. Lu bricate helix threads and drive end cap bu shing with SAE 10W oil.
2. Install the pinion, spring, and pinion stopper onto starte r shaft.
3. Place circlip into groove on shaft.
4. Press the pinion stopper over the ci rclip.
IMPORTANT: Install new circlip for reassembly.
NOTE: Make sure the circlip fits tightly into pinion stopper.
a - Circlip
b - Pin ion Stopper
c - Spring
d - Pinion
Page 28·20 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

5. Construct a brush retainer tool as shown.
2"
2"
-------
t
1- 11 116"
~ 90 0
B
E
N
- ---- -- -- v D
I- 314"
+::1"
'/
3"
T
1-3/ 4"
Brush Retainer Tool Layout (Full Size)

~
t
18-Gauge Sheet Metal j
MET RIC
SCALE
H
3 = 76.2mm
2H = 50.8mm
1-314H = 44.5mm
1-1 1/16 = 42.9mm
H
3/4" = 19.1mm
1/2" = 12.7mm
Brush Retainer Tool Side View (Full Size)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CHARGING 8. STA RTING SYSTEM
6. Place springs and brushes into brush holder and hold in place with brush retainer tool.
7. Lubricate bushing with one drop of SAE tOW oil. DO NOT over-lubricate.
a - Brush Retainer Tool

b - Bushing
8. Position armature into starter frame so that commutator end of armature is at end of
starter frame where permanent magnets are recessed 1 in. (25.4mm). Align marks (a)
as shown.
9. Install commutator end cap onto starter frame; align marks (b) as shown, and remove
brush retainer tool.
10. Instali thru bolts (c) and torque to 70 Ibs. in. (7.9 N·m).
Page 26·22 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

Installation
1. Secure starter to block with 3 bolts. Torque bolts to 22 lb. ft . (29 N·m). Secure NEGAT IVE
battery lead and starter motor lead as shown.
a • Bolts (3)
b - Negative Battery Lead
c - Starter Motor Lead
Starter Motor Bolt Torque

22 lb. ft. (29 N·m)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 28-23

TIMING, SYNCHRONIZING, & ADJUSTING
ELECTRICAL
Section 2C - Timing, Synchronizing, & Adjusting
_~_P:_C_~_~i_:_iO~_ sf_._<._:._o._.n__~_..e
..
Special Tools . . ......... . .. . ......... . ..
------2-C-.-l-----c-a-rn-u-r-el-o-rS-y-nc-h-r-o-ni-za-li-o-n"--'-'"--'-"-'-"-' -"---2-C-'5- ~
_n_.t_.s_•.-.-,-.
2C-2 Idle Speed Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-9
Timing ................. , .... , .......... 2C-3
Specifications

Spark Plug:
Type NGK DPR6EA·9
Gap 0.035 in. (1.0 mm)
Hex Size 18mm
Firing Order 1·2·3
Ignition Timing:
@ Idle (800 rpm) 10' A.T.D.C
@ WOT (6000 rpm) 28' B.T.D.C
IGNITION
Charge Coil Resistance 660 -710 Q (GRNIWHT - WHT/GRN)
SYSTEM
Crank Position Sensor Resistance 300 . 350 Q (RED· WHT)
Readings taken @
68°F (20°C).
Primary 0.08 - 0.7 Q (BlK . BlKIW HT)
Secondary (w/o Boots) 3.5 - 4.7 kQ (BlK . High Tension)
Soft Reduction (Retards Timing) 6200 rpm
NOTE: The 30140 four stroke ECM unit electronically controls the ignition timing, therefore
making the ignition timing non adjustable. When initially running the outboard, use a timing
light to verify that the ignition timing falls within the timing windows. If the ignition timing does
not stay within the timing windows, replace the ignition ECM unit and retest.
go.S57046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2C· '

TIMING, SYNCHRONIZING, & AOJUSTING
Special Tools
1. Carburetor Tuner PIN 91-80964 1A 1
2. DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multi-meter PIN 91-854009A 1
3. TIming Light PIN 91-99379
4. Tubing Clamp PIN 91 -804063
Page 2C-2 90-857046 AUGUST 199B

Timing
spinniing attempt to remove

on top of cover when checking ignition timing.
Ignition timing is not adjustable. The Electronic Control Module unit electronically controls
the ignition timing .
Wh en initially running the outboard , use a timing light to verify that the ignition timing falls
within the timing windows as described within the following tests . If the ignition timing does
not stay within the timing windows, replace the ignition E. C.M . unit and retest. (Refer to the
Ignition Diagnostic Procedures tests in Section 2A.)
IMPORTANT: When checking the timing w ith the engine running , one of the following
test procedures must be followed.
Check maximum timing per specification w hile running the outboard :
.IN A TEST TANK
. ON A DYNAMOMETER
. ON A BOAT SECURED ON A TRAILER "Backed in Waler"
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2C·3

1. Attach liming lighll0 #1 spark plug lead.
a - Timing Light Clamp

b - #1 Spark Plug Lead
c - Ground Lead
d - Timing Window-Electric Start Models
e - Timing Window-Manual Start Models
2. Place the outboard in "Forward" gear and check timing at idle URetarded." (If not within
specification window, refer to Diagnostic Test Procedures Section 2A.)
a - Timing Mark (Full Relarded)
Page 2C·4 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

3. Slowly increase the engine RPM while watching the ignition timing marks. The timing
should increase to the maximum timing specification "Full Advance" at approximately
6000 RPM. (If not within specification window, refer to Diagnostic Test Procedures Sec-
tion 2A.)
a - Timing Mark (Full Advance)
Carburetor Synchronization
NOTE: Th e carburetors are synchronized by adjusting the intake manifold vacuum on the
carburetors. Use Carburetor Tuner (91-80964A 1) to measure the vacuum.
INSTALLING CARBURETOR TUNER (91-S09641Al)

1. Remove three plugs from the intake manifold .
2. Install intake manifold hose adaptor in each plug hole. Tighten securely.
NOTE: Intake manifold hose adaptors are provided with the Carburetor Tuner.
a - Intake Manifold Plugs (3)

b - Intake Manifold Hose Adaptor (3)
90-657046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2C-5

3. Connect the Carburetor Tu ner to the hose adaptors.

4. Install filters to prevent mercury being drawn into carburetors during an abrupt throttle
change.
5. Pinch off enrichener lines between carburetors with a tubing clam p.
a - Tubing Clamp (91-804063)

b - Filters (35-18206)
c - Carburetor Tuner (PIN 91-809641 A 1)
A CAUTION
To avoid the possibility of drawing mercury from the vacuum gauge into the engine,
do not run engine at high rpm speed or abruptly change throttle position.
Page 2C-6 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

SYNCHRONIZING CARBURETORS
1. With the outboard in water, start engine and allow to warm up. Shift the outboard to
neutral.
2. Connect a tachometer to the engine.
3. Adjust idle RPM screw (a) on bottom carburetor to obtain an idle setting of 1000 RPM
in neutral. If necessary, keep adjusting the idle screw.
NOTE: Keep engine speed set at 1000 RPM in neutral while synchronizing carburetors.
a - Idle RPM Screw
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2C·7

TIMING, SYNCHRONIZING, " ADJUSTING
4. Read the vacuum of cylinder #3. It's not jmportant to be at any specific vacuum setting.
5. Adjust the carbu retor synchronization screws of cylinders #2 and # 1 to match the base
vacuum of cylinder #3.
NOTE: Keep viewing the tachometer, as the engine RPM may fluctuate during adjustments.
Keep adjusting the idle RPM screw in order to keep the engine speed at 1000 RPM.
Example
If the vacuum reading of Cyl. #3 (base vacuum) is
30 cm , then adjust carburetor synchronization
screws of cylinders #2. , and #1 to 30 cm.
32cm
30cm
28cm
26cm
Cyl. Cyl. Cyl.
#1 #.2 #3
a - Carburetor Synchronization Screw # 1

b - Carburetor Synchronization Screw #2
6. Rev engine a few times and let engine idle for 15 seconds. Check that the vacuum val-
ues remain the same between cylinders. Re-adjust if necessary.
ACAUTION
To avoid the possibility of drawing mercury from the vacuum gauge into the engine,
do not run engine at high rpm speed or abruptly change throttle position.
7. Stop engine, remove adaptors and reinstall plugs. Refer to Idle Speed Adjustment and
adjust the idle RPM back to specification.
Page 2C-8 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

TIMING, SYNCHRONIZING, & ADJ USTING
Idle Speed Adjustment

NOTE: The engine should be completely warmed up for the adjustment. Correct adjust-
ments can not be obtained in a cold condition.
1. With the outboard in water, start engine and allow to warm up. Shift the outboard to
neutral.
2. With the outboard in neutral, turn the idle adjustment screw located on the #3 (bottom)
carburetor to attain the specified idle RPM.
a -Idl e RPM Adjustme nt Screw
3. Rev engine 2 or 3 times and allow to idle for 15 seconds.

a. If the engine holds a stable idl e condition, then no other adju stments are necessary.
b. If the engine has an unstable idle condition, then carburetor synchronization is re-
quired. Refer to Carburetor Synchronization preceding.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2C-9

WIRING DIAGRAMS
ELECTRICAL
I.
Section 20 - Wiring Diagrams
Table of Contents
------,------,-------
30/40 ELPT ...... ... . .. ........... . .... 20-2 Without Light Switch ..........•.. • .... 20- 11
30/40 EHPT . .. . ..... .. 20-3 With Light Switch . .. . . . .. . .. .. • .. .. . .. 20-11
30/40 MH ........... ... ........ .. .. . . .. 20-4 Oil Pressu re Wiring Diagram ......... .. ... 20-12
Commander 2000 Remote Control aSI Gauge Wiring ~iagrams .............. 20-13
(Electric Start) ........ . ................. 20-5 Tachometer Wiring Diagram . .. ... . . . . . 20-13
Commander 3000 Panel Mount Control. . . . 20-6 Water Temperature Gauge ............ 20 -14
InstrumenVLanyard Stop Switch Engine Synchronizer Wiring Diagram ... 20-15
Wiring Diagram ......................... 20-7 Remote Wiring Hamess Connection
InstrumenVLanyard Stop Switch to Engine ...................... . ........ 20-18
Wiring Diagram (Dual Outboard) ...... . . . . 20-8 Electric Start Remote Control Model .... . 20- 18
Commander 2000 Key Switch Test . .. . 20 -10 Remote Key .. . . . . . .... . . .. . . .. ... 20-19
Instrument Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11 Power Trim Switch Wiring Diagram . . ...... 20-20
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2D-1

WIRING DIAGRAMS
30/40 ELPT
rn
ro," ~n0 3
I
0 2 ..
-,
o~
~I 0'
~
l ~i ii,.
"• • "
•• ~
0 0
J ~ 4
X
a ·ECM m - Trim Up Relay

b • DDT n - Trim Down Relay
c - Crank Position Sensor o - Cowl Mounted Trim Switch
d - Temperature Sensor p - Fuse-20A Acc. and Trim
e - Oil Switch q - To Remote Trim Switch
f - Auto Enrichener r - To Remote Control
9 - Stator s - To Over-Heat Lamp
h - Voltage Regulator t - To Oil Pressure Lamp
i-Starter u - Ignition Coil # 1
i-Start Solenoid v - Ignition Coil #2
k • 12V Battery w - Ignition Coil #3
I - To Trim Pump x - Diode Harness (Early Production) Ground
Connects to Upper Fuel Pump Bolt
Page 2D-2 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

WIRING DIAGRAMS
30/40 EHPT
-.
om
57 184
a -ECM n - Trim Down Relay

b -DDT o - Cowl Mounted Trim Switch
c - Crank Position Sensor p - Fuse-20A Acc . and Trim
d - Temperature Sensor q - To Remote Trim Switch
e - Oil Switch r - To Remote Control
f - Auto Enrichener 5 - Key-switch
9 - Stator t - Warning Horn
h - Voltage Regulator u - Lanyard Stop Switch
i - Starter v - Push Button Stop Switch
j - Start Solenoid w - Ignition Coil # 1
k - 12V Battery x - Ignition Coil #2
I - To Trim Pump y - Ignition Coil #3
m - Trim Up Relay z - Diode Harness (Early Production) Ground
Connects to Upper Fuel Pump Bolt
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 20-3

WIRING DIAGRAMS
30/40 MH
••
~
•
.•
" r
." [
om
3 r'-l--.. 2 1
n o o
m
57186
a -ECM h - Push Button Stop Switch

b -DDT i-Auto Enrichener
c - Crank Position Sensor j - Stator
d - Temperature Sensor k - Ignition Coil # 1
e - Oil Switch I - Ignition Coil #2
f - Warning Horn
m - Ignition Coil #3
n - Diode Harness (Early Prod uction) Ground
9 - Lanyard Stop Switch Connects to Upper Fuel Pump Bolt
Page 20-4 90-857046 AUGUST 1998
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Commander 2000 Remote Control (Electric Start)

/ ~"
//// \
/ )
/ )
L ./
!' /1
\ \ //1 I
.'14f \ J / I I I
,Y I I
I I I
V£lJ1IlK 1.1
''''H~ I'! I I I
I I I
1Ul 11)l-VI'VIII"
f
" I I I
,. " I I I
", I \
"I
", "-
"-
"-
"-
"-
"- \
BlK =
Black \ ./\
BRN = Brown \// I
GRY =
Gray I I
GRN =
Green
I I
RED = Red
WHT =
White I I
YEl = Yellow I I
I I
I J
I /'
' . . . . J..../
a - Wiring Harness Connector

b - Tachometer/Accessories Harness Connector
c - Ignition/C hoke Switch
d - Emergency Stop Switch
e - Neutral Start Switch
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 20-5

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Commander 3000 Panel Mount Control

BLKNEL -------------------------,
RED
BLUIWHT
GRNIWHT
)
YELJRED
PUR
GRN
BLK=BLACK
BLU=BLUE
YELJRED BRN=BROWN
GRN=GREEN
GRY=G RAY
PUR=PURPLE
RED=RED
TAN=TAN
WHT=WHITE
YEl=YELLQW
a - Lanyard stop switch leads must be soldered and covered with shrink tube for a water proof connection.
If alternate method of connection is made, (use of electrical butt connector) verify connection is secure
and sealed for moisture proof connection .
b - Connect wires together with screw and hex nut (2 places); apply Quicksilver Liquid Neoprene to con-
nections and slide heat shrink tubing over each connection .
e - Keyswitch
Page 2D-6 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Instrument/Lanyard Stop Switch Wiring Diagram

IMPORTANT: On installations where gauge options will not be used, tape back any unused wiring
harness leads.
BlK =Black
BlU =Blue
BRN = Brown
GRY =Gray
GRN =Green
ORN =Orange
PNK = Pink
PUR =Purple
RED = Red
TAN = Tan
WHT =While
YEl =Yellow
LIT =Light
DRK =Dark
a - Ignition/Choke Switch h - Remote Control

b - Lanyard Stop Switch - Power Trim Harness Connector
c - Lead Not Used On Outboard Installations - Connect Wires Together with Screw and Hex
d - Retainer Nut (2 Places); Apply Quicksilver Liquid Neo-
e - Tachometer prene to Connections and Slide Rubber
f - Trim Indicator Gauge (Optional) Sleeve over Each Connection
g - Temperature Gauge k - Lead to Optional Visual Warning Kit
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 20-7

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Instrument/Lanyard Stop Switch Wiring Diagram (Dual

Outboard)
BlK = Black
BlU = Blue
BRN = Brown
GRY = Gray
GRN = Green
ORN = Orange
PNK = Pink
PUR = Purple
REO = Red
TAN = Tan
WHT = White
YEl = Yellow
LIT = Light
ORK = Dark
PORT INSTALLATION
52716
a - Ignition/Choke Switch f - Trim Indicator Gauge

b - Lanyard Stop Switch 9 - Temperature Gauge
c - Lead Not Used on Outboard Installations h - Remote Control
d - Retainer i-Synchronizer Gauge
e - Tachometer j - Synchronizer Box
Page 2D-8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998
WIRING DIAGRAMS
IMPORTANT: On installations where gauge options will not be used, tape back and
isolate any unused wiring harness leads.
STARBOARD INSTALLATION
5265·
k - Lanyard/Diode n - Connect Wires Together with Screw and Hex

I - "Y" Harness Nut (4 Places) ;Apply Quicksilver Liquid Neo-
m - Power Trim Harness Connector prene to Connections and Slide Rubber
Sleeve over Each Connection.
o - Lead to Visual Warning Kit
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2D-9

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Commander 2000 Key Switch Test

1. Disconnect remote control wiring harness and instrument panel connector.
2. Set ohmmeter on R x 1 scale for the following tests;
BLK = Black
PUR = Purple
REO = Red
YEL = Yellow
2389'
KEY CONTINUITY SHOULD BE INDICATED AT THE FOLLOWING POINTS:

POSITION BLK BLKlYEL RED YELJRED PUR YELJBLK
OFF 0-- ---0
RUN 0--- -------- - -0
0---- ----{)
START 0----- ---{)
0--- -------- - -0
0---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---0
CHOKE" 0- -- -------- ---{)
0--- ---0
*Key switch must be positioned to " RUN" or " START" and key pushed in to actuate
choke for this test.
NOTE: If meter readings are other than specified in the preceding tests, verify that switch
and not wiring is faulty. If wiring checks ok, replace switch.
Page 20-10 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Instrument Wiring Connections

Without Light Switch
NOTE: ANY INSTRUMENT WIRING HARNESS LEAOS NOT USED MUST BE TAPED
BACK TO THE HARNESS.
Speedometer
51820
a - Tachometer Receptacle-From Control Box or Wire Where To

Ignition/Choke Switch
BLK _BLACK GROUND
b • Tachometer Wiring Harness
TANIWHT= TANIWHITE OIL LIGHT
c - Lead to Optional Visual Warning Kit (Taped
Back to Harness) TANfBLK_TANlBLACK TEMPERATURE LIGHT
d - Cable Extension (For Two Function Warning TAN =TAN TEMPERATURE GAUGE
Panel) PUA=PUAPLE IGNITI ON 12 VOLT
e - Light Switch
G AY_GRAY TACHOMETER
With Light Switch BRNIWHT=BROWNIWHITE TRIM GAUGE
TAN/BLU_TANfBLUE VISUAL WARNING KI T (OPT.)
T012~
5181 9
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 20 -11

WIRING DIAGRAMS
NOTE: Refer to individual oil pressure gauge instructions for proper installation procedures
for installing gauge in boat.
1. InstaH LIGHT BLUE sensor lead to oil pressure gauge as shown.
NOTE: Normal oil pressure readings will be as follows: Outboard at normal operating tem-
perature -
• Wide-Open Throttle - 30-60 psi (207-414 kPa)
• Minimum Oil Pressure @ W.O.T. - No Less than 10 psi (69 kPa)
• Oil Pressure @ Idle - 5-10 psi (34-69 kPa)
NOTE: Cold engine oil pressure readings will be approximately 10% higher.
Oil Pressure Wiring Diagram

elll. 141
GRY 151 rANfSlU 131
[VBll( 161-+1<,
YELJRED I1i BlK/YEll11
RED 181
:5"
'"
~------ BLK - - - - - - - - )
'"
II:
:0
Q.
' - - - - LT. BLU ----~
' - - - - - - - - - - - PUR -----------~

53771
Page 2D-12 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

WIRING DIAGRAMS
aSI Gauge Wiring Diagrams

Tachometer Wiring Diagram
Tachometer dial on back side of case must be set to position number 4 .
WIRING DIAGRAM A
Use this wi ring diagram when using a separate light switch for instrument lighting.
51106
a - PURPLE or WHITE - Connect to Positive (+) t 2 Vall

b - Light Switch Wire - t 2 Volt
c - Position Light Bulb to the Switched Position
d - BLACK - Connect to Negative (-) Ground
e - GRAY or BROWN Wire
WIRING DIAGRAM B
Use this wi ring diagram when instrument lighting is wired directly to the ignition key switch.
(Instrument lights are on when ignition key switch is turned on.)
a - PURPLE or WHITE - Connect to Positive (+) 12 Volt

b - Position Light Bulb to the Unswitched Position
c - BLACK - Connect to Negative (-) Ground
d - GRAY or BROWN Wire
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 20 -13

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Water Temperature Gauge
WIRING DIAGRAM A
Use this wiring diagram when using a separate light switch for instrument lighting.
c
a - PURPLE - Connect to Positive (+) 12 Volt

b - Light Switch Wire - 12 Volt
c - Position Light Bulb to the Switched Position
d - BLACK - Connect to Negative (-) Ground
e - TAN - Connect to TAN lead located at the tachometer receptacle on Com-
mander Side Mount Remote Control or TAN lead coming from Accessary Igni-
tion/Choke Assembly.
WIRING DIAGRAM B
Use this wiring diagram when instrument lighting is wired directly to the ignition key switch.
(Instrument lights are on when ignition key is turned on).
a - PURPLE - Connect to Positive (+) 12 Volt

c - BLACK - Connect to Negative (-) Ground
d - TAN - Connect to TAN lead located at the tachometer receptacle on Com-
mander Side Mount Remote Control or TAN lead coming from Accessary Igni-
tion/Choke Assembly.
Page 20·14 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Route TAN lead on starboard side of engine to engine/remote control harness. Connect as
shown .
IMPORTANT: Tape back and isolate any unused wiring harness leads.
a - Lead from Temperature Sender

b - Engine/Remote Control Harness
Engine Synchronizer Wiring Diagram

LIGHT BULB POSITION A
Use this position when using a separate light switch for instrument lighting.
511 05
a - Light Switch Wire - 12 Volt

LIGHT BULB POSITION B
Use this position when instrument lighting is wired directly to the ignition key switch. (Instru -
ment lights are on when ignition key switch is turned on).
51106
a - Position Light Bulb to the Switched Position
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 2D·15

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Synchronizer wiring can be accomplished two different ways as an option to the user.
Wiring Diagram - Gauge needle to point toward slow running engine
@1----1.... 52566
a • Tachometer - Starboard Engine

b • Synchronizer Gauge
c - Tachometer - Port Engine
d - Synchronizer Box
Wiring Diagram - Gauge needle to point toward fast running engine
@I--..".... 52565
a - Tachometer - Starboard Engine

b - Synchronizer Gauge
c - Tachometer - Port Engine
d • Synchronizer Box
Page 20 -16 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

WIRING DIAGRAMS
CLEANING GAUGES
Clean gauge by washing with fresh water to remove sand and salt deposits. Wipe off with
a soft cloth moistened with water. The gauge may be scored or damaged if wiped with abra-
sive material (sand, saline or detergent compounds , etc.) or washed with solvents such as
trichloroethylene, turpentine, etc.
2 Function Gauge
1. Route extension harness thru grommet opening. Connect TANIWHITE and TANI
BLACK of harness to TANIWHITE and TAN/BLACK wires on engine harness.
a - Grommet Opening
b - TANIWHITE and TAN/ BLACK WIRES ON ENGINE HARNESS
I
H ) 1"----- LT. BL~
~
I
1 .-'===
c=::=J aG:l>---
a:a:P----
TAN/WHT ~[=:=ir--®
TANIBLK ...... 1
a - Harness Exten sion Plugging Into Engine Harness

b • Oil Pressure Sensor
c - Engine Tempe rature Sensor
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 20-17

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Remote Wiring Harness Connection to Engine

Electric Start Remote Control Model
1. Route the remote wi ring harness to the back of the engine block as shown.
a - Remote Wi ring Harness
2. Connect wiring. Place harness into the holder.
a - Power Trim Connections

b - Holder - Place Harness Into Holder
Page 2D-16 90-657046 AUGUST 1998

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Remote Key
1. Connect the remote key harness and engine harness, secure harness in holder.
elK = Black
BLU = 81ue
BRN '" Brown
GRY '" Gray
GRN '" Green
ORN = Orange
PNK = Pink
PUR", Purple
RED = Red
TAN = Tan
WHT = White
YEL = Yellow
LT '" Light
ORK '" Oaril.
•••
••
- "
- -,•,"
a - Keyswitch Assembly Transom Mount

b - Keyswitch
c - Horn
d - Remote Key Harness Connector
e - Engine Harness Connector
f - Harness Connector Holder
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 20-19

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Power Trim Switch Wiring Diagram
RED
- RED
.4'C~,----- RED
GRNIWHT
-< ~ LT. GRNlWHT \
LT. GRNlWHT ~
BLUIWHT
-< <---+- LT. BLUIWHT \ I
-< LT. BLUIWHT ~ ~
GRN = Green
BLU = Blue
RED = Red
WHT = White
a - Trim Switch
b - Starter Relay
Page 20·20 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

FUEL PUMP
FUEL SYSTEM
Section 3A - Fuel Pump
Table of Contents
Table of Contents . . . .. . ...... . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-1 Fuel Pump Disassembly . . . . .. . . ... . . ... . 3A-6
Specifications . ................... . . . . . . . 3A-1 Cleaning/Inspection/Repair . .... ... . . 3A-7
Fuel Pump ...... . ........ . ....•.. • ..... 3A-2 Fuel Pump Reassembly . ..... ...... . 3A-8
Fuel Pump Operation ...... . .......... . . . 3A-4 Fuel Pump Installation .........•. . . . . . ... 3A-10
Fuel Pump Removal ...... . . . ........... . 3A-5
Specifications
Fuel Pump Type Exlernal (Plunger/Diaphragm)
Fuel Pump:
FUEL
Pressure 3-6 psi
SYSTEM
Plunger Stroke 0.23 - 0.38 in. (5.85 - 9.65 mm)
Fuel Tank Capacity Accessory
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 3A· 1

FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP
23
2
o 13.?!
\..\!:} 20
\
"- 19 22
'" 7
'"9 '" 8
Page 3A·2 90-857046 AUG UST 1998

FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb. in. lb. ft. N·m
1 1 FUEL FILTER
2 7 STA-STRAP
3 1 TUBING (14 IN.)
- -
4 1 TUBING (19 IN.)
--5 1 FUEL CONN ECTOR
--
- 1 ORING
--
6 1 FUEL PUMP
--
7 4 SCREW Drive Tight
OR ING
-89- 1
10
1
2
DIAPHRAGM
SCREW
--
I I
Drive Tight
--
11 2 NUT
12 2 CHECK VALVE
13 1 DIAPHRAGM
--
14 1 PIN
-- --
15 1 SPR ING
--
16 4 NUT
17 1 SPRING
--
18
--
1
-- PLUNGER
-
19 1 ORING
20 2 SCREW (M6 x 30) 75 8.5
--
21 1 PLUG
--
22 1 JCLlP
- 23 1 COWL DEFLECTOR
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 3A-3

FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump Operation

1. The fuel pump is a diaphragm pump which is mechanically driven off of the rocker arm.
2. The black mounting block (insulator) and the two outlets on the fuel pump help prevent
vapor lock.
3. If the engine runs out of fuel , or has a restriction preventing adequate fuel flow, the pump
will make a uclicking" noise.
SMOKING. Before servicing any part of the fuel system, sys-

tem at the battery. Drain the fuel system completely. Use an approved container to
collect and store fuel. Wipe up any spillage immediately. Materials used to contain
spillage must be disposed of in an approved receptacle. Any fuel system service
must be performed in a well ventilated area.
FUEL LEAKAGE FROM ANY PART OF THE FUEL SYSTEM CAN BE A FIRE AND EX-
PLOSION HAZARD WHICH CAN CAUSE SERIOUS BODILY INJURY OR DEATH.
Careful periodic Inspection of the entire fuel system is mandatory, particularly after
engine storage. All fuel components, including fuel tanks, whether plastic, metal,
or fiberglass, fuel lines, primer bulbs, fittings, swelling, and must be inspected for
corrosion. Any sign of leakage or deterioration necessitates replacement before
further engine
Page 3A·4 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump Removal

1. Cut sta-straps and remove inlet and outlet hoses.
2. Remove fuel pump mounting bolts and cowl deflector.
3. Separate fuel pump from cylinder head cover.
d
a • Outlet Fuel Hose
b - Inlet Fuel Hose
c - Mounting Bolts (2)
d - Cowl Deflector
e - Cap On Unused Outlet Fitting
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 3A-5

FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump Disassembly

1. Remove screws to separate pump cover, cover seal , and diaphragm, from pump body.
28378
a • Screws (4)
b - Pump Cover
c - Cover Seal
d • Diaphragm
e . Pump Body
f • Nuts (4)
2. Rotate plunger to line up slots.
®I---l~
tf 53615
a • Slots Offset
b • Slots Aligned
3. Compress pump assembly to free spring load on pin .

4. Tilt assembly to allow pin to slide out.
53617
a - Pin
Page 3A-6 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

FUEL PUMP
Cleaning/Inspection/Repair
1. Inspect fuel filter for cracks/clogs , replace if necessary.
2. Inspect the check valves for damage, replace if necessary.
3. Inspect springs for damage, replace if necessary.
4. Inspect cover seal and diaphragm, replace if damaged.
a - Cover Seal
b - Diaphragm
90-857046 AUGUST 1998

FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump Reassembly

1. Assemble springs, diaphragm, and plunger onto pump body.
a - Diaphragm
b - Diaphragm Spring
c - Pump Body
d - Spring
e - Plunger
2. Line up slots and compress assembly.
3. Insert pin into hole.
a - Pump Body
b - Slots
e - Pin
4. Rotate plunger 90 0 to offset slots.
53615
a - Slots Aligned
b - Slots Offset
Page 3A·8 90·857046 AUGUST 1998
FUEL PUMP
5. Assemble diaphragm, seal, and cover, to pump body, secure with screws and nuts.
NOTE: Seal installs in one direction only.
• - Screws (4)
b - Cover
c - Cover Seal
d - Diaphragm
e - Pump Body
I - Nuts (4)
6. Install a new Q-ring onto the pump assembly.

NOTE: Always install a new O-ring.
,. < > 53620

a - Q-ring
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 3A-9

FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump Installation

1. Secure fuel pump and cowl deflector to cylinder head cover with 2 bolts.
2. Connect fuel lines to pump and secure with sta-straps.
a - Outlet Fuel Hose

b - Inlet Fuel Hose
c - Cap on Unused Outlet
d - Cowl Deflector
e - J-Clip
f - Mounting Bolts (2)-M6x30
9 - Cable Ties (3)
Fuel Pump Mounting Bolt Torque

75 lb. in. (8.5 N·m)
Page 3A-10 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CAR BURETOR
FUEL SYSTEM
Section 38 - Carburetor
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Tools ......... . ........ . . . . ... . .
Fuel Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carburetor ... . . . ........... . ...... . . .. .
38· 1
38·2
38·4
38-6
Idle Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Carburetor Removal ...... . ...... . . ......
Carburetor Disassembly ......... ... ......
Inspection .. . . ................ . . .. .. . ...
38-10
38- 11
38- 12
38-16
I
Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-8 Carburetor Reassembty . . . . . . . . . • • • . . . . . . 3B-18 :
Carburetor Adjustments . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . 38-9 Carburetor Installation ........... .. . . .... 38·21
Float Level .. . ............... . • .. . ... 38·9
Specifications
Idle rpm (Out Of Gear) 900 ± 25 rpm

Idle rpm (In Forward Gear) 800 ±25 rpm
Wide Open Throttle rpm (WOT)
Range 550(H3000
Main Jet Size #98
Pilot Jet #38
CARBURETOR Idle Jet #42
Float Height 0.47-0.63 in. (12.0-1 6.0 mm)
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 38·'

CARBURETOR
Special Tools
1. Carburetor Scale PIN 91 -36392.
2. DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multi-meter PIN 91 -854009A 1.
Page 38·2 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

CARBUR ETOR
Notes:
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 38-3

CARBURETOR
FUEL LINES
3
5
Ib
/
~
\
5
Page 38-4 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CARBURETOR
FUEL LINES
TOROUE
REF.
NO. OTY. OESCRIPTION lb. in . lb. ft . N·m
13 HOSE
-
2 1 HOSE
-
3 1 LINKAGE
4 3 BU SHING
5 12 CABLE TIE
6 1 HOSE
--
7 1 HOSE
8 1 PROTECTIVE SLEEV E
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 38·5

CARBURETOR
CARBURETOR
2 - ';
7 ~r-
6
--O
~/
'') -- 3
.--::.) - 4
19
Page 38-6 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CARBURETOR
CARBURETOR
TOROUE
REF.
NO. OTY. DESCRIPTION Ib-i" Ib-It Nm
1 CARBURETOR (TOP)
1 1 CARBURETOR (CENTER)
1 CARBURETOR (BOTTO M)
--
2 10 SC REW
--
3 3 PLATE
4 3 GASKET
----
5 1 ENR ICHENER
--
6 1 O RING
7 1 PLATE
8 3 JET (IDLE)
--
9 3 JET (SLOW)
10 3 RUBBER PLUG
--
11 3 JET (MAIN)
12 3 FLOAT VALVE
13 3 MAIN NOZZLE
--
14 3 FLOAT
15 3 FLOAT PIN
16 3 GASKET
1 FLOAT BOWL (TOP)
17
2 FLOAT BOWL (CENTER/BOTTOM)
--
18 12 SCREW
--
19 3 DRAIN SCREW
20 3 WASHER
2 SYNCHRONIZATION SCREW (TOP/CENTER)
21
1 STOP SCREW (BOTTO M)
--
22 2 SPRING (TOP/CENTER)
--
23 2 SPR ING (TOP/CENTER)
24 1 SPRING (BOTTOM)
25 1 SPRING
--
26 1 PLUNGER
-
27 3 RUBBER , BELLOWS
28 3 PLUNGER RETAINING SCREW
29 3 PLUNGER ROD
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 38 ·7

CARBURETOR
INTAKE
Page 38·8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CARBURETOR
INTAKE
TOROUE
REF.
NO. OTY. DESCRIPTION lb. In. lb. ft. N·m
1 6 SC REW
- - --
2 1 AIR INTAKE
--
--
3 3 o
RING
4 1 PLATE
-
1 ISOLATOR (40)
5
1 ISOLATOR (30)
--
6 2 PLUG
7 1 SOUND ATTENUATOR
8 2 SCR EW (M6 x 20)
--
9 2 BUSH ING
--
10 6 STA·STRAP
--
11 3 SEAL
12 9 ORING
13 2 DOWEL PIN
--
14 6 SCREW (M6 x 25)
15 1 BREATHER HOSE
-- -
16 1 STA·STRAP
Carburetor Adjustments
Float Level
1. With carburetor turned upside down and carb scale seated on inner edge, check float
level from top of float to float bowl flange as shown.
'"
Float Height
0.47·0.63 in. (12.0-16.0 mm)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 38-9

CARBURETOR
Idle Speed
NOTE: Outboard should be completely warmed up for the idle speed adjustment.
1. With the outboard in forward gear adjust idle speed screw to obtain the specified idle
speed.
a ~ Idle Speed Screw

b ~ Phillips Head Screwdriver
Idle Speed (Forward Gear)

800 ± 25 RPM
Page 3B·10 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CARBURETOR
Carburetor Removal
1. Disconnect auto enrichener wires, breather hose. and fuel supply lines.
,!'r-
J
~:t=::~1'11
~
_:
II
c
a - Auto Enrichener Wires (Yellow)
b - Breather Hose
c - Fuel Supply Line
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 38- 11

CARBURETOR
2. Remove intake and carburetor mounting bolts.
a - Intake Mounting Bolts (3)-M6x20

b - Carburetor Mounting Bolts (6)
Carburetor Disassembly
1. Remove air intake and plate from carburetor assembly.
a - Sound Attenuator
b - Screw (6)
c . Air Intake
d • Carburetor Assembly
e - Plate
f -Isolator
Page 38-12 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CARBURETOR
2. Remove auto enrichener.
a - Auto Enrichener
b - Plate
e - Screw
d - O-Ring
3. Remove fuel lines and unsnap linkage.
"
a - linkage
b - Fuel lines
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 38-13

CARBURETOR
4. Remove float bowl.
5. Remove plunger, spring, and gasket.
-®
a - Screws (4)
b - Float Bowl
c - Plunger
d - Spring
e - Gasket
f - Retaining Screw
6. Remove float , plug, nozzles and jets.
a - Screw
b - Float Pin
c - Float
d - Plug
e - Slow Jet
f - Main Jet
9 - Main Nozzle
Page 38-14 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CARBURETOR
7. Remove cover, gasket, and idle jet.
a - Screws (3)
b - Cover
c - Gasket
d -Idle iet
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 38·15

CARBURETOR
Inspection
1. Inspect needle and piston valve. Replace if worn or damaged.
2. Measure auto enrichener resistance. Replace if out of specification .
Auto Enrichener Resistance

15·2511 @ 68°F (20°C)
3. Perform piston valve height test below.

Piston Valve Height Test:
a. Measure piston valve height
b. Connect to 12 V battery
c. Wait several minutes
d. Measure piston valve height
4. Replace auto enrichener if no change was observed.
a ~ Piston Valve Height Measurement
5. Inspect carburetor body, replace if cracked or damaged.
Page 39-16 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CA.RBURETOR
6. Inspect float, replace if cracked or damaged.
ACAUTION
Do not use steel wire for cleaning the jets as this may enlarge the jet diameters and
seriously affect performance. Use a petroleum based solvent for cleaning and blow
out all passages with compressed air.
7. Inspect main jet, idle jet, slow jet and main nozzle. Clean if they are contaminated .
8. Inspect needle valve , replace if end is worn or grooved.

/
{
\
28375
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 3B- 17

CARBURETOR
Carburetor Reassembly
1. Install idle jet, gasket, and cover.
a - Screws (3)
b - Cover
c - Gasket
d -Idle jet
2. Install jets, nozzles, plug and float.
a - Screw
b - Float Pin
c - Float
d - Needle Valve
e - Plug
f - Slow Jet
9 - Main Jet
h - Main Nozzle
Page 36-18 9()'857046 AUGUST 199B

CARBURETOR
3. Install plunger and spring.

4. Install gasket bowl and float.
.. @
a - Screws (4)
b - Float Bowl
c - Plunger
d - Spring
e - Gasket
f - Retaining Screw
5. Install fuel lines and throttle linkage. Secure lines with cable ties where shown.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 38-19

CARBURETOR
a • Linkage
b • Fuel Lines
6. Install auto enrichener.
a - Auto Enrichener
b - Plate
c - Screw
d -O-Ring
7. Install air intake and plate onto carburetor assembly.
Page 3B·20 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CARBURETOR
a - Sound Attenuator
b - Screw (6)
c - Air Intake
d • Carburetor Assembly
e - Plate
f - Isolator
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 3B·21

CARBURETOR
Carburetor Installation
1. Install intake and carburetor mounting bolts.
a - Inlake Mounting Bolts (3)-M6x20

b - Carburetor Mounting Bolts (6)
Carburetor Mounting Bolt Torque

70 lb . in. (8 N·m)
Page 38-22 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CARBURETOR
2. Connect auto enrichener wires, breather hose and fuel supply lines.
c
a • Auto Enrichener Wires (Yellow)
b • Breather Hose
c - Fuel Supply Lines
NOTE: Carburetor synchronization is required after rebuilding carburetors. Refer to section

2C, Timing/Synchronizing/Adjusting.
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 36·23

EMISS10NS
FUEL SYSTEM
Section 3C - Emissions
Table of Contents
Exhaust Emissions Standards ...... . 3C-2 Stratified Vs Homogenized Charge ....... . 3C-4
What Are Emissions? ............ . .. . .
Hydrocarbons - HC .................. .
Carbon Monoxide - CO ........... .. . .
Oxides of Nitrogen - NOx ............. .
Controlling Emissions ...... ........ .. .
Stoichiometric (14.7: 1) Air/Fuel Ratio .. .
3C-2
3C-2
3C-2
3C-2
3C-2
3C-3
Homogenized Charge . ........ .... ... .
Stratified Charge .................... .
Emissions Information ........... . ... . .. .
Manufacturer's Responsibility: ..... . .. .
Dealer Responsibility: .......... .. .... .
Owner Responsibility: ................ .
3C-4
3C-5
3C-
3C-6
3C-6
3C-6
6
1
Outboard Hydrocarbon EPA Emission Regulations : . .......... . 3C-7
Emissions Reductions ........... . . . .... . 3C-3 Decal Location for 1999 Models: ...... . 3C-8
8 1/3% .1. Per Year Over 9 Model Years . . 3C-3
~
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 3C-1 ~
Ii?
i
EMISSIONS
Exhaust Emissions Standards

Through the Environmental Protection Agency (E PA) , the federal government has estab-
lished exhaust emissions standards for all new marine engines sold in the U.S.
What Are Emissions?
Emissions are what comes out of the exhaust system in the exhaust gas when the engine
is running. They are formed as a result of the process of combustion or incomplete combus-
tion. To understand exhaust gas emissions, remember that both air and fuel are made of
several elements. Air contains oxygen and nitrogen among other elements; gasolene con-
tains mainly hydrogen and carbon . These four elements combine chemically during com-
bustion. If combustion were complete, the mixture of air and gasoline would result in these
emissions: water, carbon dioxide and nitrogen, which are not harmful to the environment.
But combustion is not usually complete . Also , potentially harmfu l gases can be formed dur-
ing and after combustion.
All marine engines must reduce the emission of certain pollutants, or potentially harmful
gases, in the exhaust to conform with levels legislated by the EPA. Emissions standards be-
come more stringent each year. Standards are set primarily with regard to three emissions:
hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO) and oxides of nitrogen (NOx).
Hydrocarbons - HC
Gasoline is a hydrocarbon fuel. The two elements of hydrogen and carbon are burned dur-
ing combustion in combination with oxygen. But they are not totally consumed. Some pass
through the combustion chamber and exit the exhaust system as unburned gases known
as hydrocarbons.
Carbon Monoxide - CO
Carbon is one of the elements that make up the fuel burned in the engine along with oxygen
during the combu stion process. If the carbon in the gasoline could combine with enough
oxygen (one carbon atom with two oxygen atoms), it would come out of the engine in the
form of carbon dioxide (C02)' CO2 is a harmless gas. But carbon often combines with insuffi-
cient oxygen (one carbon atom with one oxygen atom). This forms carbon monoxide, CO.
Carbon monoxide is the product of incomplete combustion and is a dangerous, potentially
lethal gas.
Oxides of Nitrogen - NOx
NOx is a slightly different byproduct of combustion. Nitrogen is one of the elements that
makes up the air going into the engine. Under extremely high temperatures it combines with
oxygen to form oxides of nitrogen (NOx). This happens in the engine's combustion cham-
bers when temperatures are too high. NOx itself is not harmful, but when exposed to sunlight
it combines with unburned hydrocarbons to create the visible air pollutant known as smog.
Smog is a serious problem in California as well as many other heavily populated areas of
the United States.
Controlling Emissions
There are two principle methods of reducing emissions from a two-stroke-cycle marine en-
gine. The first method is to control the air/fuel ratio that goes into the combustion chamber.
The second is to control the time when this air/fuel mixture enters the combustion chamber.
Timing is important, to prevent any unburned mixture from escaping out of the exhaust port.
Page 3C·2 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

EMISSIONS
Stoichiometric (14.7:1) Air/Fuel Ratio

In the search to control pollutants and reduce exhaust emissions, engineers have discov·
ered that they can be reduced effectively if a gasoline engine operates at an air/fuel ratio
of 14.7: 1. The technical term for this ideal ratio is stoichiometric. An air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1
provides the best control of all th ree elements in the exhaust under almost all conditions.
The He and CO content of the exhaust gas is influenced significantly by the air/fuel ratio.
At an air/fuel ratio leaner than 14.7:1 , He and CO levels are low, but with a ratio richer than
14.7:1 they rise rapidly. It would seem that controlling HC and CO by themselves might not
be such a difficult task; the air/fuel ratio only needs to be kept leaner than 14.7:1. However,
there is also NOx to consider.
As the air/fuel ratio becomes leaner, combustion temperatures increase. Higher combus-
tion temperatures raise the NOx content of the exhaust. But, enrichening the air/fuel ratio
to decrease combustion temperatures and reduce NOx also increases HC and CO, as well
as lowering fuel economy. So the solution to controlling NOx - as well as HC and CO - is to
keep the air/fuel ratio as close to 14.7: 1 as possible.
OUTBOARD HYDROCARBON
EMISSIONS REDUCTIONS
8113% ~ PER YEAR OVER 9 MODEL YEARS
120 ,----------------------------------------------------,
100
80
60
40
20
o
96 97 98 99 2000 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 3C-3

EMISSIONS
STRATIFIED VS HOMOGENIZED CHARGE

OFI engines use a stratified charge inside the combustion chamber to aid in reducing emis-
sions. All other models use a homogenized charge. The difference between the two is:
Homogenized Charge
A homogenized charge has the fueVair particles mixed evenly throughout the cylinder. This
mixing occurs inside the carburetor venturi , reed blocks and crankcase. Additional mixing
occurs as the fuel is forced through the transfer system into the cylinder. The homogenized
charge is easy to ignite as the airlfuel ratio is approximately 14.7: 1.
Page 3C-4 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

EMISSIONS
Stratified Charge
A stratified charge engine only pulls air through the transfer system. The fuel requi red for
combustion is forced into the cylinder through an injector placed in the top of the cylinder
(head). The injector sprays a fueVair mixture in the form of a bubble into the cylinder. Sur-
rounding this bubble is air supplied by the transfer system. As the bubble is ignited and
burns, the surrounding air provides almost complete combustion before the exhaust port
opens.
A stratified charge is hard to ignite, the fueVair bubble is not evenly mixed at 14.7: 1 and not
easily ignited.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 3C-5

EMISSIONS
Emissions Information
Manufacturer's Responsibility:
Beginning with 1998 model year engines, manufacturers of all marine propulsion engines
must determine the exhaust emission levels for each engine horsepower family and certify
these engines with the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). A certifica·
tion decal/emissions control information label, showing emission levels and engine specifi-
cations directly related to emissions, must be placed on each engine at the time of manufac-
ture .
Dealer Responsibility:
When performing service on all 1998 and later outboards that carry a certification , attention
must be given to any adjustments that are made that affect emission levels.
Adjustments must be kept within published factory specifications.
Replacement or repair of any emission related component must be executed in a manner
that maintains emission levels within the prescribed certification standards.
Dealers are not to modify the engine in any manner that would alter the horsepower or allow
emission levels to exceed their predetermined factory specifications.
Exceptions include manufacturers prescribed changes, such as that for altitude adjust·
ments.
Owner Responsibility:
The owner/operator is required to have engine maintenance performed to maintain emis·
sion levels within prescribed certification standards.
The owner/operator is not to modify the engine in any manner that would alter the horse·
power or allow emissions levels to exceed their predetermined factory specifications.
Except ions:
• Carburetor jets may be changed for high altitude use in accordance with factory rec·
ommendations.
• Single engine exceptions may be allowed with permission from the EPA for raci ng
and testing .
Page 3C.s 90.857046 AUGUST 1998

EMISSIONS
EPA Emission Regulations :

All new 1998 and later outboards manufactured by Mercury Marine are certified to the
United States Environmental Protection Agency as conforming to the requirements of the
regulations forthe control of air pollution from new outboard motors. This certification is con-
tingent on certain adjustments being set to factory standards. For this reason, the factory
procedure for servicing the product must be strictly followed and, whenever practicable, re-
turned to the original intent of the design.
The responsibilities listed above are general and in no way a complete listing of the rules
and regulations pertaining to the EPA laws on exhaust emissions for marine products. For
more detailed information on this subject, you may contact the following locations:
VIA U.S. POSTAL SERVICE :
Office of Mobile Sources
Engine Programs and Compliance Division
Engine Compliance Programs Group (6403J)
401 M S1. NW
Washinglon, DC 20460
VIA EXPRESS or COURIER MAIL:
Office of Mobile Sources
Engine Programs and Compliance Division
Engine Compliance Programs Group (6403J)
501 3rd S1. NW
Washington, DC 20001
EPA INTERNET WEB SITE :
http:/www.epa.gov/omswww
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 3C·7

EMISSIONS
CERTIFICATION LABEL:
The certification label must be placed on each engine at the time of manufacture and must
be replaced in the same location if damaged or removed. Shown below is a typical certifica-
tion label and is not representative of anyone model. Label shown below is not to scale;
(shown at twice the normal size).
@ --®
~
I'll ~':'~~~l. Emis~ntrol
747 1999 #'
Inform on cc PART 1137-856984 22
This engine conforms to 199?n~Year Idle Speed (in gear): TI5 RPM ~ d
U.S. EPA regulations for marin SI ngines.
Timing: Not Adjustable l.(e)
..
Refer to Owners Manual ~
for required maintenance.
Family: WM9XM .747220 Standard Spark Plug: NGK DPR6EA·9
k Gap: .035" kD
. FEl: 32.20 GMiKW·HR Valve Clearance (Cold) mm lJn\
Intake: 0. 15-0.25 Exhaust: 0.25-0.35
30-40 HP -fill
~
4-Stroke
i ~JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUNE JULY AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
a·Spark Ignilion (51)

b-Cubic Centimeter
c-Model year of engine and production decal part number
d· ldle Speed (In Gear)
e· Timing specifications when adjustable
f -Recommended spark plug for best engine performance
g-Valve Clearance (Four Stroke engines only)
h-Engine Horsepower rating
i-Month of production (Boxing month will pu nched)
j-FEL Represents (Mercury Marine) stateme nt of the maximum emissions output for
the engine fam ily
k-Family example
W M9X M. 747 2 2 0
MOd:,(foRegu,L
W=1998
X=1999
M=Marine
APPIiLon
l =PWC
2=06
~cmed
Manufacturer Displacement Technology type
Mercury Marine liter I =Existing
Cubic Inch 2=New
Decal Location for 1999 Models:

Model Production Part No. Service Part No. Location on Engine
1999 Merc/Mar 747 cc 37·856984 22 37·856985 22 FlywheeURewind Cover
Page 3C·8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
POWERHEAD
Section 4A - Cylinder Head
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . .. ... . ..... . ..... . . . . .. . 4A-2 Cylinder Head ...... . ........ . . .. ... . 4A·27
Special Tools ........... " . . . . . ... . • . . . . 4A·5 Valves . . ................. . ... . . . ... . 4A-3 1
Cylinder Head ............ . ..• • . ... , ... . 4A-6 Valve Springs ........... . .. . ... .. . . . . 4A-33
CamshatVOil Pump . ....... . .. .. . . . . . . .. . 4A-8 Cylinder Head Reassembly .. . .. . .. . . . . . . . 4A-34
Intake/Exhaust Valves . . ..... . ....... . .. . 4A· 10 Valve Installation .................. . . . 4A-34
Adjustments ........................... . 4A·12 Camshaft Oil Seal Installation ... . . . ... . 4A-35
I
Valve Clearance . .. . ... . ...... . . . . . . . . 4A-12 Camshaft Installation .............. . . . 4A-35
Preparing Cylinder Head for Removal ..... . 4A-18 Rocker Arm Shaft Assembly . . . . .. . . 4A-37
Cylinder Head Removal ... . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 4A-19 Rocker Arm Shaft Installation . . .. . . . . . . 4A-38
Cylinder Head Disassembly .... . ... . .. .. . 4A-22 Cylinder Head Gasket . ........ .. ..... . 4A-39
Cleaning/Inspection/Repair ..... . . . . . 4A-25 Cylinder Head Installation .. . . . ... . 4A-40
Camshaft . . .. . ................. ... . . . 4A-25 Cylinder Head Cover Installation .. 4A-42
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A- 1

CYLINDER HEAD
Specifications
Camshaft Dimensions
Intake "A" 1.2 16 - 1.220 in. (30.89 - 30.99 mm)
Exhaust " A"
Intake " B"
Exhaust " B"
o 1.2 16
1.022
1.022
-1.220 in.
- 1.025 in.
- 1.025 in.
(30.89
(25.95
(25.95
- 30.99
- 26.05
- 26.05
mm)
mm)
mm )
Run.out Limit B 0.0039 in. (0.1 mm)

Camshaft Bearing Diameter " b" 1.4541 - 1.4549 in.
(36.935 - 36.955 mm)
CAMSHAFT
--b
Free Length "a" 1.491-1.569 in. (37.85-39.85 mm)
Tilt Limit "b" Less than 0.060 in. (1.7 mm)
ta
VALVE SPRING
t
Compressed Pressure (Installed)
Intake 19.8 - 22.0 Ibs. (9.0 - 10.0 kg)
Exhaust 19.8 - 22.0 Ibs. (9.0 - 10.0 kg)
Till Limit (Intake & Exhaust) 0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
Oir. of Winding (Intake & Exhaust) Left Hand
Page 4A-2 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
Warp Limit 0.004 in. (0. 1 mm)
• lines ;ndlcat.
straight edge 56899
measurement
CYLINDER HEAD Camshaft Bore Inside Diameter "a" 1.4567 - 1.4577 in.
(37.000 - 37.025 mm)
ValveNalve SeatNalve Guides:

Valve Clearance (cold)
Intake 0.006 - 0.010 in. (0. 15 - 0.25 mm)
Exhaust 0.010 - 0.014 in. (0.25 - 0.35 mm)
Valve Dimensions:
"A" Head Diameter
Intake 1.256 - 1.264 in. (31.9 - 32.1 mm)
Exhaust 1.020 - 1.028 in. (25.9 - 26.1 mm)
"B" Face Width
Intake 0.079 - 0. 124 in. (2.00 - 3. 14 mm)
Exhaust 0.079 - 0.124 in. (2.00 - 3.14 mm)
" C" Seat Width
Intake 0.035 - 0.043 in. (0.9 - 1.1 mm)
Exhaust 0.035 - 0.043 in. (0.9 - 1.1 mm)
"D" Margin Thickness
VALVES Intake 0.020 - 0.035 in. (0.5 - 0.9 mm)
Exhaust 0.020 - 0.035 in. (0.5 - 0.9 mm)
Stem Outside Diameter
Intake 0.21 56 - 0.2161 in. (5.475 - 5.490 mm)
Exhaust 0.2150 - 0.2 156 in. (5.460 - 5.475 mm)
Guide Inside Diameter
Intake 0.2165 - 0.2 170 in. (5.500 - 5.512 mm)
Exhaust 0.2165 - 0.2 170 in. (5.500 - 5.512 mm)
Stem To Guide Clearance
Intake 0.0004 - 0.0015 in. (0.010 - 0.037 mm)
Exhaust 0.0010 - 0.0020 in. (0.025 - 0.052 mm)
Stem Run-out Limit (max.) 0.0006 in . (0.016 mm)
~
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A-3
CYLINDER HEAD
Valve Dimensions
t:== "A"
~1 "D"
Head Diameter Face Width Seat Width Margin Thickness
ROCKER SHAFT Outside Diameter 0.6288 - 0.6296 in.

(15.971 -15.991 mm)
Inside Diameter of Bore 0.6299 - 0.6306 in.
ROCKER ARM
(16.000 - 16.018 mm)
Page 4A-4 90-657046 AUGUST 199B

CYLINDER HEAD
Special Tools
1. Flywheel Holder PIN 91-83163M
.~
2. Valve Guide Remover PIN 9 1-809495A1
3. Valve Guide Installer Bushing PIN 91-809496A1
4. Valve Guide Reamer PIN 91-809497A 1
5. Valve Spri ng Compressor PIN 91-809494A1

(lmmIJ~cg=
6. Valve Seat Cutter Kit (Obtain Locally).
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A-5

CYLINDER HEAD
CYLINDER HEAD
~ 4-Stroke Outboard Oil (92-828000A 12)
29
-~./ 16 17
I
6o
28 23
21 ~
I
/
27
24 ", ~
\ )fo " ~
25 ~19
/
I I
I •
I~~
I
I •
I
I
) •
/
~
2 3
"-14
"-
io O
~
"-20
"/ ~
4
()
/ /
5 6
r
7
18
Page 4A-6 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
CYLINDER HEAD
TOROUE
REF.
NO. OTY. DESCRIPTIO N lb. In. lb. ft. N·m
1 CYLINDER HEAD (ELECTRIC)
-
1 CYLINDER HEAD (MANUAL)
-
1 1 CYLI NDER HEAD
2 6 GUIDE
--
3 6 CIRCLI P
--
4 3 ANOD E
--
5 3 GROMMET
--
6 3 COVE R
--
7 3 SCREW IM6 x 20) 70 8
8 1 BOLT 57 6.4
9 1 GASKET
--
10 3 BOLT
----
11 3 GASKET
12 1 OI L SEAL
-
13 5 PI PE PLUG
- -- - -
14 1 DRING
15 1 COVER
16 1 DECAL-Servicing Referral
17 1 DECAL-Engine OilNalve Clearance
--
18 1 GASKET
--
19 7 SCREW (M6 x 20) 70 8
20 4 SC REW IM6 x 25) 106 12
21 8 SCREW IM9 x 1.5 x 95) 34 .7 47
- --
22 2 DOWEL PIN
23 1 PLUG
--24
--
1 DRING
-
25 1 BAFFLE PLATE
- --
26 4 SCR EW IM4 x 10)
--
27 1 ELBOW
- -
28 1 BREATHER PIPE
29 1 BRACKET (HANDLE)
30 2 SCREW (M6 x 13) (HANDLE)
-- --
31 1 J CLAM P
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A-7

CYLINDER HEAD
CAMSHAFT/OIL PUMP
~ 4-Stroke Outboard Oil (92-S2S000A 12)
G::::rP
Loctit. 222
y-1
~ -2
4-
5-0
GO
7
/'
6- "'
,-
I
I
I
I
I
I
Page 4A-8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
CAMSHAFT/Oil PUMP
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb. In. lb. ft. N·m
1 1 SCREW (M8 x 40 x 1.25) 28 38
-
2 1 WASHER
3 1 BELT
--
4 1 GEAR-Driven
--
5 1 DOWEL PIN
B 1 CAMSHAFT (MANUAL)
--
7 1 CAMSHAFT (ELECTRIC)
-
8 1 PIN
--
9 1 OI L PUMP ASSEMBLY
--
10 1 D RING
--
11 1 DRING
--
12 1 D RING
-- --
13 4 SCREW (MB x 35) 70 8
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A-9

CYLINDER HEAD
INTAKE/EXHAUST VALVES
11 0
3 4
1 \ \
-d:;:::::-::p" ~ 0
•
Cl
•
~ " 15
~"
11 -
•
14
~, 16
12 - @
6 11 0 {):o 4-Stroke Outboard Oil (92-828000A 12)
Page 4A-10 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
INTAKE/EXHAUST VALVES
TORQUE
REF.
1 3 EXHAUST VALVE
2 3 INTAKE VALVE
3 6 SEAT Valve Spring
4 6 SEAL Valve Stem
5 6 VALVE SPRING-Outer
6 6 RETAINER Valve Spring
7 12 KEY
8 6 ROCKER ARM
9 6 SCREW
10 6 NUT 120 10 13.5
11 1 ROCKER SHAFT
12 2 PLUG
13 1 BRACKET
14 1 BRACKET
15 1 SPR ING
16 1 SPR ING
17 4 SCREW (M8 x 30) 160 160 13.3 18
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A· 11

CYLINDER HEAD
Adjustments
Valve Clearance
IdO:;~:.:~~!r slart lurnina flvw'heel alurmlg adjuslment. Ta prevenl

this type of al i I engine starting possible serious injury, always remove
leads from
1. Remove components;
a. Flywheel cover/manual starter.
NOTE: Refer to section 8 for removal of manual starter.
a - Bolls (4) - M6x25

b - Flywheel Cover
Page 4A- 12 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
b. Inlet and outlet fuel pump hoses.

c. Breather hose.
a - Inlet Hose
b - Outlet Hose
c - Breather Hose
d. Cylinder head cover.
a - Bolts (7) - M6x20

b - Cylinder Head Cover
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A·13

CYLINDER HEAD
2. Measure valve clearance with a feeler gauge. Adjust if out of specification.
Valve Clearance (Cold)

Intake 0.006 - 0.010 in. (0. 15 . 0.25 mm)
Exhaust 0.010 . 0.014 in. (0.25 • 0.35 mm)
a - Lock nut
b - Adjusting Screw
c - Intake Valve Clearance
d - Exhaust Valve Clearance
NOTE: When loosening lock nuts, hold the adjusting screw with a screw driver to prevent
it from moving.
Page 4A·14 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
3. Perform the following adjustment steps:

a. Turn the driven gear and align the "1 111" mark on the driven gear with the "6," mark
on the cylinder block.
b. Adjust the intake and exhaust valve clearance for cylinder #1.
c. Turn the driven gear 1200 clockwise and align the "6," mark on the driven gear with
the "6," on the cylinder block.
d. Adjust the intake and exhaust valve clearance for cylinder #2
e. Turn the driven gear 1200 clockwise and align the "11" mark on the driven gear with
the "11" on the cylinder block.
f. Adjust the intake and exhaust valve clearance for cylinder #3
a - Cylinder Block "6," Mark

b - Driven Gear "1 or 11" Mark (Cylinder #1)
c - Driven Gear "6." Mark at 1200 (Cylinder #2)
d - Driven Gear "/;" Mark at 240" (Cylinder #3)
4. Tighten the lock nuts.

NOTE: When tightening lock nuts, hold the adjusting screw with a screw driver to prevent
it from moving.
Lock Nut Torque

120 lb. in. (13.5 N·m)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A-15

CYUNDER HEAD
5. Install cylinder head cover.
a
a - Cylinder Head Cover
b - Bolts (7) - M6x20
Cylinder Head Cover Bolt Torque

70 lb. in. (8 N·m)
6. Install inlet and outlet fuel pump hoses.

7. Install breather hose.
NOTE: Secure fuel and breather hoses with cable ties.
a - Inlet Hose
b - Outlet Hose
e - Breather Hose
Page 4A-16 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
8. Install flywheel cover/manual starter.

NOTE: Refer to section 8 for installation of manual starter.
a • Flywheel Cover
b - Bolts (4) - M6x25
Flywheel Cover Bolt Torque

45 lb. in. (5. 1 N·m)
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A·17

CYLINDER HEAD
Preparing Cylinder Head for Removal
possiblly start
this type of accidental engine starting and possible serious Injury, always remove
leads from
1. Flywheel cover/manual starter.
NOTE: Refer to section 8 for removal of manual starter.
a - Bolts (4) - M6x25

b - Flywheel Cover
Page 4A-18 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
2. Inlet and outlet fuel pump hoses.

3. Breather hose.
a - Inlet Hose
b - Outtet Hose
e - Breather Hose
Cylinder Head Removal

1. Cylinder head cover.
a - Bolts (7) - M6x20

90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A' 19

CYLINDER HEAD
2. Remove timing belt from driven sprocket.
a - Timing Belt
3. Remove screws.
a • Screws (6)·M6x25
b • Screws (4)·M6x25
Page 4A-20 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
4. Remove cylinder head screws.
a - Screws (B)-M9x95
5. Separate cylinder head from cylinder block.

NOTE: Cylinder head gasket is not reusable.
a - Gasket (Discard)
b - Dowel Pins (2)
90-657046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A-21

CYLINDER HEAD
Cylinder Head Disassembly

NOTE: Refer to section 4C Lubrication for oil pump removal.
1. Hold driven gear using tool and loosen screw. Remove screw, washer, driven gear and
dowel pin.
6;::::;:;9 I . •
t:r" 91 .83163M
a - Holder 91-83163M
b - Driven Gear
c - Screw-M8x40
d - Washer
e - Dowel Pin
Page 4A-22 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
2. Remove screws securing rocker arm to cylinder head. Remove rocker arm and retain·
ers.
a - Screws (4)-Mex30
b - Retaining Bolt
c - Gasket
d - Rocker Arm Assembly
9()..857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A-23

CYLINDER HEAD
3. Remove oil seal and camshaft.
a - Oil Seal
b - Camshaft
4. Remove valve springs with spring compressor.
.". '\
~
-c
1 91-809494A1
a - Valve Spring Compressor PIN 91-809494A 1
Page 4A-24 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
Camshaft
Manual start models are equipped with a cam shaft featuring a compression release mecha-
nism. The compression relief mechanism releases a percentage of the cylinder compres-
sion during engine cranking which lowers the starter rope pull force.
At cranking speeds (RPM) the cam shaft decompression levers rest against the side of the
exhaust cam lobes, protruding out from the heal of the lobe. This protrusion contacts the
exhaust valve rocker arms during the compression stroke, slightly opening the exhaust
valve.
With the increase of centrifugal force at engine running speeds, the decompression levers
swing out of contact with the exhaust valve rocker arms, allowing the exhaust valves to oper-
ate normally (fully closed) during the compression stroke.
a - Exhaust Valve Rocker Arm

b - Decompression Lever
1. Inspect the camshaft for pitting, heat discoloration, scratches and for the following mea-
surements. Replace camshaft if worn or not within specification.
2. Inspect the compression relief cam lever (if equipped) for free movement. Replace cam-
shaft if necessary.
-.-
a - Compression Relief Cam
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A-25

CYLINDER HEAD
3. Measure the cam lobe length (a) and width (b).
Cam Lobe Specifications

1.216 - 1.220 in.
intake
(30.89 - 30.99 mm)
a
1.216 - 1.220 in.
Exhaust
(30.89 - 30.99 mm)
1.022 - 1.025 in.
intake
(25.95 - 26.05 mm)
b
1.022 - 1.025 in.
Exhaust
(25.95 - 26.05 mm)
4. Measure the camshaft bore diameters (a) and camshaft bearing diameters (b).
Camshaft Bore Inside Diameter "a"

1.4567 - 1.4577 in. (37.000 - 37.025 mm)
Camshaft Bearing Diameter "b"

1.4541 - 1.4549 in. (36.935 - 36.955 mm)
Page 4A· 26 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
Cylinder Head
1. Inspect the cylinder head for mineral deposits/corrosion in the water passage ways,
clean any deposits/corrosion observed.
2. Inspect the cylinder head for carbon deposits In combustion chamber (use round scrap·
er to clean away deposits). Be careful not to scratch or remove material.
3. Using a straight edge and a thickness gauge inspect cylinder head for warpage . Re·
place cylinder head If out of specification.
Cylinder Head Warpage limit

0.004 in. (0. 1 mm)
VALVE GUIDE INSPECTION

1. Measure the valve guide bore (a). If valve guide wear is out of specification, replace the
valve guide.
Valve Guide Inside Diameter

Intake Valve 0.2165 - 0.2170 in.
Exhaust Valve (5.500 - 5.512 mm)
90·857046 AUGUST 1998

CYUNDER HEAD
VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT

1. Heat the cylinder head in an oven to 3900 F (2000 C). This will help to ease guide removal
and installation and to maintain correct interference fit.
2. Remove the valve guide using a valve guide remover.
a - Valve Guide Remover (91-809495A 1)
3. Install the new valve guide and circlip using a valve guide installer bushing along with
the valve guide remover.
a - Valve Guide Remover (91-809495A 1)

b - Valve Guide Inslaller Bushing (91-809496A 1)
4. After installing the valve guide, ream the valve guide using a valve guide reamer to ob-
tain proper stem-to-guide clearance.
a - Valve Guide Reamer (91-809497Al)
Page 4A-2B 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
VALVE SEAT RECONDITIONING

Clean the carbon deposits from the combustion chambers and valve seats and check for
pitting.
Several different types of equipment are available for reseating valve seats. Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
Measure valve seat width (a). Resurface the valve seat if not in specification.
Reface valve seat, use a 60°, 45°, 15° valve seat cutter.
NOTE: When twisting cutter, keep an even downward pressure to prevent chatter marks.
Valve Seat Width Specification "a"

Exhaust Valve (0.9 - 1.1 mm)
NOTE: If resurfacing the valve seats is required, resurface the valve seats to the specified
angles shown in chart following.
--===r-i
c
b
a
Valve Seat Angle Specifications

a 150
b 450
c 60 0
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A-29

CYUNOER HEAD
Condition: The valve seat is centered on valve face but it is too wide.
Valve Seat Cutter Set Desired Results

Use 15° Cutter To reduce valve seat
Lightly width
60° Cutter
Condition: The valve seat is in the middle of the valve face but it is too narrow.

Use 45° Cutter To achieve a uniform valve
seat width
Condition: Valve seat is too narrow and it is near valve margin.

Use 15° Cutter, First To center the seat and to
achieve its Width
45° Cutter
Page 4A-30 9()"857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
Condition: Valve seat is too narrow and is located near the bottom edge of the valve face .

Use BO° Cutter, First To center the seat and to in·
crease its Width
45° Cutter
Valves
1. Clean the carbon deposits from the valve . Discard any cracked, warped , or burned
valves.
2. Measure the valve stem diameter to check for wear. Replace valves if not within specifi·
cation .
Valve Stem Diameter

(5.475 - 5.490 mm)
Exhaust Valve 0.2 150 - 0.2156 in.
(5.460 - 5.475 mm)
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A·31

CYLINDER HEAD
3. Check the valve face for pitting. Valves faces that are pitted must be refaced.
NOTE: Several different types of equipment are available for refacing valves. Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
NOTE: After refacing the valve seat or replacing the valve and valve guide, the valve seat
and valve face should be lapped.
4. Check the margin thickness (a) of the valves after the valves have been ground. Any
valve with a margin thickness of less than the specification, should be replaced.
Margin Th ickness " a"

(0.5 - 0.9 mm)
Exhaust Valve 0.020 - 0.035 in.
(0.5 - 0.9 mm)
5. Measure valve stem runout , replace if out of specification.
Valve Stem Runout Limit (Max.)

Intake Valve
0.0006 in. (0.016 mm)
Exhaust Valve
Page 4A-32 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
Valve Springs
1. Check each spring under load on a spring tester. Replace any weak springs.
2. Check free length limit of each spring. Replace valve springs if not in specification.
Valve Spring Free Length

1.491 - 1.569 in. (37.85 39.85 mm)
3. Check each spring on a flat surface using a square. Rotate spring and check space be-
tween the top coi l and square. Replace valve springs if not in specification.
Valve Spring Tilt Specification " a"

Less than 0.06 in . (1.7 mm)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A-33

CYLINDER HEAD
Cylinder Head Reassembly

Valve Installation
INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVE COMPONENTS
a • Valve
b - Spring Seat
c • Valve Seal
d • Valve Spring
e • Spring Retainer
f • Valve Keepers
INSTALLING VALVES
1. Always use new valve seals .
2. Apply engine oil to the valves and valve seats.
3. Install valves as shown.
I lT
b r
91 -809494 a a
a • End of the Valve Spring with the Pre-Compressed Coits gets Installed Towards
the Cylinder Head
b • Use Spring Compressor Tool (91-809494A 1) to Compress the Springs for
Installation
c • Compress the Spring and Retainer and Install the Valve Keepers Around the
Valve Stem. You May have to Tap Lightly on End of Valve to Seat the Keepers
Page 4A-34 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
Camshaft Oil Seal Installation

1. If removed , install Oil Seal. Position seal so part number side in facing outward. Press
seal in until it makes contact with the inside flat surface.
a
a "Upper Camshaft Oil Seal
Camshaft Installation
1. Apply engine oil to the main journals (3 places) on the camshaft.
2. Slide camshaft into cylinder head (threaded end towards driven gear).
3. Install camshaft retaining bolt. Tighten bolt to the specified torque.
a
~ ~r;O
(A~ " Jff«
a ~ Camshaft Retaining Bolt
Camshaft Retaining Bolt Torque

57 lb. in. (6.4 N·m)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A-35

CYLINDER HEAD
4. Place driven gear on camshaft so alignment pin is in hole. Hold gear with tool
(91-83163M) and fasten with washer and bolt. Tighten bolt to the specified torque.
5. Remove any oil from the camshaft lobes and apply Moly Grease to the lift portion of the
lobes. Obtain Moly Grease from a local source.
NOTE: Rotate camshaft after assembly to ensure it rotates smoothly.
'I
a - Alignment Pin
b - Driven Gear
c - Washer
d - Bolt
Driven Gear Bolt Torque (d)

28 lb. It. (38 N·m)
Page 4A-36 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
Rocker Arm Shaft Assembly

1. Apply engine oil to the rocker shaft and arms.
2. Locate the end of the rocker shaft that gets installed towards driven gear (oil holes will
line-up with the mating oil holes in the cylinder head).
3. Slide the rocker arms onto rocker shaft as shown.
4. Install brackets on rocker shaft as shown.
.. @
a - Rocker Shaft
b - Rocker Arms (6)
c - Brackets (4)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A-37

CYLINDER HEAD
Rocker Arm Shaft Installation

1. Install the rocker arm shaft assembly as shown . Tighten bolts to the specified torque .
NOTE: Leave all adjustment screws loose at this time.
~ 110 ():a 4·Stroke Outboard Oil (92·828000A 12)
a - Mounting Bolts (4) -M8x30
Rocker Arm Shaft Mounting Bolt Torque

160 lb. in. (18 N·m)
Page 4A-38 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
Cylinder Head Gasket

1. Install new cylinder head gasket and dowel pins.
a • Gasket (New)
b • Dowel Pi ns (2)
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A-39

CYLINDER HEAD
Cylinder Head Installation

1. Apply engine oil to the threads of each bolt and seat surface. Torque bolts in sequence
and in two steps.
[iTh:l:o 4-Slroke Outboard Oil (92-828000A12)
a - Screws (8)-M9x95
Cylinder Head Bolt Torque

Qty. 8 (M9x95)
t st: t 7 lb. ft. (23 N·m)
2nd: 34.7 lb. ft. (47 N·m)
Page 4A-40 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
2. Fasten cylinder head with bolts shown . Torque bolts in sequence and in two steps.
a - Screws (6)-M6x25
b - Screws (4)-M6x25
Cylinder Head Bolt Torque

Cyl. Head Flange Bolts Qty. 4 (M6x25)
1st: 53 lb. in. (6 N ·m)
2nd: 106 lb. in. (12 N·m)
Carbu retor Flange Bolts Qty. 6 (M6x25)
75 lb. in. (8.5 N·m)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A·41

CYLINDER HEAD
Cylinder Head Cover Installation

1. Install cover a-ring into groove.
2. Install cylinder head cover. Secure cylinder head cover with bolts.
~a

a - O-Ring
c - Bolts (7) - M6x20
Cylinder Head Cover Bolt Torque

70 lb. in. (8 N·m)
3. Refer to section 2A for installation of the timing belt.

4. Install inlet and outlet fuel pump hoses.
5. Install breather hose.
NOTE: Secure fuel and breather hoses with cable ties.
a - Inlet Hose
b - Outlet Hose
c • Breather Hose
Page 4A-42 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER HEAD
6. Install flywheel cove r/manual starter.

NOTE: Refer to section 8 for installation of manual starter.
a - Flywheel Cover
b • Bolts (4) . M6x25
Flywheel Cover Bolt Torque

45 lb. in. (5. 1 N·m)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4A-43

CYLINDER BLOCK/CRANKCASE
POWERHEAD
Section 4B - Cylinder Block/Crankcase
Table of Contents
Specifications .. ..... • . • .... • .. . . . . . . . . 48-2 Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . • ........ . 48- 19

Special Tools .. ... . •.... • .......... 48-3 Piston Pin . . . 48-20
Crankshaft . . . . . . . ........... . 48-4 Piston Rings . . . ... .... . .. . 4B-20
Cylinder Block . . ...... . ...... . . . .. . 48-6 Crankshaft .. . .. .. .. . . . .. .. . 48-21
Torque Sequence .. . . . . .. . . . . .. .. . . . 48-8 Crankcase and Bearings ............. . 48-21
Preparation for Powerhead Removal . . . 48-9 Connecting Rod Oil Clearance 48-25
Ti ller Handle Models . .. . . .. . . . ....... . 48- 10 Installing Connecting Rod Bearings . . . . . 4B-27
Powerhead Removal . . ..... . .. . . . . ..... . 48-11 Powerhead Reassembly ................ . 48-28
Removing Powerhead Components . . . . . . . 48-11 Piston Reassembly .. . ............... . 48-28
Ignition Components .. . .. . . . ...... . . 48-11 Piston Installation ... . .... . .......... . 48-30
Charging/Starting System Components 48-1 2 Crankcase and Crankshaft Installation 48-30
Fuel Components .. . ................ . 4B-12 Crankcase Cover Installation . ......... . 48-33
Harness and Battery Cable Removal . . . 48-12 Thermostat/Exhaust Cover Installation . . 48-35
Cylinder Head Removal ............. . . 4B-12 Ignition Components ................. . 48-36
Powerhead Disassembly . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 48-12 Charging/Starting System Components . 48-36
Thermostat and Exhaust Cover Removal 4B-12 Fuel Components . . . .... . . . ......... . 48-36
Crankcase and Crankshaft Removal ... . 48-13 Harness and Battery Cable Installation 48-36
Piston Disassembly . ..... . ........... . 48-15 Powerhead Installation . .. . .. . . . .. . 48-36
Cleaning/Inspection/Repair . . . ...... . .... . 48-16 Following Powerhead Installation 4B-37
Thermostat ...... . ... . ...... . . . ..... . 48-16 Tiller Handle Models . . .. . . . . 48-38
Cylinder ... . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-18
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 48-'

Specifications
Type 4 Stroke Cycle - Over Head Camshaft

CYLINDER
Displacement 45.6 cu. in. (747cc)
BLOCK
Number of Cylinders 3
STROKE Length 2.953 in. (75 mm)
Diameter
Standard 2.5591 in. (65 mm)
CYLINDER Oversize-Om 0 in. (0.25 mm) 2.5689 in. (65.25 mm)
BORE Oversize-0.020 in. (0.50 mm) 2.5787 in. (65.5 mm)
Taper/Out of Round Maximum 0.003 in. (0.08 mm)
Bore Type Cast Iron
Piston Type Aluminum
0 .0. at Skirt
PISTON Standard 2.5570 - 2.5578 in. (64.950 - 64.965 mm)
Oversize-0.Ol0 in. (0.25 mm) 2.5669 - 2.5675 in. (65.2 - 65.215 mm)
Oversize-0.020 in. (0.50 mm) 2.5768 - 2.5774 in. (65.450 - 65.465 mm)
PISTON Piston to Cylinder Clearance 0.0014 - .0026 in. (0. 035 - 0. 065 mm)
CLEARANCE
Ring End Gap (Installed)
Top 0.006 - 0.012 in. (0.15 . 0. 03 mm)
Middle 0.012 - 0.020 in. (0.30 - 0.50 mm)
RINGS Bottom (Oil Ring) 0.008 - 0.028 in. (0.20 - 0.70 mm)
Side Clearance:
Top 0.0008 - 0.0024 in. (0.02 - 0.06 mm)
Middle 0.0008 - 0.0024 in . (0.02 - 0.06 mm)
Compression Ratio 9.8:1
COMPRESSION Cylinder Compression· 180 -2 10 psi (Peak)
RATIO (Electric Models Only. Cold Engine @
W.O.T.)
PISTON PIN Piston Pin Diameter 0.6285 - 0.6287 in. (15.965 - 15.970 mm)
CONNECTING Oil Clearance (Big End) 0. 0008 - 0.0020 in. (0.020 - 0.052 mm)
ROD Small End Inside Diameter 0.6293 - 0.6298 in. (15.985 - 15.998 mm)
Main Bearing Clearance 0.0005 - 0.0017 in. (0.012 - 0.044 mm)
CRANKSHAFT
Crankshaft Run-out 0.0018 in. (0.046 mm)
NOTE: Manual start models are equipped with compression relief mechanism which will not
allow compression testing.
Page 48-2 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Special Tools
1. Oil Filter Wrench (PIN 91-B02653)
2. Flywheel Holder (PIN 91-B3163M)
• •
3. Flywheel Puller (PIN 91-83164M)
4. Piston Ring Compressor (PIN FT2997)
5. Powerhead Stand (PIN 91-B55662A 1)
6. Piston Ring Expander (PIN 91-24697)
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 48·3

CYUNOER BLOCK/CRANKCASE
CRANKSHAFT
10
11 \
14 12 \
\
8
gg
15--9 ~
./?~~
I
1
-
•
5-e>
D110 0» 4·Stroke Outboard Oil (92·828000A12)
go·857046 AUGUST 1998

CRANKSHAFT
TOROUE
REF.
NO. OTY. DESCRIPTION lb. in. lb. ft. N·m
1 CRANKSHAFT
1
1 CRANKSHAFT (BIGFOOn
2 1 KEY
3 1 KEY
-
4 1 OIL SEAL
5 1 OIL SEAL
6 3 CONNECTING ROO
--
7 6 BOLT 150 12.5 17
-
6 BEARING (BROWN)
8 6
- -
BEARING (BLACK)
6 BEARING (BLUE)
-
--
3 PISTON (STANDARD)
9 AR PISTON (.25 O/S)
AR PISTON (.50 O/S)
3 PISTON RING (TOP) (STANDARD)
10 AR PISTON RING (TOP) (.25mm O/S)
---
AR PISTON RING (TOP) (.50mm O/S)
3 PISTON RING (2 NO.) (STANDARD)
11 AR PISTON RING (2 NO.) (.25mm O/S)
AR PISTON RING (2 NO.) (.50mm O/S)
3 PISTON OIL RING (STANDARD)
12 3 PISTON OIL RING (.25mm O/S)
3 PISTON OIL RING (.50mm O/S)
13 3 PISTON PIN
14 6 RETAINER
15 1 GEAR-Drive
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 48·5

CYUNDER BLOCK/CRANKCASE
CYLINDER BLOCK
25
6 I
~ ...z
3
26
21
~
\ B 12 14
'- Y 13 /
I 29 c:::=J
I 15
~I 16
I
\ I
8
2
8 27 19
/ I / Qg 22
5 7
23
/~
21 I
I
I
A
G:::rP Loctite Pipe Sealant WfTeflon (92-88504)

~ Loctite 514 Gasket Eliminator
KiiQ::VD 4-Stroke Outboard Oil (92-828000A 12)
A - TO TELL·TALE B = TO FITTING IN ADAPTOR PLATE
Page 48-6 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER BLOCK
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb. in. lb. ft . N·m
1 CYLI NDER BLOCK
1 --
1 CYLINDER BLOCK (BIGFOOT)
-
2 2 DOWEL PIN
3 3 PLUG
--
4 1 PIPE PLUG (1 /2-14)
5 1 PIPE PLUG (3/4-14)
8 BEARING (B ROWN)
6 8 BEARING (B LACK)
8 BEARING (BLUE)
7 1 NIPPLE 29.5 40
--
8 8 SCREW (M8 x 1.25 x 82) 264 22 30
9 8 SCREW (M6 x 35) 106 8.8 12
-
10 1 GASKET
11 1 OIL FILTER 70 8
-
12 1 GASKET
--
13 1 EXHAUST COVER
14 1 DECAL-EPA Label (1999)
15 1 PIPE PLUG
16 1 THERMOSTAT
17 1 GASKET
18 1 COVER
19 10 SCREW (M6 x 35) 106 8.8 12
20 1 ELBOW
21 3 STASTRAP
22 1 TUBING (11 IN.)
23 1 TEMPERATURE SENSOR
24 1 O RING
25 1 LIFTI NG EYE
26 1 SC REW (M8 x 35) 210 17.5 24
27 1 PLUG·Serial Number
28 1 HOSE (18 IN.)
29 1 J CLIP
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 48·7

CYLINDER BLOCK/CRAN KCASE
Torque Sequence
8 ® 7
Exhaust Cover Crankcase Cover
Page 4S-8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Preparation for Powerhead Removal
prevent this type of accidental starting

always remove spark plug leads from spark plugs.
1. On electric start models, disconnect the battery cables from the battery. Remove battery
cables from engi ne.
2. Disconnect the power trim wires (if so equipped).
3. Remove bottom cowl .
•
a - Screws (6)
b - Screw M6x60
4. Disconnect vent hose.
a - Vent Hose
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 46-9

5. Disconnect inlet hose from fuel pump.
a • Inlet Fuel Hose
6. Push retainer up and slide over to disengage the vertical shift shaft.
a . Retainer
Tiller Handle Models

1. Refer to TIller Handle Section 7B for removal of th rottle cable, shiH rod , and tiller handle
wiring .
Page 48-10 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

Powerhead Removal
1. Remove powerhead mounting bolts.
-, I
a - Bolts (8)
2. Lift powerhead from drive shaft housing. Place powerhead on Powerhead Stand PI N
9 t -855662A t .
91-855662A 1
55773
Removing Powerhead Components

Ignition Components
1. Refer to Section 2A for removal of the following ignition components.
a. Flywheel
b. Stator
c. Timing Belt
d. Ignition Coils
e. ECM
f. Crank Position Sensor
g. Temperature Sensor
9O-B57046 AUGUST 1998 Page 49-11

Charging and Starting System Components

1. Refer to Section 28 for removal of the following ignition components.
a. Starter Motor
b. Start Solenoid
c. Voltage Regulator
Fuel Components
1. Refer to Section 3A and 38 for removal of the following components.
a. Fuel Pump
b. Carburetor
Harness and Battery Cable Removal
1. Remove battery and harness cable assembly.
Cylinder Head Removal
1. See Section 4A for cylinder head removal.
Powerhead Disassembly
Thermostat and Exhaust Cover Removal
1. Remove thermostat cover, gasket, and thermostat.
2. Remove exhaust cover and gasket.
3. Remove oil filter.
9t-802653
a - Bolts wlWashers (10)-M6x35 e - Exhaust Cover

b - Thermostat Cover f - Gasket
c - Gasket (Discard) 9 - Oil Filter
d - Thermostat h - Oil Filter Wrench (91-802653)
Page 46-12 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Crankcase and Crankshaft Removal

1. Remove crankcase cover and dowel pins.
a - Bolts wlWashers (8)-M8x82

b - Bolts wlWashers (8)-M6x35
c - Crankcase Cover
d - Dowel Pins (2)
2. Remove connecting rod caps.

IMPORTANT: Note locations of connecting rod bolts, caps, rods, and pistons for re-
assembly.
56876
a - Bolt-Connecting Rod (6). Use 5/ 16 in. 12 point socket head.

b - Connecting Rod Cap (3)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 48-13

3. Remove crankshaft and oil seals.
a - Crankshaft
b - Upper Oil Seal
c - Lower Oil Seal
NOTE: Do not interchange main bearings, re-install in their original locations.
4. Remove main bearing halves from crankcase cover and cylinder block.
a - Main Bearing Halves-Crankcase Cover (4)

b - Main Bearing Halves-Cylinder Block (4)
Page 48-14 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

5. Remove connecting rod/piston assembly.

NOTE: Remove carbon ridge from the cylinder bore using a burr knife. Pistons should be
taken out through the cylinder head side of block.
a - Connecting rod/piston assembly (3)
Piston Disassembly
NOTE: Disassemble each piston separately, make sure components are not mixed.
1. Remove piston pin clip and piston pin . Separate connecting rod from piston.
a - Piston Pin Clip (2)

b - Piston Pin
c - Connecting Rod
d - Bearing
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 48·15

CYLINDER BLOCK/CRANK CASE
2. Remove top and second ring.

3. Remove oil ring (bottom rail, top rail, and scraper).
NOTE: Use piston ring expander tool (PIN 9 1-24697) to prevent rings from breaking. If re-
using rings mark their location (piston #1 , #2, or #3) for correct installation.
~ 9 1-24697
a - Top Ring
b - Second Ring
c - Oil Ring
d - Piston
Thermostat
1. Inspect thermostat, replace if stuck or damaged.
2. Use Measurement Test followi ng to measure:

a. Valve opening temperature.
b. Valve lift.
Page 48-16 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER BLOCK/CR ANKCA SE
MEASUREMENT TEST
1. Tie a piece of thread (or other non-conductive material) onto the thermostat.
2. Suspend the thermostat in water.
3. Heat water slowly while observing the thermostat.
Water Temperature Valve Lift

Below 140· F (60· C) o in. (0 mm)
Above 158· F (70· C) Minimum 0.12 in. (3 mm)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4B-17

CYLINDER BLOCK/CR AN KCASE
Cylinder
MEASURING CYLINDER BORE
1. Measure the cylinder bore diameter at three locations in both X and Y axis.
2. If the cylinder bore is beyond the standard limits listed in the tables below, it will be nec-
essary to re-bore the cylinder to accept the oversize piston.
NOTE: Measure at three locations (LI, L2, and 4) in both X and Yaxis (0 1-6J-
L, =0.8 in. (20 mm)
L2 =1.5 in. (40 mm)
4=2.4 in. (50 mm)
1. Inspect:
a. Water jacket for mineral deposits/corrosion, clean if necessary.
b. Inner surface for score marks, repair if necessary.
2. Measure bore diameter with a cyli nder gauge, re-bore or replace if necessary.
I+---+-----l~ y
t, \L
t °',2
-- =[
L!
r
D3.4
,y=\
DS,6
=
In('55837
Cylinder Bore Specifications

Bore Size Maximum Taper/Out-of-Round
Standard Bore
2.5591 in. (65 mm) 0.003 in.(0.08 mm)
Oversize Bore-0.1 0 In. (0.25 mm)
2.5689 in. (65.25 mm) 0.003 in.(0.08 mm)
Oversize Bore-0.20 In. (0.50 mm)
2.5787 in. (65.5 mm) 0.003 in.(0.08 mm)
NOTE: Taper=(Maximum of 0 1 or ~)-(Minimum of 05 or 0 6)
Page 46-18 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Piston
1. Inspect piston wall wear/damage, replace if necessary.
2. Measure the piston at a point 0.2 in (5.0 mm) from the bottom, replace if out of specifica-
tion .
a • Piston Diameter
b - 0.2 in. (5.0 mm)
Piston Diameter "a"

Piston Size Diameter
Standard 2.5570 - 2.5578 in. (64 .950 - 64.965 mm)
Oversize-0.010 in. (0.50 mm) 2.5669 - 2.5675 in. (65 .2 - 65.215 mm)
Oversize -0.020 in. (0.50 mm) 2.5768 - 2.5774 in. (65.450 - 65.465 mm)
3. Measure piston to cylinder clearance . If out of specification examine piston and cylinder
bore further to determine repair/replacement.
a. Piston to Cylinder Clearance can be defined by:
MBM-MPM=PCC where:
MBM=Mlnlmum Bore Measurement

MPM=Maxlmum Piston Measurement
PCC=Piston to Cylinder Clearance
Piston to Cylinder Clearance

0.0014 - 0.0026 in. (0.035 - 0.065 mm)
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 48·19

CYLINDER BLOCKICRANKCASE
Piston Pin
1. Measure piston pin diameter. Replace piston pin if out of specification.
e
Piston Pin Diameter
0.6285 - 0.6287 in. (15.965 - 15.970 mm)
2. Place the piston pin into the connecting rod and check for free play. There should be no
noticeable free play. Replace the pin and/or connecting rod as necessary.
3. Place the pi ston pin into the piston and check for free play. There should be no notice-
able free play. Replace the pin and/or piston as necessary.
Piston Rings
PISTON RIND SIDE CLEARANCE
1. Measure piston ring side clearance. Replace piston and or piston rings if out of specifica-
tion.
Piston Ring Side Clearance

Top 0.0008 - 0.0024 in. (0.02 - 0.06 mm)
Middle 0.0008 - 0.0024 in. (0.02 - 0.06 mm)
Page 48-20 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER BLOCK/CRANKCA SE
PISTON RIND END GAP CLEARANCE

1. Measure piston ring end gap clearance. Replace piston ring if out of specification .
NOTE: Ring should be level for measurement, push ring into bore with crown of piston
k
Piston Ring End Gap
Top 0.006 - 0.012 in. (0. 15 - 0.30 mm)
2nd 0 .012 - 0.020 in. (0.30 - 0.50 mm)
Oil 0.008 - 0.028 in. (0.20 - 0.70 mm)
Crankshaft
1. Thoroughly clean crankshaft and inspect bearing surfaces. Replace crankshaft if bear-
ing surfaces are pitted, scored, or discolored.
2. Measure run-out. Replace crankshaft if out of specification.
3. Clean oil holes in crankshaft.
~
~I )
Crankshaft Run-out
0.0018 in. (0 .046 mm)
Crankcase and Bearings

1. Measure crankshaft main bearing clearance using the test below, replace the bearings
as a set if out of specification (see Crankcase and Bearing Indication Marks).
Main Bearing Clearance

0.0005 - 0.0017 in. (0.012 - 0.044 mm)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 48·21

CYLINDER BLOCKICRANKCASE
CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARING CLEARANCE MEASUREMENT

IMPORTANT: Do not Interchange the main bearings. Reinstall In their original posi-
tion.
1. Clean all the old sealing material from the split line on the crankcase cover and cylinder
block.
2. Clean all the oil from the following areas:
a. Main bearing surfaces on the cylinder block and crankcase cover.
b. Main bearings.
c. Crankshaft bearing surfaces.
3. Install main bearings halves into the cylinder block.
4. Install crankshaft.
NOTE: Align each bearing projection with the notch in the cylinder block.
a - Main Bearing Halves-Cylinder Block (4)

b - Projection in Bearing
C - Notch in Cylinder Block
d - Crankshaft
5. Place a piece of plastigauge onto each crankshaft bearing surface.

NOTE: Do not put plastigauge over the oil hole on the bearing surface of the crankshaft.
a - Plastigauge
Page 48-22 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER BLOC K/C RANKCASE
6. Install main bearing halves into the crankcase.

NOTE: Align each bearing projection with the notch in the crankcase.
a - Main Bearing Halves-Crankcase (4)

b - Projection in Bearing
c - Notch in Crankcase
7 . Install crankcase onto cylinder block.

S. Apply oil to the cover bolts and torque cover bolts in sequence and in two steps.
IMPORTANT: Do not move crankshaft until measurement has been completed.

a - Center Bolts M8x82 (8)
b - Outer Bolts M6x35 (8)
Crankcase Cover Bolt Torque

Center Bolts Oty. 8 1st Torque: t1 lb. ft. (15 N·m)
(MBxB2) 2nd Torque: 22 lb. in. (30 N·m)
Outer Bolts Oty. 8 1st Torque: 53 lb. in. (6 N·m)
(M6x35) 2nd Torque: 106 lb. in. (12 N·m)
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 48-23

CYLINDER BLOC K/CRANKCASE
9. Remove the bolts and crankcase .

10. Measure the compressed plastigauge to check the main bearing clearance. Replace
bearings if clearance is not within specification .
a - Compressed Plastigauge
Main Bearing Clearance

0.0005 - 0.0017 in. (0.012 - 0.044 mm)
SELECTING NEW MAIN BEARINGS

1. Locate the main bearing code letters on the cylinder block.
.-'-,
b AIBC~
'4
a - Main Bearing Code Letters (A, B, or C)

b - Main Beari ng Identification Color
2. Refer to the following reference chart to select the correct main bearings.
3. Use the color coded main bearings that match the main bearing code letter.
Crankcase And Bearing Indication Marks

Main Bearing Code Letter Main Bearing Color Code
A Blue
B Black
C Brown
Page 48·24 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER BLOCKJCRANKCASE
Connecting Rod Oil Clearance

1. Measure the connecting rod oil clearance using the measurement steps below, replace
the connecting rod as a set if out of specification.
Connecting Rod Oil Clearance

0.0008 - 0.0020 in. (0.020 - 0.052 mm)
CONNECTING ROO OIL CLEARANCE MEASUREMENT

IMPORTANT: Do not interchange used connecting rod bearings. Reinstall bearings
in their original position.
1. Clean all the oil from the connecting rod bearing surfaces and connecting rod journals
on the crankshaft.
2. Install the connecting rod to the crankshaft.
/\--'---
~
a - Connecting Rod
b - Driveshaft End of Crankshaft
3. Place a piece of plastigauge on the crankpin journals.
a - Plastigauge
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 48·25

4. Assemble th e con necting rod caps onto their respective cran kpins.
NOTE: Make sure "Flat" sides of cap and rod are together and scribe marks match.
a - Con necting Rod Cap

b - Crankpin
c - Scribe Marks on Cap and Rod
5. Tighten connecting rod bolts in alternating sequence and in two stages.

IMPORTANT: Do not rotate connecting rod when checking clearance.
Connecting Rod Bolt Torque

1s!Torque: 53 lb. in. (6 N·m)
2nd Torque: 150 lb. in. (17 N ·m)
6. Remove the connecting rod cap .

7. Measure the width of the compressed plastigauge on each crankpin to check the con-
necting rod oil clearance. Replace connecting rod as a set if oil clearance is not within
specification .
a - Compressed PJastigauge
SELECTING NEW CONNECTING ROD BEARINGS

1. Locate the connecting rod bearing code Jetter that is scribed on the side of the connect-
ing rod .
2. Refer to the following reference chart to select the correct con necting rod bearings.
Page 4B-26 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

3. Use the color coded connecting rod bearings that match the connecting rod bearing
code letter.
Connecting Rod Connecting Rod

Beari ng Code Letter Bearing Color Code
A Blue
B Black
G Brown
~I
, , ---- -
-H - I"
aU 11r«: --
L/'®
~/ -- - j
a - Connecting Rod Bearing Code Letters
b - Connecting Rod Bearing Identification Color
Installing Connecting Rod Bearings

IMPORTANT: Do not interchange used connecting rod bearings. Reinstall bearings
In their original position.
1. Clean all the oil from the bearing surfaces on the connecting rod.
2. Install connecting rod bearings. Make sure the locking lug on each bearing fits into its
notch.
a - Connecting Rod Bearings

b - Fit the Locking Lugs into the Notches
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 48·27

Powerhead Reassembly
Piston Reassembly
1. Assemble connecting rod to piston , secure with piston pin and new piston pin clips .
IMPORTANT: Make sure the "V" mark on the connecting rod and the " UP" on piston
crown are both facing the same direction.
IMPORTANT: Piston pin clip should be Installed with end gap facing opposite of pry
point.
tt:::iiiJP 4-Stroke Outboard Oil (92-828000A 12)

a • Connecting Rod
b - Piston
c - Piston Pin
d - Piston Pin Clip (2)
e - Piston Pin Clip End Gap
f - Pry Point
Page 48·28 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

PISTON RING INSTALLATION

IMPORTANT: Use caution when installing piston ring s to avoid scratching piston.
1. Install the oil ring components as shown. Spread rings just enough to slip over piston.
2. Install the second and top compression rings (Ur ' side up). Spread rings just enough to
slip over piston.
3. Offset the piston ring end gaps.
.- .
11
~~ ~
- ~ v ~l
.-Qf110]
I ~
-(£) ~:
I®- I, ~(Q I j
I, ~(O ) I .-@
~ I I I ~
~ 1 L L~
I I
I I J I'-
50·
a - Oil Ring Spacer

b - BoHom Rail
c - Top Rail
d - Second Compression Ring (''T'' side up)
e • Top Compression Ring ("T' side up)
1 - ''T'' Mark Should Face Piston Crown
9 - End Gap - Top Compression Ring
h - End Gap - Second Compression Ring
i - End Gap - Upper Oil Ring Rail
j - End Gap - Lower Oil Ring Rail
k - End Gap - Oil Ring Spacer
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 46-29

CYUNDER BLOCK/CRANKCASE
Piston Installation
NOTE: Cylinder bores must be clean before installing pistons. Clean with light honing, as
necessary. After honing, clean cylinder bores with water and detergent. After cleaning, swab
cylinder bores several times with engine oil and a clean cloth, then wipe with a clean dry
c/o/h.
1. Lubricate pistons, rings. and cylinder walls with engine oil.
2. Install piston/connecting rod assembly using piston ring compressor tool.
NOTE: Install used pistons in theiroriginallocations(cylinders). Install piston with "UP" mark
on piston crown facing toward the flywheel end of block.
~---'\
UP r-r-n-1lT11'
PIN FT2997
a - Piston Ring Compressor (PIN FT2997)

b - Flywheel End
Crankcase and Crankshaft Installation

1. Install crankshaft main bearings.
NOTE: Align the projection of the bearings with the notch in the cylinder body/crankcase.
Apply oil to bearings before installing.
~ 4-Stroke Outboard Oil (92-828000A12)
a - Main Bearing Halves-Crankcase Cover (4)

b - Main Bearing Halves-Cylinder Block (4)
C - Projection in Bearing
d - Notch in Cylinder Body/C rankcase
Page 48-30 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER B LOCK/CRANKCASE
2. Install upper and lower oil seal.

3. Lubricate crankshaft bearing su rfaces with engine oil.
4. Install crankshaft.
NOTE: Install oil seal with manufacturers marks/numbers facing outward. Apply oil to seals
before installing.
~l~
[Er:";110::--7'(l>- O ~
~ 4-Stroke Outboard Oil (92-S2S000A12)
a - Upper Oil Seal
b ~ Lower Oil Seal
IMPORTANT: Assemble connecting rod bolts, caps, rods, and pistons in their original
locations.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 48-31

5. Lubricate connecting rod, rod journals with engine oil.

6. Install connecting rod cap and bolts onto their respective crankpins.
NOTE: Apply oil to connecting rod bolts before installing. Make sure scribe marks on cap
and rod align.
7. Tighten connecting rod bolts in alternating sequence and in two stages.
[ii!iOOO:DlI 4-Stroke Outboard Oil (92-828000A 12)

a - Connecting Rod Cap (3)
b - Bolt-Connecting Rod (6)
c - Scribe Marks
Connecting Rod Bolt Torque

15t Torque : 53 lb. in. (6 N·m)
2nd Torque : 150 lb. in. (17 N·m)
Page 46-32 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER BL.OCK/CRANKCASE
Crankcase Cover Installation

1. Clean off all oi l from the contacting surfaces of the crankcase cover and cylinder block.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the contacting surface of the crankcase cover and cylinder
block are clean before applying gasket sealant.
2. Apply a smooth even coat of Loctite Master Gasket Sealant to the contacting surfaces
on the crankcase cover. Use a small (paint type) roller to spread out the sealant for a
smooth even coverage. Instructions in gasket sealant kit must be followed exactly.
NOTE: Do not apply gasket sealant to the main bearings or the bolt holes.
~ Loctite Master Gasket "514" (92· 12564·2)

a - Contact Surface of Crankcase
b - Use Roller To Apply A Smooth Even Coat.
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 48·33

3. Install dowel pins and crankcase cover. Oil bolts and torque cover in sequence and in
two steps.
®
@o ®
~
'"
4
@
0
8 (J)
~ 4·Stroke Outboard Oit (92·S28000A 12)
a - Dowel Pins (2)

b - Crankcase Cover
c - Bolls wlWashers (8)-M6x35
d - Bolls wlWashers (8)-M8x82
Crankcase Cover Bolt Torque
Center Bolts Oty. 8 1st Torque: 11 lb. ft. (15 N·m)
Outer Bolts Oty. 8 1st Torque: 53 lb. in. (6 N·m)
90·857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER BLOCK/CRANKC ASE
Thermostat and Exhaust Cover Installation

1. Install oil filter.
2. Install new exhaust cover gasket and exhaust cover.
3. Install thermostat, new gasket, and thermostat cover.
NOTE: Torque exhaust and thermostat covers in sequence and in two steps.
91-802653
a - Oil Filter Wrench (91-802653)

b - Oil Filter
c - Gasket
d - Exhaust Cover
e - Thermostat
f - Gasket (New)
9 - Thermostat Cover
h - Bolts wlWashers (10)-M6x35
Exhaust and Thermostat Cover Bolt Torque

1st Torque: 53 lb. in. (6 N·m)
Qty. 10 (M8x35)
2nd Torque: 106 lb. in. (12 N·m)
Oil Filter Torque

70 lb. in. (8 N·m)
90-657046 AUGUST 1998 Page 48-35

Ignition Components
1. Refer to Section 2A for installation of the following ignition components.
a. Flywheel
b. Stator
c. Timing Belt
d. Ignition Coils
e. ECM
f. Crank Position Sensor
Charging and Starting System Components
1. Refer to Section 28 for installation of the following ignition components.
a. Starter Motor
b. Start Solenoid
c. Voltage Regulator
Fuel Components
1. Refer to Section 3A and 38 for installation of the following components.
a. Fuel Pump
b. Carburetor
Harness and Battery Cable Installation
1. Install battery and harness cable assembly.
Powerhead Installation
1. Install powerhead mounting bolts.
a - Bolts (8)-M8x2S
Powerhead Mounting Bolt Torque
28 lb. ft. (38 N·m)
Page 48-36 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

CYLINDER BLOCK/CR ANKCASE
Following Powerhead Installation

1. Push retainer up and slide over to engage the vertical shift shaft.
a - Retainer
2. Connect inlet hose to fuel pump.
a - Inlet Fuel Hose

b - Cable TIe
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4B·37

CYLINDER BLOCKICRANKC ASE
3. Connect vent hose, secure with cable tie.
a - Vent Hose
b - Cable Tie
4. On electric start models, install battery cables on engine. Connect the battery cables to
the batlery.
5. Connect the power trim wires (if so equipped).
6. Install bottom cowl.
\: •
a - Screws (6)
b - Screw M6x60
Bottom Cow l Bolt Torque

60 lb. in. (7 N·m)
Tiller Handle Models

1. Refer to Tiller Handle Section 78 for installation of throttle cable, shift rod, and tiller han-
dle wiring .
Page 48-38 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

LUBRICATION
POWERHEAD
Section 4C - Lubrication
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-1 Cleaning and Inspection . .. . .. _. . . . . . . . . . . 4C-3

Oil Pump Removal ........•........... . . 4C-2 Oil Pump Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-4
Oil Pump Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . 4C-2 Oil Pump Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-5
Specifications
,------------,--=-----:;------------r~~ 1
Pump Type Trochoid
Engine Oil Pressure (Warm Engine)
@ 3000 rpm 30-40 psi (207-278 kPa)
Engine Oil Pan Capacity Either 3 ats. or 3 Liters
011 Pump:
Outer Rotor to Housing "a" 0.0035 - 0.006 in. (0.09 - 0.15 mm)
Inner Rotor to Outer Rotor "b" 0.005 in. (0.12 mm)
Rotor to Housing "e" 0.001 - 0.003 in. (0.03 - 0.08 mm)
LUBRICATION
SYSTEM
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4C-1

LUBRICATION
Oil Pump Removal

1. Refer to section 4A for Cylinder Head Removal.
2. Remove oi l pump bolts, separate oil pump from cylinder head.
a - Bolts (4) M6x35
Oil Pump Disassembly

1. Heat screws to loosen Loctite sealant. Remove screws.
a - Screw (2) Heat Screws to Loosen Lactite Sealant.
Page 4C·2 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

LUBRICATION
2. Disassemble Oil Pump.
a - Cover Seal
b - Outer Rotor
c - Inner Rotor
d - Shaft
e - Cross Pin

Oil Pump
1. Check oil pump components for pitting, scratches, and for the following measurements.
Replace oil pump if worn or out of specification.
2. Using a feeler gauge, measure the following oil pump clearances:
a. Betwee n outer rotor and pump housing (a).
b. Between the inner rotor and outer rotor (b).
c. Between the outer rotor and pump housing (c).
----.,~ 1"'<-- a
c b
55803
Oil Pump Clearances

a 0.0035 - 0.006 in. (0.09 - 0.15 mm)
b 0.005 in. (0.12 mm)
c 0.001 - 0.003 in. (0.03 - 0.08 mm)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4C-3

LUBRICATION
Oil Pump Assembly

1. Reassemble the oil pump assembly.
2. Lubricate the outer and inner rotors thoroughly with engine oiL
a - Cover Seal
b - Outer Rotor
C - Inner Rotor
d • Shaft
e - Cross Pin
3. Fasten cover with two screws. Apply Loctite 222 to threads . Tighten screws to the speci-
fied torque.
I I
51
~ 51 t> Loctite "222" (92·809818)

a • Screws (2) Apply Loctite 222 to Threads
Oil Pump Cover Screw Torque

70 lb. in. (8 N·m)
Page 4C-4 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

LUBRICATION
Oil Pump Installation

1. Place O-ring seals on the oil pump. Lubricate the O-rings with oil.
2. Prime the oil pump by pouring approximately 1 flo oz. (30 ml) of engine oil into the oil
pump body.
a - O-Ring Seals
b - Pour Approximately 1 II. oz. (30 ml) 01 Eng ine Oil into the Oil Pump Body
3. Align oil pump shaft with the camshaft and in stall the oil pump.
4.
a - Oil Pump Assembly

b - Align Slot with Camshaft Projection
c - Bolts (4)-M6x35
Oil Pump Mounting Bolt Torque
70 lb. in. (8.0 N·m)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 4C·5

CLAMP/sWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING
MID·SECTION
Section SA - Clamp/Swivel Brackets & Drive Shaft Housing
Table of Contents
Specifications . ....... ...... .... . . ...... . SA-' Driveshaft Housing ............ . . .. ..... . SA-6
Quicksilver Lubricants and Service Aids ... . SA-1 Adaptor Plate .... . ... . . ... .. ... . .. . . ... . SA-8
Transom Bracket . ...................... . SA-2 Steering Arm .......... . .. . • . .. . . . . . .... SA-1O
Swivel Bracket .. . .. .. . .. ............... . SA-4 Bottom Cowl ...... . • . . . ....•.... . ....... SA-12
Specifications
Transom Height:
Short Shaft 15 in. (38 em)
MID-SECTION
Long Shaft
Steering Pivot Range
Tilt Pin Positions
Full Tilt Up Angle
Allowable Transom Thickness
20 in. (5 1 em)
90'
5 + Shallow Water
70'
2-3/8 in. (60.3 mm)
I
Quicksilver Lubricants and Service Aids
Part No. Description
92·88504 Loctite Pipe Sealant wfTeflon
92-8S073SA1 Anti-Corrosion Grease
92-8S0736A 1 2-4·C wfTeflon
92-8280OQA 12 4-Stroke Outboard Oil
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5A·1

Transom Bracket
9
~1:ffi-- 11
2
39
12
()
()
()
() 15
~
14
25 /'@~
23 19 30 I
31
, 1
_ 4
Y
"."•" ~
~
•
44
' 43
21 ~~
20 ~
IlJLD> 2-4-C wlTeflon (92-B50736A 1)
Page 5A-2 90-857046 AUGUST 1998
CLAMPISWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING
Transom Bracket
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION Ib-in. Ib-It Nm
1 TRANSOM BRACKET (PO RT)
1
1 TRANSOM BRACKET (PORT - MANUAL LONG BIGFOOT)
2 1 GREASE FITTING
3 1 GROOVE PIN
- -
1 TRANSOM BRACKET (STARBOARD)
4
1 TRANSOM BRACKET (PORT - MANUAL LONG BIGFOOT)
-
5 1 TILT LOCK LEVER
6 1 SPRING
7 1 NYLINER
8 1 SPRING
9 1 KNOB
10 1 GROOVE PIN
11 2 WASHER
12 1 ANCHO R BRACKET
13 1 ANOD E ASSEMBLY
14 2 SCREW (M6 x 25) 60 6 .8
15 2 WASH ER
5 SCREW (30 MM)
16
1 SCREW (35 MM)
17 4 LOCKWASHER
18 2 NUT
19 1 TILT PI N ASSEMBLY NON POWER TRIM
20 1 SPRING
21 1 TILT TUBE
Tighten nut to 32 lb.
22 2 NUT ft. and then back off
114 turn
23 1
-- SEAL KIT
--
24 1 o RING NON-HANDLE
25 1 SPAC ER
--
26 2 CLIP
27 1 C-WASHER POWER TRIM
30 4 WASHER Drive Tight
--
31 4 NUT
32 LINK
-- 1
-33- 1 TILT LEVER
34 2 BUSHI NG NON POWER TRIM
35 2 WASHER
--
36
-
1 WAVE WASHER
37 1 TILT KNOB
38 1 SCREW (.375-16 x .62) 220 18.3 24.9
39 2 SCREW (Ml 0 x 40)
40 2 WASHER- -
41 2 NUT
42 1 DECAL-Tolt Lock
43 1 - THRmirSCREW
44 1 WASH ER
45 ,- SCREW
90-657046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5A-3

CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING
Swivel Bracket
A = TORQUE NUT 120 LB. (13.5 N_M) AND THEN BACK OFF 1/4 TURN .
6 II
"tJ I
16
15
\
~#' Ill>
~ ,{] \
10
11
12-{]
, 8
(JI"
10 10
[jLI:P 2-4-C wlTeflon (92-S50736A1)
Page 5A-4 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CLAMP/SW IVE L BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING
Swivel Bracket
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION Ib-i n. Ib-ft Nm
1 1 LINK ROD
- 2- 1 SCR EW (1-112 IN.) 20 27 .0
3 1 WASHER ELECTRIC NON HANDLE
4 2 WASHER
5 2 NUT (.375-24) 120 13.5
6 1 PUCK
'7 1 BUSHING
--
B 1 SWIVEL BRACKET
--
9 2 BEARING
-- --
10 2 GREASE FITTING (Quantity 3 required on Handle Versions)
--
11 1
-- DECAL-Co-Pilot
12 - 1 - DECAL-SerialOverlaminale
13 1 BUSH ING (LOWER)
14 1 SEAL
--
1 SCREW (MB x 10) (HAN DLE)
15 --
1 SCREW (MB x 25) ELECTRIC
----
16 1 SEAL
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5A-5

Driveshaft Housing
5
/! 8 7 /
6
/ /~
4-! ~\\ ,,@/ 5
I
I
19
~ 20
9
~
15
..J...
t1 ~ " 21
@
/~
11 /
13
12
/
3
/
14
~/
17
18
~
-I
Page 5A·6 90·857046 AUGUST 1998
Driveshaft Housing
TOROUE
REF.
NO. OTY. DESCRIPTION Ib-In. Ib-It Nm
1 1 SEAL-water tube
---
1 DRIVESHAFT HOUSING (SHORT)
2
1 DRIVESHAFT HOUSING (LONG)
- -
1 EXHAUST PIPE (SHORT)
3
1 EXHAUST PIPE (LONG)
- - -
4 8 SCREW Adaptor Plate 28 38
---
5 5 SCREW (M8 x 45) 28 38
--
6 1 DRAIN PLUG 210 17.5 23.5
--
7 1 GASKET
--
8 2 BUMPER
- -
9 1 GROMMET (LONG)
- - 1 STUD (NON-BIGFOOT) 12 16.3
10
1 STUD (BIGFOOT)
-- 12 16.3
--
11 1 WASH ER
--
12 1 NUT 40 54.5
- -
1 WATER TUBE (SHORT)
13
1 WATER TUBE (LONG)
--
14 1 GUIDE
--
15 1 BUMPER (LONG)
16 1 DRIVESHAFT HOUSING
17" - 1 - PLATE
- --
18 1 SCREW M10 X 25)
- - 19 1 SPEEDOMETER PICK UP BIGFOOT
--
20 1 CONNECTOR
----
21 1 FiniNG
-- -
22 1 SPACER
23 1 COUPLING
--
24 1
-- BUSHING
--
25 2 WASH ER
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5A·7

CLAMP/S WIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING
Adaptor Plate
3 o 0
/ o
/
4
1
/
00
o
5 ---tl !---JJi"'=~e "-

..-.,--- 5
15
/ ....-::-?>..
~ Loctite Pipe Sealant WfTeflon (92-88504)
'" ~ 4-Stroke Outboard Oil (92-828000A 12)
22
© ____ 24
0'23
Page 5A-8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998
Adaptor Plate
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION Ib-in. Ib-It Nm
1 1 DIPSTICK
2 1 DIPSTICK TUBE
-
3 1 SEAL
--- -
4 1 HEAT SHIELD
5 5 DOWEL PIN
- .
6 1 ELBOW
7 2 STA-STRAP
8 1 SEAL-driveshaft (NON-BIGFOOT)
1 SEAL-driveshaft (BIGFOOT)
9 1 BUSH ING (NON-BIGFOOT)
10 1 PLUG-oil passage
-
11 1 GROMMET (NON-BIGFOOT)
12 1 ADAPTOR PLATE
--
13 1 GASKET
--
14 1 ORING
15 3 SCREW (M6 x 1 x 20) 75 8.5
16 1 DEFLECTOR-Oil
-- -
17 1 BODY-oil pressure relief 34 46
18 1 COTIERPIN
19 1 PLUNGER
20 1 SPRING
21 1 PLATE-Top Oil Pickup
22 1 HOSE-Oil Pickup
23 1 BAFFLE
24 2 CLAMP
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5A-9

Steering Arm
1
/" 2
@ /".-- 7 3
~~
~
_4
@W /"
/6 / /'
8
/"
10
/"
11
@~ V 0 ./ 9 0
~
5
/~
~:::r 12
,, --- - ---------- - - -- - ,
•,
, -14
: 22~
: 23_~
: 24 --@
: 25-i--r
, 94]
-15
'~
,
:2 6 -
e
20
:~
~~
,: 27- ~
.. ~~
-28 " 16 ./
17
. Grease (92-78376-A6)
Anti-Corrosion
!UDP
[ 94 [l> 2--
4 C wlTeflon (92-850736Af)
Page SA·10 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

CLAMPISWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING
Steering Arm
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION Ib-In. Ib-It Nm
1 2 NUT 50 67.8
--
2 1 STRAP
--
3 2 MOUNT
--
4 2 WASH ER (BIGFOOT)
5 8 SC REW (M6 x 20) 130 11
-- --
6 1 BUMPER
7 1 BUMP ER (BIGFOOT)
8 1 RETAINING RI NG
-
9 1 STEERING ARM
--
10 1 BRACKET
- 1- - 1 -
- 1 --
TAB WASHER ELECTRIC
---- 32.5 44
12 2 SCREW (Ml 0 x 1.5 x)
13 2 SCREW (M 12 x 1.75 x) 50 68 .0
-- -
1 SPACER (SHORT)
14 --
1 SPACER (LONG)
--
1 SWIVEL TUBE (SHORT)
15
1 SWIVEL TUBE (LONG)
16 1 GROUND STRAP
--
17 1 GROUND STRAP
--
18 2 SC REW (Ml0 x 1.5 x 105) 32.5 44
19 1 BRACKET
20 3 SC REW(SELF-TAPPING) Drive Tight
21 2 NUT
22 1 NUT (.375-24)
--- -
23 1 LEVER-Co-Pilot
----
24 1 WASHER
--
25 1 ROD (THREADED) HANDLE
26 1 BRACKET PLATE
27 1 DISC
----
28 1 PLATE
29 1 DISC
--
30 2 SCREW (Hex Shoulder) 70 8.0
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5A-1 1

CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS ... DRI VE SHAFT HOUSING
Bottom Cowl
1
11 7
~\
9_\G'J
A
\
~
10-~\
12
~/
14
/@
/ i~~y15
I I ~
13 6
\\
13 L_~
14 ~
I
16 5 _~
\
3 --'p
~" 18 ~
\
17 •
4
19
\ 2
~\
/"
3:- - -
[JLD> 2-4-C wlTefion (92-850736Al)
Page 5A· 12 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

Bottom Cowl
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION Ib· in. Ib·ft Nm
1 BOTTOM COWL (SHORT· PORT)
1
1 BOTTOM COWL (LONG·PORT)
1 BOTTOM COWL (SHORT·STBD.)
2
1 BOTTOM COWL (LONG·STBD.)
-3" 6 SCREW 60 7.0

4
- --
1 WASHER
5 1 SEAL
6 1 WASHER
- --
7 1 GASKET
8 1 SCREW (M6 x 1 x 60) 60 7.0
9 1 FITTING-telltale
10 1 BOOT
11 2 STA·STRAP
--
12 1 LEVER-Cowl Latch
13 2 BUSH ING
--
14 2 WAVE WASHER
15 1 LATCH HOOK
- --
16 1 SCREW (M6 x 16) 60 7.0
1 GROMMET (NON POWER TRIM)
17
1 GROMMET (SPLIT· POWER TRIM)
18 1 PLUG· Trim Switch (NON POWER TRIM)
19 1 SWITCH (POWER TRIM)
~liN[)LE
20
21
~:- - RIVET
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5A-13

POWER TRIM
MID-SECTION
Section 58 - Power Trim
Table of Contents
Special Tools . . .. ....... . .............. . 58-2 Power Trim Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56·30
Quicksilver Lubricants and Service Aids ... . 58-2 Trim Motor Removal .................. 58·31
Power Trim ...... . .. .. .. . ........... . .. . 58-4 Pump and Components Removal . . . 58·31
Theory Of Operation .................... . 58-6 Manifold Removal ............... . .... 56·32
Adjustmenls ....................... . ... . 58-6 Shock Rod Removal .................. 56-33
Trimming Characteristics ............. . 58-6 Shock Rod Disassembly ..........• . • .... 58-33
Trailering Outboard . ................. . 58-7 Memory Piston Removal ...... • • . • . . .. 56·36
Tilting Outboard Up and Down Manually . 58-7 Cleaning/Inspection/Repair . . . . . . . . . . • . . .. 58-37
Power Trim Flow Diagrams .............. . 58-8 Trim Motor Electrical Tests . . . . . . . . • . . .. 56-37
Trim Up Circuit ...................... . 58-8 Reassembly .............. .. .... . ....... 56-38
Tilt Circuit . . . . .. .... .. ...• . . . . • .... 58-10 a-Ring and Seal Placement ........ . 58.38
1
Maximum Tilt ..............•......... 58-12 O'ring Sizes ............................ 56-39
Down Circuit ........................ . 58-14 Power Trim Reassembly ................. 58·41
Shock Function Up .........•......... 58-16 Shock Rod Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 56·41 :
Shock Function Return ......•. • ..•.... 58-18 Shock Rod Installation ................ 58-43
Manual Release ................... . . . 58-20 Trim Limit Assembly Installation ........ 56·44
Troubleshooting ........................ . 58-22 Manual Release Valve Installation ...... 58-44
Preliminary Checks .................. . 58-22 Manifold Installation ................ . . 56-45
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting Oil Pump Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 56·46
Flow Chart ... . ... .. . .. . . . .... . ... . 58-23 Pressure Operated Assembly Installation 58-46
Troubleshooting Ihe Power Trim Reservoir/Motor Installation .... .... .... 58-47
Electrical Syslem ................ . . . 58-27 61eeding Power Trim Unit .. ...... 56·48
Power Trim System Removal ............ . 58-29 Installation of Power Trim System ......... 56-48
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 56-1

POWER TRIM
Special Tools
1. Spanner Wrench PIN 91-74951
: ,--
2. Lock-Ring Pliers PIN 91-822778A3
3. Expanding Rod PIN CG 41 -11'
f 1-
4. Coliet PIN CG 41-14 '
~; "II
5. Heat Lamp PIN 91 -63209

92-90 100A 12 Power Trim Fluid
92-850736A 1 2·4·C wfTeflon
Page 58·2 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
Notes:
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 58-3

POWER TRIM
Power Trim
17 A
a/ 19
~ 25--: :
26 - y ~
1 - 24_~~l)JJ!"
~ "'" 21
" 23 22
,.J-:.l. _ -
- F
g -4
o
5- E
~ 11
6
()
•
,,@ •
15
c .
11
o
NOTE: Lubricate aI/ O-rings using Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid. If not avail-
able, use automotive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid.
NOTE: It is recommended that all O-rings be replaced when servicing tilt system.
Page 58 -4 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
Power Tri m
TOR QUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION Ib~i n. Ib-ft Nm
1 POWER TRIM PUMP (NON-BIGFOOT)
--
- 1 POWER TRIM PUMP (BIGFOOT)
--
1 1 SHOCK ROD KIT
2 1 MEMORY PISTON ASSEMBLY
-- - -
3 1 o RING REBUILD KIT
--- -
4 2 O RING
5 1 CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
--
1 TRIM LIM IT VALVE KIT (NON-BIGFOOT)
6 -
1 TRIM LIM IT VALVE KIT (BIGFOOT)
7 1 PUMP ASSEMBLY
-- -
8 1 MOTOR KIT
-
9 1 RESERVOIR PLUG
--
10 1 MANUAL RELEASE ASSEMBLY
11 1 MANIFOLD KIT
--
12 1 SCREW KIT (MOTOR)
13 1 DRIVE SHAFT
--
14 1 FILTER KIT
--
15 1 P_O. CHECK ASSEMBLY KIT
----
16 1 CABLE
- 1 o RING KIT (COMPLETE TRIM) 1-
17 2 GROOVE PIN
18 1 ANCHOR PI N
-
19 1 PIN
----
- 1 TRIM HARNESS/RELAY ASSEMBLY
----
20 1 HARNESS·Trim
--
21 2 RELAY
-- -
22 2 BRACKET
23 2 GROMMET
----
24 2 BUSHING
25 2 DECAL~Trim Relay
--
26 2 SC REW (M6 x 30)
A - Torque cylinder cap to 45 Ib-ft (61 Nm)

B - Torqu e screws to 80 Ib-in. (9 .0 Nm)
C - Torqu e screws to 70 Ib-in. (7 .9 Nm)
o ~ Torque plugs to 120 Ib· in . ( 13 .5 Nm)
E ~ Torque screws to 100 Ib~in . ( 11 Nm)
F - Torque shock piston to 90 Ib-ft (122 Nm)
90·857046 AUG UST 1998 Page 58·5

POWER TRIM
Theory Of Operation
The Power Trim system consists of an electric motor, pressurized fluid reservoir, pump and
trim cylinder.
The remote control (or trim panel) is equipped with a switch that is used for trimming the
outboard "up" and "down", and for tilting the outboard for shallow water operation (at slow
speed) or for "trailering". The outboard can be trimmed "up" or "down" while engine is under
power or when engine is not running.
Adjustments
Trimming Characteristics
NOTE: Because varying hull designs react differently in various degrees of rough water, it
is recommended to experiment with trim positions to determine whether trimming "up" or
"down" will improve the ride in rough water.
When trimming your outboard from a mid-trim position (trim tab in neutral, straight fore-and-
aft, position), you can expect the following results:
TRIMMING OUTBOARD " UP" ("OUT")
Excessive trim "out" may reduce the stability of some high speed hulls. To correct
instability at high speed, reduce the power gradually and trim the motor " In" slight·
Iy before resuming high speed operation. (Rapid reduction in power will cause a
sudden change of steering torque and may cause additional momentary boat in·
stability.)
• Will lift bow of boat, generally increasing top speed.
• Transfers steering torque harder to left on installations below 23 in. transom height.
• Increases clearance over submerged objects.
• In excess, can cause porpoising and/or ventilation.
• In excess, can cause insufficient water supply to water pump resulting in serious water
pump anei/or powerhead overheating damage.
Excessive engine angle will result in insufficient water supply to water pump
causing water pump and/or powerhead overheating damage. Make sure that water
level is above water intake holes whenever is
Operating "Up" circuit will actuate the u up" relay (located under engine cowl) and close the
electric motor ci rcuit. The electric motor will drive the pump, thus forcing automatic transmis-
sion fluid through internal passageways into the "up" side of the trim cylinder.
The trim cylinder/trim rod will position the engine at the desired trim angle within the 20 °
maximum trim range. The power trim system is designed so the engine cannot be trimmed
beyond the 20° maximum trim angle as long as engine RPM is above approximately 2000
RPM.
The engine can be raised beyond th e 20" maximum trim angle for shallow water operation ,
etc. , by keeping the engi ne RPM below 2000 RPM. If engine RPM increases above 2000
RPM, the thru st created by the propeller (it deep enough in the water) will cause the trim
system to automatically lower the engine back to the 20 " maximum trim angle.
Page 58·6 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
TRIMMING OUTBOARD " DOWN" (" IN" )
Excessive at i may cause Uilde;SiriiibiiO and,IorunSSile "teer-

ing conditions. Each boat should be tested for handling characteristics after any
adjustment is made to the tilt
• Will help planing off, particularly with a heavy load.
• Usually improves ride in choppy water.
• In excess, can cause boat to veer to the left or right (bow steer).
• Transfers steering torque harder to right (or less to the left) .
• Improves planing speed acceleration (by moving tilt pin one hole closer to transom).
Operating "Down" ci rcuit will actuate the "down" relay (located under engine cowl) and close
the electric motor circuit (motor will run in opposite direction of th e "Up" circuit) . The electric
motor will drive the pump, thus forcing automatic transmission fluid through internal pas·
sageways into the "down" side of the trim cylinder. The trim rod wi ll move the engine down·
ward to the desired angle.
Trailering Outboard
Excessive engine trim angle will result in insufficient water supply to water pump
causing water pump and/or powerhead overheating damage. Make sure that water
level is above water intake holes whenever is
While operating "up" circuit, the cylinder rod will continu e to tilt the outboard to a full up posi·
tion for trailering .
Tilting Outboard Up and Down Manually
Before loosening the manual release valve, make sure all persons are clear of en-
as engine will drop to full " down" position when valve is loosened.
With power trim installed, the outboard can be raised or lowered manually by opening the
manual release valve 3 to 4 turns (counterclockwise).
a - Manual Release Valve
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 56·7

POWER TRIM
Power Trim Flow Diagrams
TRIM UP CIRCUIT
e
D Reservoir Oil
D Filtered Feed Oil
D
•
Return Oil
-~b;~!5~~;!i!~Ei~~~~~
Oil Under Pressure
Impact Relief Pressure #22
1625
Uppsi (30-60 hpj
Pressure 880-1110 psi (30-60 hpj
2800 psi (75-125 hpj 1220-1420 psi (75-125 hpj
mininmum Tift Relief Pressure
250-400 psi (30-60 hpj
500-700 psi (40-60 hp Bigfoot)
540-990 psi (75-125 hpj
a - Piston Rod m - Shuttle Valve

b - End Cap n - Up Circuit Pressure Operated Valve
c - Electric Motor o - Manifold Reverse Suction Valve
d - Reservoir Oil p - Manual Release Valve
e - Down Circuit Pressure Relief Valve q - Manifold
f - Down Circuit Pressure Operated Valve r - Tilt Relief Valve
9 - Filter (2 shown for clarity) s - Tilt Relief Piston
h - Shock Return Valve t - Memory Piston
i-Up Circuit Suction Port u - Shock Piston
j - Oil Pump v - Impact Relief Valve
k - Down Circuit Suction Port w - Cylinder
I - Oil Fill Cap
Page 58-8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
Trim Up
When the trim switch is activated in the up position , the electric motor (c) begins to rotate
the oil pump gears (i), the oil pump draws a small amount of oil through the filter (g) and
through the up circuit suction port (i) . The oil pump gear (j) rotation forces oil into the pas-
sages for the up ci rcuit. Oil , under pressure, wi ll slide the shuttle valve (m) against the down
circuit pressure operated valve (t). The shuttle valve will mechanically open the down pres-
sure operated valve, allowing oil from the down cavity of the trim cylinder, to flow into the
oil pump. This returning oil , from the down cavity, will supply most of the oil required for the
up circuit. Oil in the up circuit is blocked from returning into the reservoir by the ball inside
the down circuit suction port (k). The pressure of the oil will force the up circuit pressure
operated valve (n) to open , allowing the oil to enter the passages inside the manifold (q)
leading to the trim cylinder (w) up cavity. Oil is blocked from all other passages by the closed
manual release valve (p) . Oil under pressure will enter the trim cylinder below the memory
piston (t). With an increasing amount of oil entering the cylinder, the memory piston contacts
the shock piston (u) and forces the piston rod (a) up and out, raising the outboard motor.
Oil on the top of the shock piston exits through a passage running down along the side of
the cylinder and enters the manifold passages. The oil is drawn back into the pump (j)
through the open down ci rcuit pressure operated valve (I) and enters the pump as supply
for the up circuit.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 58 -9

POWEATRIM
Tilt Circuit
o Reservoir Oil
o Filtered Feed Oil
o
•
RetumOil
Oi l Under Pressure

Up Pressure 880-1110 psi (30-60 hpj
t 625 psi (30-60 1220-1420 psi (75-125 hpj
2800 psi (75-t 25
minimun
'-""------'''''--~-----''''- Tilt Relief Pressure
250-400 psi (30-60 hpj
500-700 psi (40-60 hp Bigfoot)
540-990 psi (75-125 hpj
c - Electric Motor a - Manifold Reve rse Suction Valve
f - Down Circuit Pressure Operated Valve r • Tilt Relief Valve
9 - Fitter (2 shown for clarity) s - Tilt Relief Piston
I - Up Circuit Suction Port u - Shock Piston
j -Oil Pump v -Impact Relief Valve
I - Oil Fill Cap
Page 58 -10 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
Tilt Up
In the up mode, as the piston rod (a) extends from the cylinder (w), the memory piston (t)
clears or uncovers the pressure relief passage. Oil from the up cavity will enter this passage
and, if requi red, causes the tilt relief piston (s) to open the tilt pressure relief valve (r). This
valve lowers the amount of pressure available to lift the outboard motor. With the engine in
forward gear, and at high engine rpm , the oil pressure available will not be able to overcome
the propeller thrust , limiting the trim range to below the pressure relief orifice. When the en-
gine rpm's fall or if engine is not in forward gear, the oif pressure is available to extend the
piston rod (a) up into the tilt range.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 58- 11

POWER TRIM
Maximum Tilt
D ReselVoir Oil
D Filtered Feed Oi l
D
•
Return Oil
Oil Under Pressure
Impact Relief Pressure #22.

880-1110 psi (31)-60 hpj
1220-1420 psi (75-125 hp)
Up Pressure Tilt Relief Pressure

1625 psi (30-60 250-400 psi (31)-60 hpj
2800 psi (75-125 500-700 psi (40-60 hp Bigfoot)
minimum 540-990 psi (75-1 25 hpj

f - Down Circuit Pressure Operated Valve r - Tilt Rel ief Valve
I - Up Circuit Suction Port u - Shock Pi ston
i-Oil Pump v - Impact Relief Valve
I - Oil Fill Cap
Page 58-1 2 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
Maximum Tilt
With the piston rod at maximum travel , and due to no rod movement, the pressure inside
of the trim cylinder (w) will increase to the pressure required to move the tilt relief piston (s).
The tilt relief piston 's "pin" opens the tilt relief valve (r). Up pressure flows into the trim relief
passage, and returns back into the reservoir.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 58 -13

POWER TRIM
Down Circuit
D Reservoir Oi l
D Filtered Feed Oil
D
•
Return Oil
Oil Under Pressure

Impact Relief Pressure #2.2
880-1110 psi (30-60 hpj
1220-1 420 psi (75-125 hpj
Tilt Relief Pressure

Up Pressure
2SO-4OO psi (30-60 hpj
1625 psi (30-60 hpj
SOO-700 psi (40-60 hp Big100tj
2800 psi (75-125 hpj
540-990 psi (75-125 hpj
minimum

i- Up Circuit Suction Port u - Shock Piston
J - Oil Pump v - Impact Relief Valve
k - Down Circuit Suction Port w • Cylinder
I - Oil Fill Cap
Page 58-14 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
Down Mode
When the trim switch is activated in the down position, the electric motor (c) will rotate the
pump m in the opposite direction. With the oil pump gears rotating backwards, the flow of
oil is reversed . Oil is drawn through the filter (g) , through the down circuit suction port (k)
and into the oil pump (D. The pump forces pressurized oil into the down passages, oil will
slide the shuttle valve (m) into the up ci rcuit pressure operated valve (n). The shuttle valve
will mechanically open the up circuit pressure operated valve and allow oil , from the up cav-
ity of the trim cylinder (w) , to return into the oil pump. This returning oil, from the up cavity,
will supply the oil required for the down circuit. The oil is blocked from returning into the res-
ervoir by the ball (i) inside the up circuit suction port. Oil, under pressure, opens the down
ci rcuit pressure operated valve (1) and enters the down passages inside of the manifold (q).
The manifold passage connects into the trim cylinder passage leading to the top of the cylin-
der. The cavity, inside the cylinder, above the shock piston (u) is the down caVity. As the
down cavity fills with oil , the piston rod (a) retracts into the cylinder, lowe ring the outboard
motor. Oil from the up cavity exits the cylinder and is drawn back into the pump through the
open up circuit pressure operated valve (n). When the piston rod reached full travel , the oil
pressure in Side the down circuit will rise until the down pressure regulating valve (e) opens,
bypassing oil back into the reservoir. When the trim button is released , and the oil pump
stops supplying pressure, both of the pressure operated valves (1 & n) will close and; if open,
the down pressure relief valve (e) will close . The closed valves will lock the fluid on either
side of the shock piston (u) & memory piston (I) , holding the outboard motor in position.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 58-15

POWER TRIM
Shock Function ,=------,

U
o Reservoir Oil
o
•
Return Oil
Oil Under Pressure

880-1 11 0 psi (30-60 hpj
1220-1420 psi (75-125 hpj

Up Pressure 250-400 psi (30-60 hpj
1625 psi 500-700 psi (40-60 hp Bigfoot)
2800 psi (75- 125, hpj 540-990 psi (75-125 hpj
a • Piston Rod m - Shuttle Valve

c . Electric Motor o - Manifold Reverse Suction Valve
d • Reservoir Oil p - Manual Release Valve
e . Down Circuit Pressure Relief Valve q • Manifold
f - Down Circuit Pressure Operated Valve r • Tilt Relief Valve
9 • Filter (2 shown for clarity) s - Tilt Relief Piston
h - Shock Return Valve t • Memory Piston
i . Up Circuit Suction Port u • Shock Piston
i-Oil Pump v . Impact Relief Valve
k • Down Circuit Suction Port w • Cylinder
I - Oil Fill Cap
Page 5B- 16 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
Shock Function Up
Oil inside the down cavity is locked in a static position by the closed down ci rcuit pressure
operated valve (f). the manual release valve (p) and the manifold reverse suction valve (0).
If the outboard strikes an underwater object while in forward gear, the piston rod (a) will try
to rapidly extend from the cylinder (w) , the pressure increases inside the trim cylinder down
cavity and connecting passages. When the pressure increases to the level required, the im-
pact relief valves (v) , located inside the shock piston (u) , wi ll open and allow the fluid to pass
through the shock piston. As the fluid passes through the piston, the piston rod (a) will ex-
tend from the trim cylinder. The memory piston (t) is held in position by vacuum, created by
the oil in the up cavity being locked in a static position. Therefore; oil passing through the
shock piston is trapped between the memory piston (t) and shock piston (u).
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 58-17

POWEATAIM
Shock Function
e
D Reservoir O il
D
•
Return O il
Oi l Under Pressure

680-1110 psi (30-60 hpj
1220-1420 psi (75-125 hp\
~...i:::-::::::::::::::::2~ Tilt Relief Pressure

Up presSlJr;;-~ 250-400 psi (30-60 hpj
1625 psi (30-60 hpj 500-700 psi (40-60 hp Biglool)
2800 psi (75-125 hpj 540-990 psi (75-125 hpj
minimum

9 - Filter (2 shown lor clarity) s - Tilt Relief Piston
i- Up Circuit Suction Port u - Shock Piston
j - Oil Pump v - Impact Relief Valve
I - Oil Fill Cap
Page 58- 18 90-857046 AUGUST 1999

POWER TRIM
Shock Function Return

After the engine clears the under water object, the weight of the engine will increase the oil
pressure between the memory piston (t) and shock piston (u) to the level required to open
the shock return valve (h) , inside the shock piston, allowing the oil to bleed back through
the shock piston into the down cavity. If required, additional oil will enter the down cavity
through the manifold reverse suction valve (0). This will return the engine back against the
memory piston (I) and into Ihe original running position.
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 58-19

POWER TRIM
Manual Release
® b
Down
Pressure
525-880 psi
e
I o Reservoir Oil
o Return Oil
o Fillered Oil

880-1110 psi (30-60 hpj
1220-1420 psi (75-125 hpj

Up Pressure 250-400 p~ (30-60 hpj
1625 psi (30-60 hpj q 500-700 psi (40-60 hp Bigfool)
2800 psi (75-125 hpj 540-990 psi (75-125 hpj
minimum
f - Down Circuit Pressure Operated Valve r - lilt Relief Valve
i-Up Circuit Suction Port u - Shock Piston
j -Oil Pump v - Impact Relief Valve
I - Oil Fill Cap
Page 58-20 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
Manual Tilt
To manually tilt the outboard engine, the owner will need to back out the manual release
valve (p) 3-4 turns . With the valve backed out, the internal passages inside the manifold are
connected together. These passages connect both the cylinder down and up cavities to-
gether, along with the reservoir, allowing the engine to be raised or lowered. Piston rod (a)
movement will continue until the manual release valve (p) is closed , locking the fluid inside
of the cylinder and manifold.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 58·21

POWER TRIM
Troubleshooting
Support outboard with ti lt lock pin when servicing power trim system.
IMPORTANT: After debris or failed components have been found (during trouble-
shooting procedure), it is recommended that unit be disassembled completely and
ALL O-rings be replaced. Check ball valve components and castings must be
cleaned using engine cleaner and compressed air or replaced prior to re-assembly.
IMPORTANT: Power trim system is pressurized. Outboard must be in the full " UP"
position (trim rod fully extended) prior to filVdrain plug, or manual release valve
removal.
Refer to instructions following if disassembly is required when servicing .
Follow preliminary checks before proceeding to troubleshooting flow diagrams (following).
Preliminary Checks
IMPORTANT: Operate Power Trim system after each check to see If problem has been
corrected. If problem has not been corrected proceed to next check.
1. Check that manual release valve is tightened to full right (clockwise) position.
2. Check tri m pump fluid level with outboard in full "upnposition and fill if necessary. Refer
to "Bleedi ng Power Trim Unit".
3. Check for external leaks in Power Trim system. Replace defective part(s) if leak is found.
4. Outboard not holding titted position (falls down to trim position) indicates debris or defec-
tive components in trim assembly. Clean or replace components as requi red .
Page 56-22 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting Flow Chart
OUTBOARD WILL NOT HOLD TILTED

POSITION DURING REVERSE ANDIOR
TRAILS OUT DURING HIGH SPEED
DECELERATION.
Manual release Manual release valve and

Inspect manual release valve.
valve and O-ring O·rings appear 10 be O.K .•
damaged. Clean and reinstall manual
release valve.
Trim will not hold

Replace manual reo reverse thrust. Trim system hold s re-
lease valve and O-rings. verse thrust. Testing
complele.
Trim system holds re- Remove and inspect pis-

verse thrust. Testing ton rod assembly for de- Shock piston appears
~
comnlele. bri s and/or shock ball O.K. - Clean and reinstall

hang up. piston rod assembly.
Debris and/or shock
bali hang up identi-
fied .
Trim will not hold
reverse thrust. Trim system holds re-
verse thrust. Testing
comnlele.
Replace piston
rod assembly.
Remove PO check valve
assembly, inspect O-rings
and seals for damage.
Trim system holds re-
verse thrust. Testing
comolele.
Debris and/or dam- PO check valve appears

age identified. O.K. - Clean and reinstall
PO check valve assem-
bly.
Replace PO check
valve assembly.
1
Trim system holds
reverse thrust. Test-
inQ complele.
I
,
Trim will not hold
reverse thrust.
Trim system holds re-
~efse thrust. Testing
comelete.
continued on next pa ge
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5B-23

pOWERmlM

continued
Remove suction seat as·

sembly and inspect for
debris andlor damage.
Debris and/or damage

identified.
I I Suction seat assembly
appears O.K. - Clean and
reinstall suction seat
assembly.
Replace suction seat

assembly. Trim will not hold
reverse thrust. Trim system holds
ina comelete.
Trim system holds

ina comelete. Replace trim system.
Page 58· 24 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
TRIM SYSTEM LEAKS DOWN

WITH MANUAL RELEASE VALVE
CLOSED.
Manual release valve Inspect manual release valve. Manual re lease valve and 0-
and O-ring damaged. f- rings appear to be O.K. - Clean
and reinstall manual release
valve.
Replace manual reo Trim system leaks

lease valve and down.
Trim system does
O-rings. not leak down. Test-
ing complete.
+
Trim system does
Remove tilt relief valving
and inspect O-rings and
not leak down. Test- seals for debris and/or
ina comolete. damaoe.
Tilt relief valving and O-rings

Debris and/or dam-
appear to be O.K .• Clean and
age identified.
reinstall tilt relief valving.
Trim system leaks Trim system does

Replace tilt relief valving .
down. not leak down. Test-
ing complete.
+
Trim system does Remove PO check valve
not leak down. Test- assembly, inspect O·
ina comolete. rings and seals for dam-
age.
+ 1
Replace PO check
, Debris and/or dam-
age identified.
PO check valve appears
O.K. - Clean and rei nstall
,
PO check valve assem-
bly.
.
,
valve assembly.
h Trim system leaks down. Trim system does
not leak down.
Trim system does

not leak down. Test-
ina comelete.
,I
continued on next page
Testi na complete.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 58-25

POWER TRIM

continued
•
Inspect memory pis·
ton Q·ring and cylinder
bore.
Cylinder bore appears I I Cylinder bore appears
rough and/or debris
smooth with no debris.
found in cylinder.
Replace memory pis·

ton and shock piston Trim leaks down.
Q·rings.
+
Trim system does
not leak down. Test·
inQ complete. Replace trim system.
Page 58·26 go·657046 AUGUST 1996

POWER TRIM
Troubleshooting the Power Trim Electrical System
(a;;"-~,'l- <
. ,
,I I,
, ,
®-----.~ : BLQIWHT
, ,
- - - ,, : GRN/WH'T
, , '
BLUIWHT or PUR ~'>----------+-~-
L _GRN/WHTO"'~G~R~N=~~=====::=======~--:~
_ REO . ~
: »
~ . REO/PU~' ~~/~UR' ,
~
,
,
:EO
+
m RE ' Y. _,--
'.I:\_~--
f
e Solenoid GRN/WH
BLUIWHT
LT. GRNlWH,,\
LT.GRN/WHk
T. ,
,
~
", '
4 .
h
a ~ Trim Switch (Remote Control Mounted) 9 - Down Relay

b - Trim Switch (Panel Mounted) h - Up Relay
c ~ Fuse Holder i-Solenoid
d • Remote Control Wiring Plug Connector i-Trim Pump Motor
e - Battery k - Cowl Switch
, - Starter Bolt
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 58-27

POWER TRIM
Troubleshooting the Power Trim Electrical System

Refer to wiring diagram on preceding page for location of wire connections.
Problem Possible Cause Remedy
Trim Switch ~ UP" is inopera- 1. Open wire between Wire Connection (1) 1. Check for an open connection or cut
tive, but the Cowl Switch and Trim Switch. wire.
~ UpH does operate. 2. Faulty Trim Switch. 2. Replace.
Cowl Switch "UP" is inopera- 1. Open wire between Wire Connection (2) 1. Check for an open connection or cut
tive, but the Trim Switch "UP" and Solenoid. wire.
does operate. 2. Faulty Cowl Switch. 2. Replace.
Trim Switch "UP" and Cowl 1. Open wire between Wire Connection (1) 1. Check for an open connection .
Switch "UP" are both inop- and the "Up" Relay.
erative. 2. Open BlK wire between ground and 2. Check for an open connection .
"UP" Relay.
3. Open RED wire between Solenoid and 3. Check for an open connection.
"UP" Relay.
4. Faulty "UP" Relay. 4. Replace.
Trim Switch "DOWN" is inop- 1. Open wire between Wire Connection (3) 1 . Check for an open connection or cut
erative, but the Cowl Switch and Trim Switch. wire.
"DOWW does operate. 2. Faulty Trim Switch. 2. Replace.
Cowl Switch "DOWN" is inop- 1. Open wi re between Wire Connection (2) 1 . Check for a open connection or cut
erative , but the Trim Switch and Solenoid. wire.
"DOWN ~ does operate . 2. Faulty Cowl Switch . 2. Replace
Trim Switch "DOWW and 1. Open wire between Wire Connection (3) 1. Check for an open connection.
Cowl Switch "DOWN" are and the "UP" Relay.
both inoperative. 2. Open BlK wire between ground and 2. Check for an open connection .
"DOWN" Relay.
3. Open RED wire between Solenoid and 3. Check for an open connection .
n
"DOWN Relay.
4. Faulty "DOWN" Relay 4. Replace.
Trim Switch "UP" and 1. 20 AMP Fuse blown. 1. Replace fuse. l ocate the cause of
"DOWW are both inopera- the blown fuse. Check electrical wiring
tive, but the Cowl Switch for a shorted circuit.
does operate. 2. Faulty trim switch . 2. Replace.
3. Wire is open between fu se holder and 3. Check for a open connection or cuI
solenoid. wire.
4. Wire is open between fuse holder and 4. Check for a loose or corroded can-
trim switch . nection.
Trim Switch and Cowl Switch 1. One of the Trim Pump Molar wires is 1. Check wire connections (4) for loose
are both inoperative. open between the motor and the Relays. or corroded condition .
2. Faulty trim pump motor. 2. If voltage is present at connections
(4) when the appropriate trim button is
pressed, then motor is faulty. Replace
motor.
Trim system operates (motor 1. The Trim or Cowl switch is shorted. 1. Replace .
runs) without pressing the
switches.
90·857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
Power Trim System Removal

1. Tilt outboard to the full up position and support with tilt lock pin.
2. Disconnect the power trim wire harness and remove clamp.
55454
a • Tilt Lock Pin

b - Power Trim Wire Harness Clamp
c - Harness
3. Remove the trilobe pin.

4. Drive out the upper pivot pin.
5. Remove the sacrificial anode.
o
o
o
~
o o
o
o o
<D
<D
<D
<D
<D o
c o
55331
a - Trilobe Pin
b - Upper Pivot Pin
c - Sacrificial Anode
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 58-29

POWEATAIM
6. Use suitable punch to remove (Drive Down) lower pin. Retain dowel pin.
7. Use suitable punch to drive out lower pivot pin.
L
51144
51144
a • Dowel Pin
b • Lower Pivot Pin
Power Trim Disassembly

IMPORTANT: Power trim system is pressurized. Trim rod must be in the full " UP"
position (fully extended) prior to fill/drain plug, or manual release valve removal.
1. Remove reservoir cap.
2. Remove manual release valve assembly to drain oil.
a - Reservoir Cap
b - Manual Release Valve
Page 56-30 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
Trim Motor Removal

1. Secure power trim assembly in a soft jaw vise.
2. Remove four (4) screws to remove motor/reservoir. Remove reservoir seal and coupler.
a - Screw (4)
b - Reservoir
c - Reservoir Seal
d - Coupler
e - Manifold Assembly
Pump and Components Removal
1. Remove pressure operated plugs on pump. Remove spring and check valve/poppet
(both sides). Use special tool CG 41-11 and special tool CG 41-14 with 5/16" end to re-
move spool.
a - Plug (2)
b - Spring (2)
c - Check Valve/Poppet (2)
d - Seat (2)
e - Spool
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5B-31

POWER TRIM
IMPORTANT: Inspect poppet assembly for debris in the area shown. If debris Is found
on poppet replace poppet.
2. Remove three (3) screws to remove pump. Remove filter and filter seal under pump.
Remove suction seat assembly.
a - Debris Under Valve Tip

b - Rubber Seat
c - Screws (3)
d - Filter Seal
e - Filter
f - Suction Seat Assembly
Manifold Removal
1. Remove two (2) screws to remove manifold from cylinder.
2. Remove tilt relief components .
.,
6>
.. ..
0
0
0 o
0
SO
10 a
~ .. @
5 11 46 5100B
a - Screw (2)
b - Spring
c - Poppet
d - Spool Housing
e - Tri m Limit Spool
Page 58-32 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
Shock Rod Removal

1. Unscrew end cap assembly from cylinder using spanner wrench [1/4 in. x 5116 in.
(6.4mm x Bmm) long pegsl.
2. Remove shock rod assembly from cylinder.
Shock Rod Disassembly

NOTE: The only serviceable items on the shock rod assembly are the O-rings and wiper
ring. If shock rod requires any other repair, rep/ace shock rod assembly.
a - End Cap
b - O-ring (2)
c - Wiper Ring
1. Place shock rod assembly on clean work surface.

2. Remove three (3) screws and remove plate from shock rod piston.
51143
a - Screw (3)
b - Plate
e - Shock Rod Piston
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 56-33

POWER TRIM
3. Remove check ball components from shock rod piston.

4. Remove o-ring from shock rod piston.
a - Spring (5)
b - Seat (5)
c - Ball (5)
d - O-ring
ACAUTION
When removing shock piston, spanner wrench must have 1/4 in. x 5116 in. long pegs
to avoid damage to shock piston.
5. Place shock rod into soft jawed vise and apply heat to loosen piston using torch lamp
(PIN 91-63209).
6. Loosen shock rod piston using spanner wrench [1/4 in. x 5/ 16 in. (6.4mm x 8mm) long
pegs).
7. Allow shock rod piston to cool . Remove from shock rod .
51146
5 1146
a - Spanner Wrench
b - Shock Rod Piston
Page 58-34 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
8. Inspect check valve for debris; clean debris from check valve if found. If debris cannot
be cleaned from check valve , replace shock piston as an assembly.
9. Clean shock and components with compressed air.
10. Remove inner a-ring from shock rod piston.
a
51199
a - Shock Pi ston
b - O-ring
11 . Remove cylinder end cap assembly from shock rod.

12. Inspect shock. If wiper (located in cap) has failed to keep rod clean , replace wiper.
13. Place end cap on clean work surface.
14. Remove rod wiper, inner a-ring, and outer a-ring.
51145
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner O-ring
c - Outer D-ring
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 58-35

PQWERTRIM
Memory Piston Removal

1. Remove memory piston from cylinder using one of two methods:
a. Using lock ring pliers (PIN 91-822778A3) or suitable tool.
1- - -
I
I
I
51144
b. Blowing compressed air into manual release valve hole using air nozzle.
NOTE: Point cylinder opening down and away. Use a shop rag or towel to avoid damage
to the memory piston.
2. Remove o-ring from memory piston.
51144
55466
a - Adaptor!Air Hose
b - Memory Piston Exit
c - Shop Rag
d - D-Ring
e - Memory Piston
Page 58-36 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
IMPORTANT: Components must be dirt and lint free. Slightest amount of debris in
Power Trim system could cause system to malfunction.
Clean shock rod and components with parts cleaner and dry with compressed ai r.
It is recommended that all O-rings in trim system be replaced. Use O-Ring Kit 25-809880A 1.
Lubricate ali o-rings with Quicksilver Power Trim Fluid (92-901OOA 12). If not available, use
automotive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid .
Trim Motor Electrical Tests
1. Connect a 12 volt supply to motor leads. If motor fails to run, replace pump motor.
IMPORTANT: Trim Motor is not serviceable. If motor fails to run, replace motor assem-
bly.
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 58·37

POWER TRIM
Reassembly
O-Ring and Seal Placement
O-Rings and Seals are part of O-Ring Kit 25-809880A 1
..-- @-{i)
....""""" 0-0
U'!I-- O -®
I ~~
/// ~
//, ;<2'. . .r--@
~ ~\ +·.... i~ ~
. ,,~.,'® @ ® ~~
~~'-® ® .o ~ @
eJ
Page 58-36 90-857046 AUGUST 1998
POWERmlM
O-ring Sizes
~@
-~ ...
Cutaway View of O-Ring
__ I I: idth
O.D.
a-RINGS SllaWN A REACTUAL

90-857046 ..."'..JST 1998
o:t1Z"r
POWER TRIM
O-ring Description and Sizes
v ~ ,,~ 1.0. 0 .0 . I O-Ring Width

I
~ ..: ; ..
(3.5:~
1 i
2 I Cyl. Cap. Inner 0.671 in. (17.04 mm) 0.949 in. (24.10 mm) 0.139 in.
3 ICyl. Cap 1.864 in. (47.34 mm) 2.004 in. (50.90 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
4 i ". 1.6 in. (40.64 mm) 2.02 in. (53.086 mm) 0.21 in. (5.334 mm)
5 I Boll 0.676 in. (17. 17 mm) .816 in. (20.726 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
6 '000' ,vi. Plug 0.549 in. (13.94 mm) 0.755 in. (19. 17 mm) 0.103 in. (2.616 m~
in~
7 Motor Seal
8 (2) P.O. Check Plug 0.489 in. (12.42 mm) 0.629 in. (15.97 mm) I 0.07
9 (3) Poppel Assy. .''''.. ~ :" Tf: oc-,. "n
10 (2) P.O. Check Seat 0.364 in. (9.25 mm) 0.504 in. (12.80 mm) 10.07 in. (1.78 mm)
11 (2) Pump Port 0.145 in. (3.683 mm) 0.285 in. (7.239 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
12 Suction Seat 0.239 in. (6.07 mm) 0.379 in. (9.626 mm) 10.07 in. (1. 78 mm)
13 Filter Seal
FiiiOr -iff .;\'.
~ I I 0.114 in. (2.90 mm) 0.254 in. (6. 451 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
11&
17
Manual Release
Manual Release
0.176 in. (4.47 mm)
0.239 in. (6.07 mm)
0.316 in. (8.026 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
0.379 in. (9.626 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
18 Spool 0.239 in. (6.07 mm) 0.379 in. (9.626 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
Spool i 0.301 in. (7.645 mm) 0.441 in. (11 .20 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
119~
Trim Limit Spool 10.114 in. . mm) 0.254 in. (6.451 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
21 (2) 10.208 inTs2a3 mm) 0.348 in. (8.839 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
22 :pj$tOn" 11.6 in. mm) 2.02 in. (53.086 mrnl, 10.21 in. (5.334 mm)
Page 58·40 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

PQWERTRIM
Power Trim Reassembly

IMPORTANT: Lubricate all o-rings with Quicksilver Power Trim Fluid (92-90100A 12).
If not available, use automotive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid.
Shock Rod Reassembly
1. Install lubricated a-rings to end cap.
2. Install rod wiper.
3. Install lubricated a-rings to shock piston.
a - Rod Wiper
b • Inner O-ring
c - Outer O-ring
d - Shock Piston
e - O-ring
f • O-ring
4. Clamp shock rod in soft jawed vise.
5. Position cylinder end cap onto rod as shown.
51146
ACAUTION
When installing shock rod piston, spanner wrench must have 114 in. x 5/16 in.
(6.4mm x Smm) long pegs to avoid damage to shock rod piston.
6. Apply Loctite Grade "A" (271) to threads on shock rod .
7. Install shock rod piston.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 58-41

POWER TRIM
8. Tighten shock rod piston securely using span ner wrench (1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long pegs).
If a torquing type spanner tool is used to tighten shock piston, then torque to 90 Ib-ft
(122 Nm).
511 46
a - Shock Rod Piston - Torque to 90 Ib-ft (122 Nm)

b - Spanner Wrench
9. Remove shock rod assembly from vise.

10. Install ball, seat, and spring (five sets) to shock rod piston.
11 . Secure components with plate. Torque sc rews to 35Ib-in. (4.0 Nm).
a - Screw (3) Torque to 35 Ib-in. (4.0 Nm)

b - Plate
e - Sp ring (5)
d - Seat (5)
e - Ball (5)
Page 58-42 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
Shock Rod Installation

1. Place trim cylinder in soft jawed vice.
2. Install lubricated a-ring to memory piston and place into cylinder. Push memory piston
all the way to bottom.
3. Fill cylinder three inches (76.2 mm) from top of cylinder using Quicksilver Power Trim
and Steering Fluid. If not available , use automotive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid.
4. Install shock rod into cylinder until power trim fluid flows through oil blow off ball passage.
Fill remaining cylinder to just below the cylinder threads.
a - Memory Piston
b - a-ring
c - Oil Blow Off Ball Passage
ACAUTION
End cap must not make contact with shock rod piston when tightening. Shock rod
piston must be positioned in cylinder deep enough to avoid contact.
5. Tighten end cap securely using spanner wrench [1/4 in. x 5/16 in. (6.4mm x 8mm) long
pegs]. If a torquing type spanner tool is used to tighten end cap, then torque to 451b-ft
(61.0 Nm).
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 58·43

POWER TRIM
Trim Limit Assembly Installation

1. Lubricate all O-rings. Install spring, poppet, spool housing and trim limit spool into man-
ifold.
NOTE: There are three different size springs used in this manifold. The heavy spring is used
on 75- 125 hp outboards. The medium spring is used on 40-60 hp Bigfoot outboards. The
..
light spring is used on 30-60 hp outboards.
..
e 0
o
o o
o
e O e
Qo oeooJ
I
5 1008
a - Spring
b - Poppet
c - Spool Housing
d - Trim Limit Spool
Manual Release Valve Installation

1. Install M
E" clip (if removed) and lubricate o-rings to manual release valve.
2. Install manual release valve assembly into manifold.
a - Manifold
b • Manual Release Valve
c-E Clip
90-857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
Manifold Installation
1. Install dowel pin and two (2) lubricated o·rings into trim cylinder.
II,, ,, II
""
II,, ,, II, '
,'
a - O-Ring (2)
b - Dowel Pin
2. Align the trim cylinder and pump/reservoir assembly together.

3. In stall the two (2) long screws and torque to 100 Ib-in. (11 Nm) .
~I
- b
5 1146
a - Trim Cylinder Assembly

b - Reservoir/Manifold Assembly
c - Screw (2) Torque to 100 Ib-in. (11 Nm)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 58-45

POWER TRIM
Oil Pump Installation

1. Install spring, ball, lubricated o-ring and plastic seat to manifold.
2. Check to see that o-rings are placed on bottom of pump.
3. Install filter and filter seal under pump. Install pump onto manifold. Torque screws to 70
Ib-in. (7.7 Nm).
i.. ®

b • Suction Seat Assembly
Pressure Operated Assembly Installation

IMPORTANT: Inspect poppet assembly for debris in the area shown. If debris is found
on poppet, replace poppet.
a • Oebris Under Valve Tip

b - Rubber Seat
1. Lubricate o-rings.
Page 58-46 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
2. Install spool, seat with o-ring, check valve/poppet, spring and plug with o-ring into pump.
Repeat for other side. Torque plugs to 120 Ib-in. (13.5 Nm) .
• - Plug (2) Torque to 120 Ib-in. (13.5 Nm)

b • Spring (2)
c • Check Valve/Poppet (2)
d • Seat (2)
e • Spool
Reservoir/Motor Installation
1. Install coupler into top of pump. Make sure reservoir seal is in the reservoi r groove and
place reservoir onto pump/manifold assembly. Install ground strap under screw shown
Torque screws to 80 Ib·in. (9 Nm).
a • Screw (4) Torque to 80 Ib·in. (9 Nm)

b - Reservoir
c - Reservoir Seal
d • Coupler
e - Manifold Assembly
f - Ground Strap
2. Fill reservoir to bottom of fill hole using Quicksilver Power Trim Fluid (92-901 OOA 12). If
not available, use automotive (ATF) automatic transmission ftuid.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 58-47

POWER TRIM
Bleeding Power Trim Unit

1. Secure power trim unit in soft jawed vise.
2. Add power trim fluid until it's even with the bottom of the fill hole. Reinstall plug.
3. Close the manual release valve. (Turn full clockwise).
a - Reservoi r Plug/Fill Hole

b - Manual Release Valve
4. Using a 12 volt power supply, connect the positive lead to (blue) trim motor wire and neg-
ative lead to (green) trim motor wire and drive shock rod to the up position. Repeat three
times.
5. Connect the positive lead to the (green) trim motor wi re, and the negative lead to the
(blue) trim motor wire and drive the shock rod to the down position.
6. Recheck fluid level, add fluid if required and repeat cycle until fluid level stays even with
the bottom of the fill hole.
Installation of Power Trim System

1. Lubricate lower pivot pin , mounting holes with 2-4-C Marine Lubricant.
2. Start lower pivot pin into pivot pin bore and position lower dowel pin (retained) in its re-
spective hole.
51148
[}D:P 2-4-C wfTefion (92-850736A 1)

a - Lower Pivot Pin
b - Lower Dowel Pin
Page 58-48 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
3. Position trim cylinder assembly (bottom first) between clamp brackets.

4. Apply 2-4-C Marine Lubricant to lower pivot pin. Using a suitable punch , drive lower piv-
ot pin into clamp bracket and trim cylinder assembly until pivot pin is flush with outside
surface.
o
o
a
55467
~ 2-4-C wfTefion (92-850736A 1)

a • Trim Cylinder Assembly
b - Lower Pivot Pin
5. Using a suitable punch , drive lower dowel pin into its hole until seated .
6. Apply 2-4-C Marine Lubricant to surface of upper pivot pin , pivot pin bore and trim ram
bore.
-
51148
~ 2-4-C wfTeflon (92-850736A 1)

a • Lower Dowel Pin
b • Pivot Pin
c • Pivot Pin Bore
d • Trim Ram Bore
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 58·49

POWER TRIM
7. Using a suitable mallet, drive upper pivot pin into swivel bracket and through trim ram
until pivot pin is flush with swivel bracket.
8. Drive pivot pin into its hole until seated.
55464
a - Pivot Pin
b - Swivel Bracket
c - Trim Ram
d - Trilobe Pin
9. Install sacrificial aluminum anode to reservoir bracket placing ground strap between
bracket and anode, as shown.
10. Route trim harness through clamp bracket and cowling .
a - Sacrificial Anode
b - Ground Strap
c - Bracket
d - Trim Harness
Page 5&50 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

POWER TRIM
11. Secure trim harness with clamp, as shown.
\~I
a - Clamp
11 55264
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 56-51

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
MID·SECTION
Section 5C - Manual Tilt Assist
Table of Contents
Special Tools ...................... . ... . 5C-l Memory Piston Removal ....... . . . .... SC-24
Manual Tilt Components .........•.. . .... 5C-2 Valve Block Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5C·26
Manual Trim Flow Diagrams ...... .. . . ... . 5C-4 Reassembly· a-Ring and Seal Placement . SC-27
Up Circuit . .. . .. . .. . ... ....... . . . . .. . 5C-4 Actual a -Ring Sizes . . . . . ........ 5C-28
Down Circuit .. . . ...... .. . . . . ...... . . . 5C-6 a-ring Description and Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5C-29
Slow Tilt Down Under High Th rust .... . . 5C-8 Manual Tilt System Cleaning and Inspection 5C-29
Under Water Strike (Valves Open) ..... . 5C-l0 Manual Tilt System Reassembly .. .. . . .... 5C-29
I
Shock Function (Valve Closed) .... ... . . 5C-12 Valve Block Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5C-32
Shock Function Return . . ............. . 5C-14 Shock Rod Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5C·33
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting . . ...... . 5C-16 Shock Rod Installation and Fluid
Manual Tilt System Removal . ..... . .. ... . . 5C-18 Filling Procedure ................ . .... 5C·35
Manual Tilt System Disassembly ..... . ... . 5C-19 Filling Procedure Option Two Instructions
Accumulator Removal . .. . ........ . . . . . 5C-20 for Making Retaining Tool .... . .. . .. . ..... 5C-37
Shock Rod Removal ......... . ... . . . . . 5C-2l Bleeding Manual Tilt System . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5C·38
Shock Rod Disassembly .. ..... • .... • ... . 5C-2l Manual Tilt System Installation ... .. ....... 5C-40
Valve Block Removal . ... . ..•......... 5C-24 Manual Release Valve Adjustment. . . . . . SC-42
Special Tools
1. Spanner Wrench PIN 91-74951
:
2. Lock-Ring Pliers PIN 9l-822778A3
3. Heat Lamp PIN 91-63209
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5C-1

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Manual Tilt Components
~
r I
............. -@~
CD ® \
~
0-
u::::L:D> Loclil.271 (92-809819)

~ 2-4-C Wilh Teflon (92-850736A 1)
NOTE: Lubricate alf O·rings using Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid. If not avail·
NOTE: It ;s recommended that alf o·rings be replaced when setvicing tilt system.
Page 5C-2 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL nLT ASSIST
Manual Tilt Components

TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION Ib-in . Ib-It Nm
1 SHOCK ROD ASSEMBLY 45 61
1 --
1 SHOCK ROD ASSEMBLY (BEACHING)
2 1 MEMORY PISTON ASSEMBLY
3 1 o RING REBU ILD KIT-Cylinder
4 2 o RING
5 1 CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
--
6 1 SCREW AND SEAL KIT
7 1 ACCUMULATOR ASSEMBLY 35 47
8 1 VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY
~
9 1 CAM KIT
10 1 VELOCITY VALVE KIT 75 6.2 8.5
~
11 1 CHECK SYSTEM REPAIR KIT 75 6.2 8.5

--
- 1 o RING KIT
--
12 2 PIN
13 2 GROOVE PIN
® - Torque cylinder cap 10 45 Ib-It (61 Nm)

@- Torque Accumulator to 35 Ib-It (47 Nm)
@- Torque Velocity Valve to 75 Ib-in. (8.5 Nm)
@- Torque Transfer Valve Plug to 75 Ib-i n. (8.5 Nm)
® - Torque Screw to 100 Ib-in. (11 Nm)

CD - Torque Shock Piston to 90 Ib-It (122 Nm)
90-857046 AUGUST 199B Page 5C-3

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Manual Trim Flow Diagrams

Up Circuit
a - Shock Rod i -Down Circuit Slow Transfer Valve

b - End Cap i-Up Circuit Fast Transfer Valve
c - Accumulator k - Surge Valve
d - Accumulator Piston I - Cylinder
e - Accumulator Check Valve m - Memory Piston
f - Camshaft Lever n - Shock Piston
9 - Manifold o • Shock Return Valve
h - Down Ci rcuit Fast Transfer Valve p - Impact Relief Valve
Page 5C-4 go-857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Up Circuit
With the engine in the down position, the accumulator piston (d) will be atthe top of the accu-
mulator (c) with the gas at maximum pressure . To raise the engine, the camshaft lever (f)
is rotated all the way down. The internal shaft connected to the camshaft lever will move the
push rods, opening the accumulator check valve (e), both fast transfer valves (h & j) and
the down circuit slow transfer valve (i) . As the operator lifts the engine, oil , under pressure
inside the accumulator, will flow around both the slow transfer valve (i) and the down circuit
fast transfer valve (h). Oil flows into the bottom of the tilt cylinder forcing the memory piston
(m) into the shock piston (n) and then forcing the shock rod up and out. Oil above the shock
piston exits the cylinder (I) through an interconnecting passage along side of the cylinder
and returns into the manifold (g). Inside the man ifold the oil flows past the groove in the
surge valve (k) , through the up circuit fast transfer valve (j) and mixes with the oil flowing
from the accumulator into the up cavity. With the engine in the correct position , the camshaft
lever (f) is rotated up and the push rods allow the check valves (e, h, i, & j) to close. The
closed check valves prevent the oil from traveling between cavities and locks the engine into
position.
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page sc·s

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Down Circuit
a - Shock Rod i-Down Circuit Slow Transfer Valve

b - End Cap j - Up Circuit Fast Transfer Valve
9 - Manifold o - Shock Return Valve
h - Down Circuit Fast Transfer Valve p - Impact Relief Valve
Page 5C-6 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Down Circuit
With the engine tilted up, the piston inside the accumulator piston (d) will be at the bottom
of the accumulator (c) and the gas pressure is low. To lower the engine, the camshaft lever
(f) is rotated down, the internal cam will cause the push rods to open the accumulator check
valve (e), both fast transfer valves (h & j) and the down circuit slow transfer valve (i) . The
operator will have to press down on the engine cowl to overcome the pressure inside cylin-
der. Fluid will flow out of the bottom of the cylinder, past both the down circuit fast transfer
valve (h) and down circuit slow transfer valve (i). Fluid will flow past the up circuit fast transfer
valve 0) , surge valve (k) and through the interconnecting passage into the top of the cylinder
(I). Due to the shock rod (a). the tilt cylinder cavities differ in volume . the extra fluid from the
up cavity [forced into the accumulator (c)] will cause the internal accumulator piston (d) to
compress the gas. With the engine in the correct position. the camshaft lever is rotated up
and the push rods allow the check valves (e , h, i, & j) to close.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5C·7

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Slow Tilt Down Under High Thrust
• - Shock Rod I - Down Circuit Slow Transfer Valve

Page 5C-8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL TILT ASSI ST
Slow Tilt Down Under High Thrust

To tilt the engine down under high thrust conditions [where the propeller thrust forces the
shock rod down, creating higher pressure below the memory piston (mH, the camshaft lever
(1) is rotated slightly downward. The internal shaft connected to the lever will open the down
circuit slow transfer valve (i) allowing oil under pressure into the cavity around the shaft. The
higher oil pressure will open the up circuit fast transfer valve (j) allowing oil from the bottom
of the cylinder to flow above the shock piston (n) while lowering the engine. Additional oil
will flow into the accumulator (c) as the internal pressure forces the accumulator check valve
(e) to open . Oil flowing into the accumulator moves the accumulator piston (d) and compres-
ses the gas.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5C-9

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Under Water Strike (Valves Open)
a - Shock Rod i-Down Circuit Slow Transfer Valve

Page 5C· 10 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Under Water Strike (Valves Open)

Should the drive unit strike a submerged object while in forward motion, the shock rod (a)
will extend from the tilt cylinder (I). Fluid will attempt to exit the cylinder through the intercon-
necting passage. The rapid fluid flow will increase the pressure below the surge valve (k),
causing the valve to move, closing the oil return passage back into the accumulator (c). Oil
inside the up cavity is locked in a static position by the closed surge valve . As the shock rod
extends outward, the pressure inside the up cavity will reach sufficient pressure to open the
shock valve (p) which opens at 880-1110 PSI. Oil will flow into the cavity created as the
shock rod & shock piston (a & n) moves away from the memory piston (m) .
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5C-11

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Shock Function (Valve Closed)
Accum ulator
Gas Pressure
400 PSI
a - Shock Rod I - Down Circuit Slow Transfer Valve

1 - Camshaft Lever n - Shock Piston
Page 5C-12 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Shock Function (Valves Closed)

Should the drive unit strike a submerged object while in forward motion, the shock rod (a)
will extend from the cylinder (I). Oil inside the up cavity is locked in a static position by the
closed up ci rcuit fast transfer valve G) , the closed down circuit slow transfer valve (i) and
closed down circuit fast transfer valve (h). Fluid wi ll attempt to exit the cylinder through the
interconnecting passage back into the accumulator (c). The closed up circuit fast transfer
m
valve will prevent the fluid return. As th e shock rod extends outward, the pressure inside
the up cavity wi ll reach sufficient pressure to open the shock valve (p) which opens at
880-1110 PSI. Oil will flow into the cavity created as the shock rod & shock piston (n) moves
away from the memory piston (m).
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5C- 13

MANUAL TI LT A SSIST
.. CD
a- Shock Rod i-Down Circuit Slow Transfer Valve

b- End Cap j - Up Circuit Fast Transfer Valve
c• Accumulator k - Surge Valve
d- Accumulator Piston I - Cylinder
e- Accumulator Check Valve m - Memory Piston
t - Camshaft Lever n - Shock Piston
Page 5C- 14 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL TILT A SSIST

After the drive clears the object, the shock return valve (0) will allow the oil to flow from be-
tween the shock piston (n) and memory piston (m) onto the down cavity as the drive returns
to its original running position.
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5C·15

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting

Refer to disassembly/reassembly instructions (following) if disassembly is required when
servicing.
IMPORTANT: After debris or failed components have been found (during trouble-
shooting procedure), it is recommended that unit be disassembled completely and
all o-rings be replaced. Check ball components and castings must be cleaned using
engine cleaner and compressed air or replaced prior to reassembly.
Support outboard with tilt lock lever when servicing manual tilt system.
1. Check manual release cam adjustment. Cam must open and close freely. Adjust cam
link rod as necessary.
51143
a - Link Rod
b - Manual Release Lever
c - Accumulator
Page SC-16 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
2. Check for external leaks in the manual tilt system. Replace defective part(s) if leak is
found .
IMPORTANT: If cut or damaged o-rings are found, inspect machined surfaces for
scoring, burrs or debris.
3. Check for discharged accumulator. 35 to 50 Ib-ft (47-68 Nm) of pulling force must be at-
tained when tilting outboard from full "down" to full "up" position. If more than 50 Ib-ft (68
Nm) of force is required, replace accumulator.
50431
a - Weight Scale
b - Valve Lever (open position)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5C·17

MANUAL TilT ASSIST
Manual Tilt System Removal

A CAUTION
Remove cowling and remove all spark plug leads from spark plugs to prevent acci-
dental starting while servicing outboard.
S.,rvi,'. or i system may result of pressure in the shock

cylinder. If the outboard is not in the full down position, such loss of pressure will
cause the engine to fall to the full down position with a potential for damaging en-
gine or causing personal injury. To avoid such Injury support outboard in the up po-
sition tilt lock lever.
1. Support outboard in the up position using tilt lock lever.

2. Remove link rod.
3. Position piece of wood under transom bracket instead of tilt lock for access of removing
pin. Use suitable punch to remove (DRIVE DOWN) upper dowel pin. Retain dowel pin.
(a)..@ Q'
(" r:: -.
Ij)
1"-'; ~
~
"=""
'~ ~ -
~ "'
a - Link Rod
IT 51143
b - Accu mulator
c -Dowel Pin
d -Wood
Page 5C-18 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
4. Position tilt lock and remove piece of wood. Use suitable punch to drive out upper pivot
pin .
S. Use punch to remove (Drive Down) lower dowel pin. Retain dowel pin.
L
51144 511 44
a - Pivot Pin
b - Tilt Lock
c - Dowel Pin
6. Use suitable punch to drive out lower pivot pin .

7. Tilt shock absorber assembly (TOP FIRST) out from clamp bracket and remove assem-
bly.
51 144
51144
a - Pivot Pin
b - Manual Tilt System
Manual Tilt System Disassembly

NOTE: Accumulatorcontains a high pressure nitrogen charge and is NOT SERVICEABLE.
Replace if necessary.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5C·19

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Accumulator Removal
1. Place manual tilt system in soft jawed vise.
2. Position shock rod to full up position.
3. Open cam shaft valve (Down Position).
4. Loosen velocity valve enough to drip. wait until dripping stops.
5. Whe n fluid stops dripping. loosen and remove accumu lator.
6. If plunger can be compressed into accumulator by hand. accumulator is defective. Re-
place accumulator.
5 1143
5 1143
a - Accumulator
b - Cam Lever
c - Velocity Valve
d - Plunger
7. Once accumulator is removed. remove o-ring, conical spring. steel ball and plunger.
~... @
a - Conical Spring
b - Steel Ball
c - Plu nger
d - O~ring
Page SC-20 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL TILT A SSIST
Shock Rod Removal

1. Unscrew cylinder end cap assembly using spanner wrench [1 /4 in. x 5116 in. long pegs].
2. Remove shock rod assembly from cylinder.
+
: :-2 91-74951
•
51145
Shock Rod Disassembly

NOTE: Th e only serviceable items on the shock rod assembly are the O-rings and wiper
ring. If shock rod requires any other repair, replace shock rod assembly.
a
a - End Cap
b - O-ring (2)
e - Wiper Ring
1. Place shock rod assembly on clean work surface.

2. Remove three (3) screws and remove plate from shock rod piston.
5 1143
a - Screw (3)
b - Plate
e - Shock Rod Piston
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5C-21

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
3. Remove check ball components from shock rod piston.

4 . Remove o-ring .
a - Spring (5)
b - Seat (5)
c - Ball (5)
d - O-ring
ACAUTION
When removing shock piston, spanner wrench must have 1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long pegs
to avoid damage to shock piston.
5. Place shock rod into soft jawed vise and apply heat to loosen piston using torch lamp
(PIN 91-63209).
6. Loosen shock rod piston using spanner wrench [1/4 in. x 5116 in. (6.4mm x 8mm) long
pegs).
7. Allow shock rod piston to cool . Remove from shock rod .
::: 8
91-74951
a - Spanner Wrench
b - Shock Rod Piston
Page 5C·22 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
8. Inspect check valve for debris; clean debris from check valve if found. If debris cannot
be cleaned from check valve , replace shock piston as an assembly.
9. Clean shock and components with compressed air.
10. Remove inner O-ring.
51199
a - Shock Piston
b - O-ring
11. Remove cylinder end cap assembly from shock rod.

12. Inspect shock. If wiper (located in cap) has failed to keep rod clean, replace wiper.
13. Place end cap on clean work surface.
14. Remove rod wiper, inner o-ring , and outer o-ring.
t 51147 5 1145
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner O-ring
c - Outer O-ring
~
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page SC·23
~~
i
MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Valve Block Removal

1. Remove two screws from the shock rod cylinder to separate the valve block.
2. Remove o-rings and dowel pins.
~
I
c a 51146
51148
a - Screw
b - Valve Block
c - Shock Rod Cylinder
d - O-ring (2)
e - Dowel Pin (2)
Memory Piston Removal

1. Remove memory piston from cylinder using one of two methods:
a. Using lock ring pliers.
1- - -
I
I
I
5 1144
91-822778A3
Page 5C-24 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL T1LT ASSIST
b. Blowing compressed air into center a-ring hole.
NOTE: Point cylinder opening down and away. Use a shop rag or towel to avoid damage
to the memory piston. Fluid will blowout also.
2. Remove O-ring from memory piston.
5 1144
a - Adaptor/Air Hose
b - Memory Piston Exit
c - Shop Rag
d - O-Ring
e - Memory Piston
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5C-25

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Valve Block Disassembly

1. Remove check retainer plug and components.
2. Remove hydraulic oil transfer valve plugs and components.
3. Remove surge valve assembly.
5 1142
a • Transler Valve Plug Assembly (2)

b - Check Retainer Plug or Screw Assembly
c • Spool
d • Spring
e - O-ring
f - Velocity Valve
4. Remove screw and remove cam assembly.
a - Spacer Retainer Clip

b - Retainer Clip
c - Screw
d • Shaft Seal
e - Cam
Page 5C-26 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Reassembly - O-Ring and Seal Placement

@--(i)
f--- O -®
~" " (j)

'~ eel, ,
.,' ,'«Ill 0
~
~o~ " 0,~-?"...

"-
B
~~~
NOTE: Lubricate all O-rings using Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid. If not avail-
NOTE: It is recommended that a/l o-rings be rep/aced when servicing tilt system.
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5C·27

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Actual O-Ring Sizes
~o
Cutaway View of O-Ring
-'1 I ~Vidth
0 .0 .
~o
O-RINGS SHOWN ARE ACTUAL SIZE
Page 5C-28 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
O-Ring Description and Sizes
O·Ring
1
2
3
4 Piston
5 Piston Bolt
6 (2) Manifold Split Line 0.208 in. (5.283 mm) 0.348 in. (8.839 mm)
7 Slow Valve 0.114 in. (2.90 mm) 0.254 in. (6.451 mm) 0.07 in. (1 .78 mm)
8 (2) Plug 0.489 in. (12.42 mm) 0.629 in. (15.97 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
9 Accumulator 2.254 in. (57.25 mm)
10 Lip Seal
11 Cam
12 Back Up Ring
13 Surge Valve 0.301 in.
14 Memory Piston 1.6 in. (40.64 mm)
Manual Tilt System Cleaning and Inspection

1. It is recommended that all o·rings exposed during disassembly be replaced .
2. Clean components, filter, and check valve seats using engine cleaner and compressed
air. Do not use cloth rags.
3. Inspect all machined surfaces for burrs or scoring to assure o·ring longevity.
4. Inspect shock rod . If scraper (located in cap) has failed to keep rod clean, replace
scraper.
Manual Tilt System Reassembly

IMPORTANT: Components mu st be dirt and lint free. Slightest amount of debris in tilt
system could ca use system to malfunction .
Apply Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid to all o-rings during reassembly. If not
available, use automotive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5C-29

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
CAM SHAFT REASSEMBLY

IMPORTANT: Cam shaft O~ ring must be lubricated using 2-4~C with Teflon.
1. Install lubricated a-ring and back up seal to cam.
2. Install shaft seal in valve block with lips facing out.
3. Install cam shaft assembly in valve block.
4. Secure cam shaft in place using insulator, retainer plate, and screw. Tighten screw se-
curely.
[]D):u 2-4-C wffeflon (92-850736A 1)
a ~ Spacer Retainer Clip

b - Retainer Clip
c - Screw
d - Shaft Seal
e - O-ring
f - Back up Seal
9 -Cam
VALVE BODY CHECK REASSEMBLY

1. Install lubricated Q- ring , plunger, steel ball and conical spring to valve block.
5 1145
a - Conical Spring
b - Sleel Ball
c - Plunger
d ~ O-ring
Page 5C·30 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
VELOCITY VALVE REASSEMBLY

1. Install spool, spring. lubricated o-ring and screw plug (surge valve assembly) into valve
block.
2. Torque velocity valve to 75 Ib-in. (8.5 Nm).
a - Spool
b - Spring
c - O-ring
d - Velocity Valve - Torque to 75 Ib-in. (8.5 Nm)
CHECK RETAINER REASSEMBLY

1. Install plunger, spring (large) , ball, spring (small) , and plug into valve block.
a - Plunger
b - Spring (Large)
c - Ball
d - Spring (Small)
e - Plug
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5C-31

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
VALVE PLUG REASSEMBLY

1. Install plunger, steel ball, spring , lubricated o·ring and screw plug. Torque screw plugs
10 75 Ib-in. (8.5 Nm).
~I I
m
~0 0
®-----f!! f!!
@ ·0 0
@
.~ ~ 5 1142
a - Plunger (2)
b - Sleel 8all (2)
c - Spring (2)
d - O-ring (2)
e - Screw Plug (2) Torque 10 75 Ib-in. (8.5 Nm)
Valve Block Installation

1. Install lubricated O·rings and dowel pins.
2. Install valve block to shock rod cylinder. Insert screws to shock rod cylinder and torque
10100 Ib-in. (11 Nm).
5 1148
e
a 51146
a - O-ring (2)
b - Dowel Pin (2)
c - Valve Block
d - Screw (2) Torque 10 100 Ib-in. (11 Nm)
e - Shock Rod Cylinder
Page 5C·32 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Shock Rod Reassembly

1. Install lubricated o·rings to end cap.
2. Install rod wiper.
3. Install lubricated o·rings to shock piston.
5 1199
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner a-ring
c - Outer a-ring
d - Shock Piston
e - a-ring
f - O-ring
4. Clamp shock rod in soft jawed vise.

5. POSition cylinder end cap onto rod, as shown.
5 1146
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5C-33

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
ACAUTION
When installing shock rod piston, spanner wrench must have 1/4 in. x 5/16 in.
(6.4mm x8mm) long pegs to avoid damage to shock rod piston.
6. Apply Loctite Grade "A" (271) to threads on shock rod .
7. Install shock rod piston.
S. Tighten shock rod piston securely using spanner wrench [1 /4 in. x 5116 in. (6.4m m x
Smm) long pegs). If a torquing type spanner tool is used to tighten shock piston, then
torque to 90 Ib-fi (122 Nm) .
: :- 91 -74951
[J::D> Loctit. "27t" (92-809819)

51148
a - Spanner Wrench
b - Shock Rod Piston - Torque to 90 Ib-It (122 Nm)
9. Install ball, seat, and spring (five sets) to shock rod piston.
10. Secure components with plate. Torque screws to 35 Ib-in. (3.9 Nm).
11 . Remove shock rod assembly from vise.

b - Plate
e - Spring (5)
d - Seat (5)
e - Ball (5)
Page 5C· 34 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL TILT AS SIST
Shock Rod Installation and Fluid Filling Procedure

NOTE: There are two ways for the filling procedure. The first is the easiest and less time
consuming.
Filling Procedure Option One
1. Place trim cylinder in soft jawed vice .
2. With manifold cam lever dosed (Up Position) , fill cylinder and manifold to top with Quick-
silver Power trim and steeri ng flu id, or (ATF) automatic transmission fluid. Let bubbles
disperse.
3. Install lubricated o-ring to memory piston.
4. Using lock ring pliers (PI N 91-B2277BA3). Set memory piston in top of cylinder then open
cam lever (Down Position) and push memory piston down ju st below cylinder treads.
Close cam lever (Up Position).
1- - -
I
I
I
5 11 44
5. Fill top of cylinder again with fluid to top and install shock rod assembly on top memory
piston. Open cam lever (Down Position) and push shock rod assembly down to 1/8" be-
low cylinder threads. Close cam lever (Up Position).
6. Fill top of shock rod assembly with fluid to top of cylinder. Open cam lever (Down Posi-
tion) and screw cylinder cap down.
7. Tighten end cap securely using spanner wrench [1 /4 in . x 5/16 in. (6.4mm x Bmm) long
pegs]. If a torquing type spanner tool is used to tighten end cap, then torque the end cap
to 451b-ft (6 t .O Nm). Close cam lever (Up Position) .
•
5 1145
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5C-35

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
8. Open and close cam lever, watching for bubbles coming from accumulator check ball
hole. When bubbles stop, fill accumulator opening to top with fluid. Grease threads on
accumulator and open ing with 2-4-C with Teflon. Start accumulator in threads and open
cam lever (Down Position). Torque accumulator to 35 Ib-ft (47 Nm).
51143
a - Accumulator
b - Cam Lever (Down Position)
NOTE: If filling procedure is done correctly, it should be hard to turn cylinder rod assembly
by hand.
Page 5C-36 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Filling Procedure Option Two Instructions for Making

Retaining Tool
3/16 in . x 3 in .
(5 x 7.5 em)
Steel Plate
3/8 in . x 13 in .
. . . - - - (10 mm x 33 cm)
Threaded Rod
4in. x 1/4 in. min.

(10cm x 6.4 mm) minimum
Channel Iron
~ '\
• r",
" i~~
(76mm)
L i"- 2 holes, 7116 in. dia.

(11 mm)
~
"""----- 1 1/4 in. dia.
s in.
(12Smm) • (30m)
~
._
. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 20 in.
(506mm)
If )
~"
4 in.
(l00mm)
L 316 in. dia. 2 holes
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5C-37

MANUAL TILT A SSIST
Bleeding Manual Tilt System

IMPORTANT: While bleeding tilt system, time must be allowed between each stro ke
to allow air bubbles to dissipate.
1. With shock rod in the full up position and manifold cam lever open (facing down), secure
tilt system to retaining tool and container. (A No. 10 can or 31b coffee can could be used.)
2. Fill container to near full level using Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid. If not
available, use automotive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid .
IMPORTANT: Fluid level must remain above accumulator opening during bleeding
process.
e b
c
a
50447
a - Retaining Tool
b • TIlt System
c - Container
d - Cam Lever
e - Accumulator Opening
3. Bleed unit by pushing rod down slowly (18·20 seconds per stroke) until stopped at base .
Wait until all ai r bubbles exit accumulator base .
50432
Page 5C-38 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
4. During up stroke, pull up on rod slowly 3 in. (76 mm) from base.
5. Wait until ali air bubbles to exit accumulator base.
50433
6. Slowly cycle unit 5-8 times (round trip per cycle) using short strokes 3 in. (76 mm) from
base allowing bubbles to disappear during each stroke .
7. Allow unit to stand five minutes, then proceed to cycle unit 2-3 more times using short
strokes. No air bubbles should appear from accumulator port at this time.
8. With oil level well above accumulator port, slowly pull rod to full up position.
9. Install accumulator making su re air bubbles do not enter system.
10. Tighten accumulator snugly at this time .
50432
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5C-39

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
11 . With cam lever remaining open (facing down). remove tilt assembly from oil and secure
in soft jawed vise. Torque accumulator to 35 Ib~ft (47 Nm).
50433
Manual Tilt System Installation

1. Apply 2~4~C Marine Lubricant to lower pivot pin hole and pivot pin surface .
2. Start lower pivot pin into pivot pin hole and position lower dowel pin (retained) in its hole.
3. Reinstall manual tilt system. bottom first. Reconnect release valve link rod.
51 144
[j[D> 2-4-C wlTeflon (92-S50736Al )
a ~ Lower Pivot Pin

b ~ Lower Dowel Pin
c ~ Manual Tilt System
Page SC-40 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
4. Using a suitable punch, drive lower pivot pin into clamp bracket and trim cylinder assem-
bly until pivot pin is flush with outside surface.
5. Using a punch, drive lower dowel pin in until seated.
~
,
-
' -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 51148
51147
a - Lower Pivot Pin

b - Lower Dowel Pin
6. Apply 2-4-C Marine Lubricant to surface of upper pivot pin, pivot pin hole and shock rod
hole.
7. Using a mailet, drive upper pivot pin into swivel bracket and through shock rod until pivot
pin is flush with swivel bracket.
[J[D.
a
5 1148
2-4-C wfTefion (92-850736A 1)
- Pivot Pin
~, 51148
b - Pivot Pin Bore

c - Shock Rod Bore
d - Pivot Pin
e - Swivel Bracket
, - Shock Rod
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 5C-41

MANUAL T1LT ASSIST
8. Drive upper dowel pin (a) into its hole until seated.
a - Dowel Pin
9. Check manual release cam adjustment. Cam must open and close freely. Adjust link rod
as necessary.
Manual Release Valve Adjustment

1. With outboard in full up position, place tilt lock lever forward .
2. Lift cam lever (with link rod) to full up position.
5 1143
a - Tilt Lock Lever

b • Cam Lever
c • Link Rod
3. Link rod end must snap onto ball of tilt lock lever without moving tilt lock fever or cam
lever.
Page 5C-42 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

NON·BIGFOOT GEAR HOUSING
LOWER UNIT
Section 6A - Non-Bigfoot Gear Housing
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . .. ... . . . .... . . . . 6A- l Propeller Shaft Disassembly . . . . . . . . . .. 6A-28

Special Tools ...... .. .. . . . . .. ........ . 6A-2 Propeller Shaft and Carrier Inspection ..... 6A·29
Quicksilver Lubricants and Service Aids . .. . 6A-5 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . ........... . .... . . . . 6A-29
Gear Housing (Driveshaft){2: 1 Gear Ratio) 6A-6 Cam Follower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6A-29
Gear Housing (Propeller Shaft) Reverse Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-29
(2:1 Gear Ratio) . .......... . . . .. .. . 6A-8 Reverse Gear Bearing . . .. . .. . . . . ..... 6A-30
General Service Recommendations . . 6A-1O Bearing Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-31
Bearings .. . . . .. . ............ . . 6A-10 Gear Housing Reassembly ......... . .. . .. 6A-35
Seals . .. .. .. . . . . . ..... ....... . 6A-1O Shift Shaft Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6A-35
Draining and Inspecting Gear Lubricant .. . . 6A-ll Pinion Bearing Race. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-36
Gear Housing Removal . ... . . . . 6A-12 Forward Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A·37
2-Stroke Models . .............. . . . . . 6A-12 Pinion Gear/Drive Shaft Assembly . . . . .. 6A-38
I
4-Stroke Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A- 13 Propeller Shaft . ..................... . 6A·39
Disassembly . . . ........... • .... . 6A-15 Bearing Carrier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6A-41
Water Pump .... . ... . .. . . .. . . . . 6A- 15 Water Pump . . ............. . 6A·42
Water Pump Seals . ... . . . .... . . . 6A-21 Gear Housing Pressure Test . . . . . . • . . . . . .. 6A-45
Inspection . . . .......... . ....... . . . 6A-23 Gear Housing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6A-46
Upper Drive Shaft Bearing ....... • .. . . . 6A-23 2-Stroke Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6A-47 "
Pinion Gear Bearing . ..... • ..... 6A-24 4-Stroke Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. 6A-47
Pinion Gear . . . . . ... • .. . .. 6A-24 Trim Tab Adjustment and Replacement 6A-48
Forward Gear . . ......... . 6A-24 Filling Gear Housing with Lubricant 6A-50
Shift Shaft .. .......... . ...... . . • . .... 6A-27
Specifications
Gear Ratio 2.00:1

Lubricant Type Quicksilver Gear Lube- Premium Blend
Forward Gear
Number of Teeth 26 SpirallBevel
GEAR HOUSING Pinion Gear
(2.00:1) Number at Teeth 13 SpirallBevel
Pinion Height 0.025 in. (0.64 mm)
Forward Gear Backlash N o Adjustment
Water Pressure
@ 800 rpm (Idle) 2-4 psi (14-28 kPa)
@ 6000 rpm (WOT) 12-17 psi (69-103 kPa)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-1

NON-BIGFOOT GEAR HOUSING
Special Tools
1. Bearing 31-85560
54978
2. Driver 91-13779
3. Bearing Puller & Installation Tool 91-31229A7

a. Nut 11-24156
b. Washer (2) 12-34961
@
c. Plate91-29310
o \
d. Shaft 91-31229
4. Bearing Puller Tool 91-27780
5. Mandrel 91-36571
Page 6A-2 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

6. Universal Puller Plate 91-37241
7. Driver Head 91-37312
~I
I
8. Driver 91-817011
"
9. Driver Rod 91-37323
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-3

10. Drive Shaft Holding Tool

a. 2-stroke models 91-825196
b. 4-stroke models 91-83180M
11 . Mandrel 91-825197
12. Driver 91-817007
r--
--=-
9/·lll\11l1
-
13. Mandrel 91-825198
14. Pilot 91-825199
15. Spring Hook 91-825200A 1
Page 6A-4 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

NON-BIGFOOT GEAR HOU SING
16. D river 9 1-826872
17. Leakage Tester FT8950

92-8098 19 Loctite ~27 1 ft
Purchase Local Loctite "405 ft
92-89 160 1-1 RTV Silicone Sealer

92-850737 Al Super Duty Gear Lubricant
92-809824 Loctite Primer "7649"
92-850735A 1 Anti-Corrosion Grease
92-850736A 1 2·4·C wfTeflon
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A·S

Gear Housing (Driveshaft)(2:1 Gear Ratio)

~ Loc!i!e "271" (92-809819) 0::::::;;:=::'"
['KI:P Loctite ~405w (Purchase Locally)
[iL:I:b Super Duly Gear Lubricant (92-850737 A 1)
~ Loctite Primer ~7649" (92-809824) ........
UiJ:t' 2-4-C wlTeflon (92-850736A 1) , / / ~ ::::: ~

/// 24
22- ~~ ~~~
7 7
{ )- 2 8
25 - 0 ~'---09"'5D
i- 29
~-13
~95-"Ct>-~ 30
ErO
~O-31
26-
0-32
®- 33
~- 16 35-@
10- 1 7
07- 18
34
0 - 20
"-
"-
'>
-'>-5
3.44 IN.l135MM '=- 4
TORPEDO DIA. /
i" ~
-
9 ~ fol--;'-- ' I
I
~-7
8 ----<l) 92 D r1f- 6
Page 6A-6 90-857046 AUGUST 1998
Gear Housing (Oriveshaft)(2:1 Gear Ratio)

TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION Ib-in. Ib-ft Nm
1 GEAR HOUSING (SHORT)
- 1 GEAR HOUSING (LONG)
1 1 GEAR HOUSING (BASIC)
--
2 1 SEAUPLATE KIT
-
3 1 PLATE (Part Of Ref #2)
4 1 SCREW (.375-16 x .25) 60 6.8
--
5 1 WASHER-Sealing
6 1 DRAIN SCREW (MAGNETIC) 60 6.8
--
7 1 WASHER- Sealing
8 1 NUT 50 68.0
-
9 1 PINION GEAR (13 TEETH)
-
10 1 BEARING ASSEMBLY-Roller
-- 11 1 CUP (Part Of Ref # 10)
-------
12 4 SCREW (M6 x 16) 60 6.8
--
13 1 WATER PUMP ASSEMBLY
1 SEAL-Waler Tube (SHORT - 1-3/4)
14
1 SEAL Water Tube (LONG - 2-1/4)
15 1 WASHER
-
16 1 KEY
17 1 WASHER
--
18 1 GASKET
-
19 1 GASKET (LOWER)
--
20 1 FACE PLATE
21 1 IMPELLER
--
22 1 WATER PUMP BASE ASSEMBLY
23 1 SEAL--Qil
--
24 1 SEAL--Dil
----
25 1 ORING
--
1 DRIVESHAFT (SHORT)
26
1 DRIVESHAFT (LONG)
27 1 BALL BEARING
--
28 1 CABLE TIE
--
29 1 BOOT Shift Shaft
--
30 1 RETAINER-Shift Shaft
31 1 ORING
--
32 1 ORING
33 1 WASHER
1 SH IFT SHAFT (SHORT)
34
1 SHIFT SHAFT (LONG)
35 1 WASHER
36 1 ROLL PIN
--
37 1 CAM-Shift
38 1 PIN
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-7

Gear Housing (Propeller Shaft)(2:1 Gear Ratio)

3.44 IN.l135MM
42
TORPEDO DIA.
@,
(1( 39
1
39
I
/ 69 I
I'
\
®
. -,,
I'!"iiO 70 I I
-
~ d)'/ ";;s" I
" ...... '-""~" ." ,... ....
:
~-
, 72
", , ~- ~
....~S.,I..
,
,
I
\ (P
'
I 65 64 • ~
\
"............ --- ..:::......
....
'"
~ ...
, d /
...
' . / 66
, ,
•,
••,
,,
"\
71
, ,
•,
• ,
•, ,
,
I
I
56 I
[:L::D> Loctile "271" (92-809819)
[jLJ:P Super Duty Gear Lubricant (92-850737 A 1)
[iLJP Anti-Corrosion Grease (92-850735A 1)
[iL:D> 2-4-C wlTeflon (92-850736A 1)
Page 6A-8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Gear Housing (Propeller Shaft)(2:1 Gear Ratio)

TOROUE
REF.
NO. OTY. DESCRIPTION Ib-in_ Ib-It Nm
-
1
-,-GEAR HOUSING (SHORT)
GEAR HOUSING (LONG)
1 1 GEAR HOUSING (BASIC)
39 2 DOWEL PIN
40 1 GASKET Water Tube
41 1 TUBE
42 1 PLUG- RUBBER
43 1 SCREEN Water Inlet
44 1 TRIM TAB
45 1 SC REW (M8 x 20) 190 15.8 21.5
46 1 WASHER
47 1 FORWARD GEAR ASSEMBLY (26 TEETH)
48 1 ROLLER BEARING ASSY.
49 1 CUP
50 1 ROLLER BEARING
51 1 FOLLOWER-Cam
52 1 SPRING
53 1 PIN-Cross
54 1 CLUTCH
55 1 SPRING
56 1 PROPELLER SHAFT
57 1 REVERSE GEAR (26 TEETH)
58 1 BALL BEARING
59 1 BEARING CARRIER
60 1 o RING
61 1 NEEDLE BEARING
62 1 OIL SEAL
63 1 OIL SEAL
64 2 WASHER
65 2 SCR EW (M8 x 25 - Cap Screw) 225 16.5 22 .5
66 2 THREADED INSERT
--
67 1 DECAL (2:1)
68 1 THRUST HUB
69 1 PROP NUT KIT THESE REPLACEMENT PARTS 55 75
70 1 TAB WASHER ARE NOT INCLUDED WITH
71 4 SCREW COMPLETE GEAR HOUSING 40 54.2
72 4 WAS HER REPLACEMENT
73 1 PLUG
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-9

General Service Recommendations

There may be more than one way to udisassemble" or "reassemble" a particular part(s),
therefore , it is recommended that the entire procedure be read prior to repair.
IMPORTANT: Read the following before attempting any repairs.
In many cases, disassembly of a sub-assembly may not be necessary until cleaning and
inspection reveals that disassembly is required for replacement of one or more components.
Service procedu re order in this section is a normal disassembly-reassembly sequence .
Threaded parts are right hand (RH) , unless otherwise indicated.
When holding, pressing or driving is required , use soft metal vise jaw protectors or wood
for protection of parts. Use a suitable mandrel (one that will contact only the bearing race)
w hen pressing or drivi ng bearings.
Whenever compressed air is used to dry a part, verify that no water is present in air line.
Bearings
All bearings must be cleaned and inspected . Clean bearings with solvent and dry with com-
pressed air. Air should be directed at the bearing so that it passes through the bearing . DO
NOT spi n bearing with compressed air, as th is may cause bearing to score from lack of lu-
brication . After cleaning, lubricate bearings with Quicksilver Gear Lubricant. DO NOT lubri-
cate tapered bearing cups until after in spection .
Inspect all bearings for rough ness, catches and bearing race side wear. Work inner bearing
race in-and-out, while holding outer race, to check for side wear. When inspecting tapered
bearings, determine condition of rollers and inner bearing race by inspecting bearing cup
for pitting , scoring, grooves, uneven wear, imbedded particles and/or discoloration from
over-heating. Always replace tapered bearing and race as a set.
Inspect gear housing for bearing races that have spun in their respective bores. If race(s)
have spun, gear housing must be replaced.
Roller bearing condition is determined by inspecting the surface of the shaft that the roller
bearing supports. Check shaft surface for pitting scoring, grooving, imbedded particles , un-
even wear and/or discoloration from overheating. Th e shaft and bearing must be replaced
if such a condition exists .
Seals
As a normal procedu re, all a-rings and oil seals should be replaced without regard to ap-
pearance. To prevent leakage around seals , apply Loctite 271 to outer diameter of all metal
case seals. When using Loctite on seals or threads , surfaces must be clean and dry. Apply
2-4-C wlTefion on all O-rings and on 1.0. of oil seals . Apply 2-4-C wfTeflon to external su r-
faces of bearing carrier.
Page 6A-10 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Draining and Inspecting Gear Lubricant
near the
1. With gear housing in normal running position, place a clean pan under housing and re-
move vent plug and fill/drain plug (with gaskets).
,,
,
I
t~
a - Vent PluglWasher
b - Fill/Drain PluglWasher
2. Inspect gear lubricant for metal particles (lubricant will have a "metal flake" appearance).
Presence of fine metal particles (resembling powder) on the drain plug magnet indicates
normal wear. Metal chips on the magnet indicate the need for gear housing disassembly
and component inspection.
3. Note color of gear lubricant. White or cream color indicates presence of water.
4. Presence of water indicates the need for disassembly and inspection of oil seals, 0-
rings , gaskets and components for damage. Pressure check gear case prior to disas-
sembly.
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-11

NON-BIGFOOT GE AR HOUSING
Gear Housing Removal
before
1. Remove (and isolate) spark plug leads from spark plugs.
2. Shift inlo NEUTRAL.
2-Stroke Models
MERCURY/MARINER 30/40, AND 40/50,
FORCE 40/50
3. Loosen jam nut. Unscrew attaching nut to separate shift shaft.
,/ I
) , / "'~ I
~lll
52832
a -Jam Nut
b - Attaching Nut
Page 6A-12 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

4-Stroke Models
MERCURYIMARINER 25, 30/40, AND 45/50
4. Disconnect shift shaft by un-snapping retainer to lower clip and sliding retainer to the
left.
a - Retainer
b - Lower Clip
5. Make a scribe line showing alignment of trim tab to gear case and remove trim tab bolt
and washer.
a - Bolt and Washer

b - Scribe Line
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-13

6. Remove nut and washer in trim tab cavity.
52835
a - Nut and Washer
7. Remove 4 bolts securing gear case to drive shaft housi ng.
52836
a - Bolt (4)
Page 6A-14 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Disassembly
Water Pump
NOTE: If water tube seal remained in drive shaft housing, remove seal from housing and
reinstall on water pump cover. Secure seal to cover with Loctite 405.
1. Remove 4 bolts securing pump cover.
a - Seal
b - Bolt (4)
NOTE: Replace cover if thickness of steel at discharge slots is 0.060 in. (1.524 mm) or less,
or if groove(s)(other than impeller sealing groove) in cover roof are more than 0.030 in.
(0.762 mm) deep.
90-857046 AUGUST 199B Page 6A-15

2. Remove cover, washer (above impeller), impeller, key and washer (below impeller).
3. Remove cover gasket, base plate and base gasket.
lJ
9~ ~
c .. ®
© .. ®
*. 111 .. @
©
© .. ®
. CD
--@
a - Cover
'" 52692
b - Nylon Washer (above impeller)

c -Impeller
d -Key
e - Nylon Washer (below impeller)
f - Cover Gasket
9 - Face Plate
h - Base Gasket
NOTE: Replace impeller if:

- Impeller blades are cracked, torn or worn.
- Impeller is glazed or melted
- Rubber portion of impeller is not bonded to
impeller hub.
Page 6A·16 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

4. Remove and/or replace exhaust deflector plate if damaged.
a - Deflector Plate
5. Remove bearing carrier attaching bolts and locking tab washers or flat washers. Discard
tab washers.
a - Bolts and Tab Washers or Flat Washers

b - rab Washers Style 2
6. Using Puller (9 1-27780), remove carrier assembly from gear case .
91-27780
52829
a - Puller (91 -27780)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-17

NOTE: When removing propeller shaft assembly, cam follower may dislodge. Retrieve fol-
lower from gear housing.
7. Remove propeller shaft assembly.
52864
a - Propeller Shaft
MOdels Drive Shall Holding Tool

4-Slroke
Mercury/Mariner 91-83180M
25 , 30/40 , and 45/50
2-S1roke
Force
40/50 91-825196
MercurylMariner
30/40 , 40/50
8. Remove pinion nut.
51043
52864
a - Drive Shaft Holding Tool
b - Pinion Nut
c - Pinion Gear
Page 6A- 18 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

9. Remove drive shaft assembly and pinion gear.

10. Remove forward gear.
a - Forward Gear
11 . Remove shift shaft assembly
~+-{a
52841
a - Shift Shaft Assembly
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-19

NON·BIQFOOT GEAR HOUSING
12. Insert pinion bearing race puller (9 1·825200A 1) through gear case and position inside
of pinion bearing race. In sert driver (91-13779) into puller through drive shaft cavity and
drive out race.
iii
===:J
"'ILl
91·13779
9 1·8252QOA 1
52844
a - Puller (91-825200A 1)
b - Driver (91-13779)
13. Remove forward bearing race with puller (91-27780).
91·27780
53838
a - Race
b - Puller (91-27780)
Page 6A·20 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

Water Pump Seals

NOTE: All gaskets, seals and a-rings should be replaced as a normal repair procedure dur-
ing gear case disassembly-
NOTE: DO NOT use a screwdriver to remove seals from carrier, as carrier may be dam-
aged.
1. Using a suitable mandrel, press both seals from carrier.
[J:JP LocUte "271 " (92-809819)
a - Neoprene Ribbed Seal

b - Metal Cased Seal
c - Carrier
d - O-ring
2. Apply Locti!e 271 to the O.D. of the metal cased seal. With seal lip facing away from the
large shoulder of mandrel (91-825197) , press seal into carrier until mandrel bottoms on
carrier.
~
II I ,I
I
lL;;J
~ ~
91-825197
.J. ___ Lr
\!VI :t;':
a - Seal (Metal Cased) Lip Facing Down
b - Mandrel (91-825197)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-2 1

3. With lip of ribbed neoprene 0 .0 . seal facing towards small shoulder 01 Mandrel
(91-825197) , press seal into carrier until mandrel bottoms on carrier.
~
-@-
~
~
27 , ,
,
b1'
52853
a - Seal (Ribbed Neoprene) Lip Facing Up
b - Mandrel (91-825197)
NOTE: Apply a light coat of 2-4-C wlre"on (92-850736A 1) to the /ips of both seals after
installation in carrier.
4. Apply a light coat of 2-4-C wrreflon to the new a-ring and install on ca rrier.
DDP 2-4-C wrreflon (92-B50736A 1)

a - O-ring
Page 6A-22 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Inspection
Upper Drive Shaft Bearing
1. Inspect bearing for rust, roughness or discoloration from lack of lubricant.
2. 00 NOT remove bearing from drive shaft unl ess bearing must be replaced , as removal
process will damage bearing.
3. If bearing must be replaced, position drive shaft assembly in vise Uaws of vise support-
ing only bearing) and while holding drive shaft, strike top of drive shaft with lead hammer
and drive bearing off.
a - Bearing
4. To install new bearing, thread old pinion nut 3/4 way onto drive shaft. Position Universal
Puller Plate (91-37241) under bearing and press on pinion nut while holding drive shaft
until bearing seats against shoulder.
b
c
o
52387
a - Old Pinion Nul (N ut Should be Above Drive Shaft)
b • Bearing
c - Universal Puller Plate (9 1-37241)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-23

Pinion Gear Bearing

1. Inspect bearing for rust, roughness or discoloration from lack of lubricant.
2. If bearing is damaged, bearing and race must be replaced as an assembly.
3. If race appears to have spun in drive shaft bore, gear case housing must be replaced .
a • Bearing
b • Race
Pinion Gear
1. Inspect pinion gear teeth for rust, chipping, excessive wear (teeth are sharp edged) or
broken.
2. If pinion gear teeth are damaged, also inspect forward and reverse gear teeth for dam-
age.
3. Replace gears as requi red.
52839
Forward Gear
1. Inspect forward gear teeth for rust, chipping, excessive wear (teeth are sharped edged) ,
or broken teeth .
2. Inspect forward gear clutch jaws for wear. Rounded jaws indicate the following:
• Improper shift cable adjustment.
• Engine idle speed too high.
• Shifting too slowly.
Page 6A-24 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

3. Inspect propeller shaft forward gear bearing surface to determine condition of forward
gear needle bearing. If bearing surface is discolored (from lack of lubricant), pitted or
worn, propeller shaft and bearing should be replaced.
52874
a - Bearing Surface
b - Bearing
4. Use a suitable mandrel to press needle bearing out of forward gear.
a - Mandrel (14 mm Socket)

b - Bearing
5. Use Driver 91-826872 to press new needle bearing into forward gear. Press on num-
bered side of bearing.
87 b
~
91-826872
,. .,
~ ---
52847
[JLD::D Super Duty Gear Lubricant (92-S50737A1)

a - Driver (91-826872)
b - Bearing
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-25

6. Inspect forward gear tapered bearing and race for rust, roughness or excessive wear
(looseness) .
7. If bearing is in serviceable condition, DO NOT remove bearing from gear, as removal
process will damage bearing.
8. If bearing must be replaced , remove bearing from gear using Universal Puller Plate
(91-37241) and sui1able mandrel.
9. Replace bearing and race as a set. Use suitable mandrel to press bearing onto gear.
PRESS ONLY ON INNER RACE when installing bearing.
91-37241
REMOVAL
a - Universal Puller Plate (91-37241)
b - Mandrel (15/16 in. socket)
INSTALLATION
a - Mandrel (1-1 18 in. socket)
Page 6A-26 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Shift Shaft
1. Inspect shift cam for wear or galling. Replace cam if necessary.
2. If cam is worn , inspect cam follower in end of propeller shaft for wear.
a • Cam Follower
b - ShiH Cam
3. Inspect shift shaft boot for deterioration.

4. Inspect shift shaft carrier o-ring for cuts or abrasions. It is a good service procedure to
replace all o-rings, seals and gaskets regardless of appearance .
- --@
52828
a - Boot
b - O-ring
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-27

Propeller Shaft Disassembly

1. Remove propeller shaft from carrier and disassemble shaft.
a - Prop Shaft
b - Retaining Spring
c - Clutch Dog
d - Cross Pin
e - Cam Follower Spring
f - Cam Follower
2. Remove reverse gear and bearing from carrier with Puller (91-27780).
I~
52840
a - Reverse Gear and Bearing

b - Puller (91-27780)
Page 6A-28 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Propeller Shaft and Carrier Inspection

Clutch
1. Inspect clutch jaws for chips or rounding off.
2. If wear is present, inspect corresponding forwa rd or reverse gear matching jaws for simi-
lar wear. Replace appropriate components as required.
52824
Cam Follower
1. Inspect cam follower for wear or galling .
2. If wear is present, inspect corresponding shift cam for wear. Replace if worn .
Reverse Gear
1. Inspect reverse gear teeth for rust, chipping excessive wear (teeth are sharped edged)
or broken teeth.
2. Inspect reverse gear clutch jaws for wear. Rounded jaws indicate the following:
• Improper shift cable adju stment.
• Engin e idle speed too high.
• Shifting too slowly.
52875
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-29

Reverse Gear Bearing

1. Inspect bearing for rust, roughness or excessive wear (looseness).
2. If bearing is in serviceable condition, DO NOT remove bearing from gear as removal will
damage bearing.
3. If bearing must be replaced, remove bearing from gear using Universal Puller Plate
(91-37241) and Driver (91-37312).
4. Install new bearing using a suitable mandrel. PRESS ONLY ON INNER RACE when
installing bearing.
I
""
~
91-37241
91-37312
REMOVAL
a • Bearing
b • Reverse Gear
c - Universal Puller Plate (91-37241)
d - Driver (91-37312)
INSTALLATION 52867
a • Mandrel (1-1/4 in. socket)
b • Bearing
O[:D:D Super Duty Gear Lubricant (92-850737 A 1)
Page 6A-30 go-857046 AUGUST 1998

Bearing Carrier
NEEDLE BEARING
1_ The condition of the carrier needle bearing can be determined by inspecting its running
su rface on the propeller shaft.
2. If the shaft is discolored (from lack of oil) or pitted, replace bearing and shaft.
3. Bearing can be removed by using Driver Rod (91-37323) and Driver (91-37312). Re-
moving bearing will also remove both propeller shaft seals.
91-37323
51264
a - Driver Rod (91-37323)
b - Driver (91-37312)
c - Needle Bearing
d - Seals
4. Apply Super Duty Gear Lu bricant to 0 .0 . of bearing.

5. Install bearing using Mandrel 91-81701 1.
90-857046 AUGUST 199B Page SA-31

NON-BIGFOOT GEA R HOUSING
6 _ Press bearing into carrier until mandrel bottoms on carrier.
L-
H
1--1
~
I,
wr. I(
"l'l,n'\
C!Y
,# ~
~ IQ---j
91-817011
~
I I 52861
H 87 ():D Super Duty Gear Lubricant (92-850737A1)
a - Bearing
b - Mandrel (91-817011)
7 . Apply Loctite 271 to 0 .0. of small diameter seal.

8. With seal lip facing away from large shoulder of Mandrel 91-817007, press seal into car-
rier until mandrel bottoms on carrier.
~
~
'",n'"
~
0 II W
91-817007
~@- (8)
"'" ./
O-Y'~
'!o.
J;l:
t
I
~I
52862
Li:JP Loctit. "27 t " (92-809819)
a - Seal
b - Mandrel (91-817007)
Page 6A-32 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

9. Apply Loctite 271 to O.D. of large diameter seal.

10. With seal lip FACING TOWARDS SMALL SHOULDER of Mandrel 91-817007, press
seal into carrier until mandrel bottoms on carrier.
b ,
~
~\ ~
'J .IIl""
91~~L , -,M LJ
•
II
~~
vY .t ~
-~
J:i
~
I I 52863
[:L::I)J Loctit. "27 t " (92-8098 19)
a - Seal
b - Mandrel (91 -817007)
Installation Note: If service tools are not available, the following refere nce dimensions ap-
ply for installing bearing and seals to proper depths .
.82 in. (20mm)
a - Bea ring
r - - .44 in. (11 mm)
.04 in. (1 mm)
51275
a - Oil Seal (I nstall with Lip Down)

b - Oil Seal (Install with Lip Up)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-33

11 . Bearing carrier a-ring should be inspected for cuts and abrasions.

NOTE: It is a good repair procedure to replace all o-rings and seals regardless of appear-
ance.
12. Apply 2-4-C wfTeflon to 0 .0 . of bearing carrier and also to a-ring. Install a-ring onto bear-
ing carrier.
13. Using suitable mandrel, press reverse gear assembly into carrier.
I
.. . ®
.. ®
I
I 95
,
Jull
///
@
/~ I~
IL dl Ib!
~
I I 52827
[j£D> 2-4-C wrreflon (92-850736A 1)
a - O-ring
b - Mandrel (3/4 in. Socket)
c - Reverse Gear Assembly
Page 6A-34 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Gear Housing Reassembly

IMPORTANT: This gear case assembly does not have have any shims for the gear as-
semblies. Backlash cannot be adjusted. The mechanic must verify that all bearing
races are firmly seated in the gear case during reassembly and that all gear case com-
ponents are in serviceable condition. Prior to installing the seal carrier and water
pump assembly on the drive shaft, the FORWARD gear should be held stationary
(with a screw driver or similar tool). While pulling up on the drive shaft, lightly turn
the shaft back and forth . A light " clicking" sound should be heard indicating the pres-
ence of backlash between FORWARD and PINION gears. If this backlash is not pres-
ent, the pinion gear race and/or forward gear race are not fully seated. Races should
be removed and inspected for debris. Reinstall races and check backlash. If backlash
is still not present, replace gear housing.
Shift Shaft Assembly
1. Apply 2-4·C wn-eflon to new o-rings and install o-rings on shift shaft and carrier.
2. Install carrier on shift shaft.
IMPORTANT: When installing shift shaft assembly into gear housing, 00 NOT BOT-
TOM OUT SHAFT IN HOUSING. Pull up on shift shaft until shift boot is not deformed.
If shaft is bottomed out, cross pin in clutch dog will be bent by cam follower when
tightening carrier bolts.
3. Install shift shatVcarrier assembly into gear housing.
4. Secure boot to carrier with sta-strap.
5. Position shift shaft so ramp faces towards propeller shaft.
5284 1
I[liIt> 2·4·C wfreflon (92-850736A 1)
a - Q-rings
b - Carrier
c - Boot
d - Sta-strap
e - Ramp
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A·35

Pinion Bearing Race

1. Apply Super Duty Gear Lubricant to 0.0. of race.
2. Position race in gear housing (NUMBERS UP - TAPERED SIDE FACING DOWN).
3. Draw race up into housing until seated.
,-::-----------
\
91·3 1229
o @
91·293 10
52842
[iLD::o Super Duty Gear Lubricant (92-850737Al )
a - Threaded Rod (91-31229)

b - Washer(2) (12-34961)
c - Bearing (31-85560)
d - Plate (91-29310)
e - Pilot (91-825199)
f - Nut (11 -24156)
9 - Mandrel (91-825198)
Page 6A·36 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

Forward Gear
1_ Apply Super Duty Gear Lubricant to 0.0. of race . Install forward gear bearing race into
housing using Mandrel 91-36571 and propeller shaft. Use a lead hammer on prop shaft
to prevent damage to threads. Bearing carrier should be installed to keep prop shaft cen-
tered while seating race.
[JI:D::D Super Duty Gear Lubricant (92-850737 A 1)
a • Race
b - Mandrel (91-36571)
NOTE: Remove drain plug/magnet assembly from gear case (if installed) to prevent pos-
sible breakage of magnet if struck by forward gear.
2. Install forward gear and bearing assembly into forward gear race.
a - Forward Gear Assembly
90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Pinion Gear/Drive Shaft Assembly

1. Clean pinion nut and pinion nut threads of drive shaft with Loctite Primer T.
2. Position pinion bearing into race while installing drive shaft and pinion gear into housing.
3. Apply Loctite 271 to pinion nut threads.
4. Install new pinion nut, with rounded corners FAC ING pinion gear, onto drive shaft.
Models Drive Shaft Holding Tool

4-Stroke
Mercury/Mariner 91-83180M
25, 30/40 , and 45/50
2-Stroke
Force
40/50 91-825196
Mercury/Mariner
30/40, 40/50
5. Using Drive Shaft Holding Tool to hold drive shaft, torque pinion nut to 50 Ib-ft (67.8 Nm).
I[LJ:n> Loc!i!e "271" (92-80981~9~)---------/ 52864

a - Pinion Nut (Torque to 50 Ib-ft. (67.8 Nm))
b - Pinion Gear
c - Pinion Bearing
d - Drive Shaft Holding Tool
Page 6A-38 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

Propeller Shaft
1. Slide clutch (short shoulder faces forward gear) over propeller shaft aligning cross pin
hole with slot in propeller shaft.
2. Insert cam follower spring into propeller shaft.
a - Prop Shaft
b - Retaini ng Spring
c - Clutch Dog
d - Cross Pin
e - Cam Follower Spring
f - Cam Follower
3. Using a 3/16 in. allen wrench or similar device, compress the follower spring enough to
insert the cross pin partially through clutch.
4. Remove wrench and press cross pin through clutch and propeller shaft until flush .
52851
b
a - Short Shoulder
b - Allen Wrench
c - Cross Pin
5. Reinstall retaining spring. position spring so as spring coils lay flat in clutch groove.
a - Spring
NOTE: Applying 2-4-C wfTeflon to cam follower wifl aid in retention of fo{fower in propeller
shaft during installation of propeller shaft assembly into gear case.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-39

6. Install cam follower.
52826
[}[rP 2-4-C wlTeflon (92-850736A I)
a - Cam Follower
7. Install propeller shaft assembly into gear case.
52864
a - Propeller Shaft Assembly
Page 6A·40 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Bearing Carrier
1. Install carrier into gear case.
2. Discard the original tab washers or the thin 0.063 in. (1.60 mm) flat washers and the 25
mm long bolts on models listed. Install thicker flat washers and longer bolts.
25 (2 Cylinder - 4 Stroke)
USA OG62t 670 and below
45/50 (4 Cylinder - 4 Stroke) Non Big Foot
USA OG621709 and below
30/40 (2 Cylinder - 2 Stroke)
Belgium . ... NA
40/50 (3 Cylinder - 2 Stroke)
Belgium .. . . NA
Force 40/50 (2 Cylinder - 2 Stroke)
USA OE323508 and below
a
a - Bolt 25 mm Long - Discard

b - Tab Washer - Discard
c - Thin Flat Washer 0.063 in. (1.60 mm) thick - Discard
3. Install thicker flat washers and longer bolts.

a
~ I
111111 1111 1111 1111
~ ~~
a -801t (10-855940-30) 1.18 in. (30 mm) Long
b - Washer (12-855941) 0.090 in. (2.29 mm) Th ick
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-41

NON· BIGFOOT GEAR HOUSING
4. Torque bolts to 225 Ib-in'/18.8 Ib-H (25.4 Nm).
ITD> Loctit. "271" (92-809819)
a - Torque Bolts to 225 Ib-in./18.8 Ib-H. (25 .4 Nm)
Water Pump
1. Install water pump seal carrier.
2. Install exhaust deflector plate. if removed .
a - Seal Carrier
b - Exhaust Deflector
Page 6A-42 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

3. Inslall base gaskel, face plale, pump cover gaskel (NEOPRENE STRIP FAC ES UP),
nylon washer and impeller key.
II
52868
a - Base Gasket
b - Base Plate
c - Cover Gasket
d - Neoprene Strip
e - Nylon Washer
f - Key
IMPORTANT: If impeller being installed has been previously used and vanes havetak-
en a " sel," DO NOT INSTALL THE IMPELLER WITH THE VANES REVERSED FROM
THEIR PREVIOUS " SET" AS VANE BREAKAGE WILL OCCUR SHORTLY AFTER UNIT
IS RETURNED TO SERVICE.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-43

4. Install impeller and nylon washer.
)'
52869
a -Impeller
b - Nylon Washer
NOTE: Apply a light coat of 2-4-C w/ref/on to inside of pump cover to ease instaflation of
cover over impeller.
5. Install pump cover. Rotate drive shaft CLOCKWISE while pressing cover down over im-
peller.
6. Apply Loctite 271 to retaining bolts and torque bolts to 60 Ib-in. (6.8 Nm).
[L:J:P Loctit. "271 " (92-809819)

52830
a - Cover
b - Bolts [Torque to 60 Ib-in . (6.8 Nm)]
Page 6A-44 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Gear Housing Pressure Test

1. Remove vent plug and install pressure test gauge. Tighten securely.
2. Pressurize housing to 10-12 psi (69-83 kPa) and observe gauge for 5 minutes.
3. Rotate drive shaft, prop shaft and move shift rod while housing is pressurized to check
for leaks.
4. If pressure drop is noted immerse housing in water.

5. Re-pressurize to 10-12 psi (69-83 kPa) and check for air bubbles.
6. Replace leaking seals as necessary. Retest housing.
NOTE: It should hold 10-12 psi (69-83 kPa) for 5 minutes.
7. Remove tester from hou sing and install vent plug.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-45

Gear Housing Installation
1. Position shift lever in NEUTRAL gear position.

2. Tilt engine to full "Up" position. Engage tilt lock lever.
3. Shift gear housing into NEUTRAL. Propeller shaft will rotate freely in either direction.
IMPORTANT: Liberally apply 2-4-C Marine Lubricant wrreflon to drive shaft splines.
4. Position drive shaft into drive shaft housing. Move gear housing upwards in drive shaft
housing while aligning both shift shafts, water tube seal and drive shaft splines.
NOTE: If the drive shaft splines will not align with the crankshaft splines, rotate flywheel
slightly while pushing gear housing into drive shaft housing.
5. Instail4 bolts and washers, (two each side). Torque bolts to 40 Ib-h (54.2 Nm).
52836
a - Bolt and Washers (2 each side) [rorque Bolt to 40 Ib-h (54.2 Nm)]
Page 6A-46 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

2-Stroke Models
MERCURY/MARINER 30/40, AND 40/50,
FORCE 40/50
6. Reconnect shift shaft with coupler nut and jam nut. Tighten jam nut against coupler nut.
NOTE: After reconnecting shift shaft, bottom of jam nut should be approximately flush with
top of spray plate.
/ I
~
) ,/ "-
/
~III I
-,,---
©
c
@
~,
52834
a • Coupler Nut
b ·Jam Nut
c • Spray Plate
4-Stroke Models
MERCURY/MARINER 25, 30/40, AND 45/50
7. Connect shift shaft by sliding retainer to the right and snapping into upper "locked" posi·
tion.
a • Retainer
b • Lower Clip
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A·47

8. Install locknut and washer. Torque nut to 40 Ib-h (54.2 Nm).
52833
a - Locknut and Washer [Torque Nut to 40 Ib-h (54.2 Nm))
9. Check shift operation.

8. In NEUTRAL, propeller shaft should turn freely in either direction.
b. In FORWARD, propeller shah SHOULD NOT TURN COUNTERCLOCKWISE.
c. In REVERSE , propeller shah SHOULD NOT TURN IN EITHER DIRECTION.
IMPORTANT: If shift operation Is not as described, remove the gear housing and cor-
rect the shift operation.
Trim Tab Adjustment and Replacement

IMPORTANT: The trim tab is made of a special alloy to aid in protecting the drive shaft
housing and gear housing from galvanic corrosion (corrosion and pitting of metal
surfaces). 00 not paint or place protective coating on the trim tab , or trim tab corro-
sion protection function will be lost.
Replace trim tab if 50% (or more) corroded. Mark location of old trim tab on anti-ventilation
plate before removal ; install new trim tab in same location.
1. Check trim tab position as fonows:
a. Operate boat at the speed at which it would normally be operated.
b. If the boat pulls to the right (starboard) , the trailing edge of trim tab must be moved
to the right. If the boat pulls to the left (port), the trailing edge of trim tab must be
moved to the left.
2. If necessary, adjust trim tab as follows :
a. Shift engine control into NEUTRAL and turn ignition key to "OFP' position.
NOTE: Loosen trim tab bolt sufficiently to allow trim tab to disengage from locking ridges
in gear case before attempting to move tab. DO NOT strike trim tab with a hard object to
make adjustments.
Page 6A·48 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

b. If boat pulls to the left, adjust trailing edge of trim tab to the left. If boat pulls to the
right, adjust trailing edge of trim tab to the right.
52835
a • Trim Tab
b • Anti·Ventilation Plate
c - Retaining Bolt and Washer; Torque Bolt to 15.8 Ib-ft (21.4 Nm)
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6A-49

Filling Gear Housing with Lubricant

NOTE: Gear housing lubricant capacity is approximately 14.9 fI OZ (440 ml).
If gear housing is installed on outboard, disconnect (and isolate) spark

from spark plugs before near the
ACAUTION
Do not use automotive grease in the gear housing. Use only Quicksilver Gear Lube.
1. Remove any gasket material from " FilJ ~ and "Vent" plugs and gear housing. Install new
gaskets on "Fill" and "Vent" plugs.
IMPORTANT: Never add lubricant without removing " Vent" plug. Gear housing can-
not be filled because of trapped air. Fill gear housing when driveshaft is in a vertical
position.
2. Remove "Fill" plug and gasket.
3. Insert lubricant tube in "Fill" hole, then remove "Vent" plug and gasket.
4. Fill until excess lubricant flows out of "Vent" hole.
5. Replace th is "Vent" plug and gasket.
6. Install "Fill" plug and gasket.
[ -..,
1
a - "Vent" Plug
7. Torque "Fill" and "Vent" screws to 55 Ib-in. (6.2 Nm).
Page 6A· 50 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

BIGFOOT GEAR HOUSING
LOWER UNIT
Section 6B - Bigfoot Gear Housing
Table of Contents
Specifications . . .. . .. .. . ... . .. . . . . . . . .. . . 68-1 Reassembly . . . . .... . .... .. . . . .... . . . . . . 68-30

Special Tools .. .. .... .. ................ . 68-2 Forward Gear Bearing Race . .. . .. . . .. . 68-30
Quicksilver Lubricants and Service Aids ... . 68-5 Shift Shaft .................. . . . . . . 68-30
Gear Housing (Drive Shaft) Bearing Carrier Reassembly .. . . . .. . .. . 68-33
(2.31 :1 Gear Ratio) . . ...... . ...... . . . . . .. 68-6 Forward Gear Reassembly ........... . 68-37
Gear Housing (Prop Shaft) Propeller Shaft Reassembly .......... . 68-39
(2.31 :1 Gear Ratio) ..................... . 68-8 Drive Shaft Wear Sleeve Installation ... . 68-40
General Service Recommendations ... . . . . 68-10 Lower Drive Shaft Bearing
Bearings .... . . . . .. . .. ... . . . . . . 68-10 Race Installation . .. . .. . .... .. . . 68-42
Seals .. . .. . ..... .. .... ... . ..... . . .. . 68-10 Oil Sleeve Installation ........ .... .... . 68-43
Draining and Inspecting Gear Lubricant ... . 68-11 Upper Drive Shaft Bearing Installation . . . 68-43
Removal ... .. .. ........... . ........ ... . 68-12 Forward Gear, Lower Drive Shaft Bearing ,
Disassembly . . .. . .. .. . ..... . .... . . . .. .. . 68-13 Pinion Gear, and Drive Shaft Installation . 68-45
Water Pump . . .. ............... .. .. . . 6B-13 Pinion Gear Depth and Forward
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft .... . 68-16 Gear Backlash .................. . ... . 68-46
Pinion Gear, Drive Shaft, and Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft
Forward Gear . .. . ................... . 68-21 Installation . ................ . .. . ..... . 68-51
Upper Drive Shaft Bearing ............ . 68-24 Water Pump Reassembly and Installation 68-53
Oil Sleeve . .. .. .. ................ . . . . 68-25 Gear Housing Pressure Test .... . ..... . 68-56
Lower Drive Shaft Bearing Race . ..... . . 68-26 Filling Gear Housing With Lubricant . . . . .. . 68-57
Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . ... . . 68-27 Gearcase Installation . .. ... .. ... . ..... . . . 68-58
Forward Gear Bearing Race . . . . . . . . . . 68-29 Trim Tab Adjustment . . . . . . ... . .. . . ... . 68-62
Trim Tab Adjustment and Replacement. 68-29
Specifications
Gear Ratio 2.31 :1

Lubricant Type Quicksilver Gear Lube·Premium Blend
Forward Gear
Number of Teeth 30 Spiral/Bevel
Pinion Gear
Number of Teeth 13 SpirallBevel
GEAR HOUSING Pinion Height 0.025 in. (0.64 mm)
BIGFOOT Pinion Gear Locating Tool 91-12349A2
(2.3:1) Flat Number #8
Disc Number #3
Forward Gear Backlash 0.012-0.0 19 in. (0.30-0.48 mm)
Backlash Indicating Tool 91-78473
Mark Number #4
Water Pressure
@ 800 rpm (Idle) 2-4 psi (14-28 kPa)
@ 6000 rpm (WOT) 10-15 psi (69-103 kPa)
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 69· '

Special Tools
1. Pinion Gear Localing Tool (91-12349A2)
55079
2. Bearing Inslallalion Tool (91-13945)
3. Oil Seal Driver (91-13949)
4. Bearing Race Tool (91-14308Al)
5. Bearing Installation (91- 14309Al )
g] [QJ 1:::::I!! !!!!!!!!III!!I!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! I!II!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!I I

6. Wear Sleeve Installation Tool (9 1-14310Al )
Page 68-2 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

7. Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A2)

.
r------ --- .,
8. Mandrel (91-15755)"
73815
9. Backlash Indicator Tool (91-19660--1) 2.07:1 Gear Ratio (1 4/29)
19660-1
10. Mandrel (91-31 106)
11 . Oil Seal Driver (91-31108)
o:ll) )
12. Treaded Rod (91-31229) and Nut (91-24156)"
.lliiiiMII_!iiiiiiiiliiiiiii!ilii«:MIiiil!liilllllilillllmimj[[[iHlmnmmnliffitlllllllilm~mmf,(tiYi
13. Slide Hammer (91-34569A 1)
~========~[blr[~
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68·3
14. Mandrel (91-36569)"
15. Universal Puller Plale (91-37241)
73652
16. Driver Rod (91-37323)"
(J)))))) }
74184
17. Mandrel (91-37350)
18. Puller Jaws (91-46086A 1)
19. Driver Shaft Holding Tool (91-56775, 2-Stroke) (91-817070, 4-Stroke)
20. Dial Indicator (91-58222A 1)
Page 6B-4 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

21. Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473) 2.31:1 Gear Ratio (13/30)
22. Puller Bolt (91-85716)
23. Dial Indicator Adaptor Kit (91-83155)
=
24. Bearing Puller Assembly (91-83165M)
(I @ Q] IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIID ~
25. Bearing Installation Tool (91-856875Al)
=
-
56783
• From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A7)

Part No. Descri ption
92-809819 Loctite ~27 1 "
92-89t 601-' ATV Silicone Sealer
92-850737 A' Super Duty Gear Lubricant
92-850735A 1 Anti-Corrosion Grease
92-850736A 1 2-4-C wfTellon
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68·5

Gear Housing (Drive Shaft)(2.31:1 Gear Ratio)

33 J1l H/ 32 7 4.25INJ107.95MM
30_---u
--z~1 1', <0 0 TORPEDO DIA.
n95 (p>------'~
22
___ tr&!
if'''
!¥'
23 --4"1I 7
~
0
35 ~ ~ '5n
34_tr~
29-~
31-~
~ 36 21
07 (p 25 ~ (
24-4~i§~l: ~1 42
::~ ~\ ~ • 40
12 -J~
11 - 9 I ..- - 3 8
I 1
: 1 11---37
i 10-- 20
~
I I~
i 19
1
"-'-J " I 1
<0 .76
I".J
I
I
13
,~,.---1
18
16 --('!'.~
17--" ,1- - 6
4
6
4
[i:J:l> Loctite "271" (92·809819) 6
5
[!L:::IP Super Duty Gear Lubricant (92-850737 A 1)
[ 95 {;l> 2·4·C wfTefion (92·850736A 1)
Page 68 -6 90-657046 AUGUST 1998

Gear Housing (Drive Shaft)(2.31:1 Gear Ratio)

TOROUE
REF.
NO. OTY. DESCRIPTION Ib-in. Ib-It Nm
- 1 GEAR HOUSING
1 1 GEAR HOUSING ASSEMBLY
2 1 DOWEL PIN (FRONT)
3 1 OI LER TUBE
-
4 2 DRAIN SCREW 60 6.8
5 1 SCREW (MAGNETIC) 60 6.8
6 3 WASHER-Sealing
7 1 DOWEL PIN (REAR)
8 1 TRIM TAB
9 1 SCREW (.437-14 x 1.25) 22 29.8
10 1 WASHER
11 1 CARRIER
-
12 1 NEEDLE BEARING
--
13 2 ANODE
14 1 NUT
- - -
15 1 SCREW (M6 x 40) 6() 6.8
16 1 PINION GEAR (13 TEETH)
17 1 NUT
18 1 SH IFT CAM
19 1 TAPERED ROLLER BEAR ING
20 1 SHIM ASSEMBLY (SIZES 006 THRU 048)
21 1 DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY
22 1 WEAR SLEEVE ASSEMBLY
--
23 1 RING SEAL
- -
24 1 COVER ASSEMBLY
25 1 GASKET
26 1 GASKET
--
27 1 OIL SEAL (LOWER)
28 1 OIL SEAL (UPPER)
29 1 GASKET
30 1 WATER PUMP ASSEMBLY
31 1 FACE PLATE
32 4 SCREW (M6 x 1 x 30) 6() 6.8
33 1 SEAL
34 1 KEY
35 1 IMPELLER
- --
36 6 SC REW 60 6.8
37 1 SHIFT SHAFT ASSEMBLY
38 1 E-RING
39 1 BUSHING ASSEMBLY
40 1 O-RING
41 1 OIL SEAL
--
42 2 SCR EW (M6 x 1) 60 6.8
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68·7

BIGFOOTGEARHOUSI~G (Prop Shaft)(2.31:1
Gear Housmg Gear Ratio) 95MM
4.25 IN.l1 07. IA
TORPEDO D .
, 74
@'
" \73
56
61 62
63
~ 2-4-C
. "27 ' " (92-8098'9)
Lee'".wlTeflon (92-850736A ' )
Page 68-8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(2.31:1 Gear Ratio)

TOROUE
REF.
NO. OTY. DESCRIPTION Ib-In. Ib-It Nm
1 1 GEAR HOUSING ASSEMBLY
43 1 TAPERED ROLLER BEARING ASSEMBLY
44 1 CUP
45 1 FORWARD GEAR (30 TEETH)
46 1 ROLLER BEARING
47 1 CAM FOLLOWER ASSEMBLY
48 3 BALL
49 1 SLIDE
50 1 SPRING
-
51 1 CLUTCH
52 1 CROSS PIN
--
53 1 SPRING
.
54 1 PROPELLER SHAFT
55 1 REVERSE GEAR (30 TEETH)
56 1 BEARING CARRIER ASSEMBLY
57 1 O-RING
58 1 ROLLER BEARING
59 1 OIL SEAL (INNER)
-
60 1 OIL SEAL (OUTER)
61 1 ROLLER BEARING
62 1 THRUST WASHER
63 1 THRUST BEARING
-
64 2 STUD 100 135
65 2 WASHER
66 2 NUT 25 33.9
67 1 SHIM ASSEMBLY (SIZES 006 THRU 038)
68 2 THREAD IN SERT
69 1 DECAL
70 1 THRUST HUB ASSEMBLY
71 1 PROPELLER NUT ASSEMBLY SERVICE ITEMS
72 1 TAB WASHER
73 4 SCREW 40 54 .2
74 4 WASHER
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68-9

General Service Recommendations

There may be more than one way to udisassemble" or ureassemble" a particular part(s) ,
therefore, it is recommended that the entire procedure be read prior to repair.
IMPORTANT: Read the following before attempting any repairs.
In many cases , disassembly of a sub-assembly may not be necessary until cleaning and
inspection reveals that disassembly is required for replacement of one or more components.
Service procedure order in this section is a normal disassembly-reassembly sequence.
Threaded parts are right hand (RH), unless otherwise indicated.
When holding, pressing or driving is required , use soft metal vise jaw protectors or wood
for protection of parts. Use a suitable mandrel (one that will contact only the bearing race)
when pressing or driving bearings.
Whenever compressed air is used to dry a part, verify that no water is present in air line.
Bearings
Ali bearings must be cleaned and in spected. Clean bearings with solvent and dry with com-
pressed air. Air should be directed at the bearing so that it passes through the bearing. DO
NOT spin bearing with compressed air, as this may cause bearing to score from lack of lu-
brication. After cleaning , lubricate bearings with Quicksilver Gear Lubricant. DO NOT lubri-
cate tapered bearing cups until after inspection.
Inspect all bearings for roughness , catches and bearing race side wear. Work inner bearing
race in-and-out, while holding outer race, to check for side wear. When inspecting tapered
bearings, determine condition of rollers and inner bearing race by inspecting bearing cup
for pitting, scoring, grooves, uneven wear, imbedded particles andlor discoloration from
over-heating. Always replace tapered bearing and race as a set.
Inspect gear housing for bearing races that have spun in their respective bores. If race(s)
have spun, gear housing must be replaced.
Roller bearing condition is determined by inspecting the surface of the shaft that the roller
bearing supports. Check shaft surface for pitting scoring , grooving, imbedded particles, un-
even wear andlor discoloration from overheating. The shaft and bearing must be replaced
if such a condition exists.
Seals
AS a normal procedure, all O-rings and oil seals should be replaced without regard to ap-
pearance. To prevent leakage around seals, apply l octite 271 to outer diameter of all metal
case seals. When using Loctite on seals or threads, surfaces must be clean and dry. Apply
2-4-C wfTeflon on ali O-rings and on 1.0. of oil seals. Apply 2-4-C wfTeflon to external sur-
faces of bearing carrier.
Page 68-10 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

Draining and Inspecting Gear Lubricant
If gear housing is on enair,e. i

isolate) spark plug leads from spark near the
1. With gear housing in normal running position , place a clean pan under housing and re-
move the two vent screws and one fill/drain screw (with gaskets) .
-~
~
~
~
~
53922
a - Oil Level Screw
b - Fill/Drain Screw
c - Vent Screw
2. Inspect gear lubricant for metal particles (lubricant w ill have a "metal flake" appearance).
Presence of fine metal particles (resembling powder) on the drain plug bar magnet indi-
cates normal wear. The presence of metal chips on the drain plug bar magnet indicates
the need for gear housing disassembly and component inspection.
3. Note color of gear lubricant. White or cream color MAY indicate presence of water in lu-
bricant. Gear lubricant which has been drained from a gear case recently in operation
will have a yellowish color due to lubricant agitation/aeration. Gear lube which is mixed
with assembly lubricant (Special Lube 101 or 2-4-C w/Teflon) will also be creamy white
in color. This is normal and should not be confused with the presence of water. If water
is suspected to be present in gearcase, a pressure check of gearcase should be made
(with no lubricant in gearcase). Gearcase should hold 10 to 12 psi of pressure for 5 min-
utes without leaking down. Pouring a portion of the gear lubricant into a glass jar and
allowing the lubricant to seUle will allow any water in the lube to separate and seUle to
the bottom of the jar.
4. Presence of water in gear lubricant indicates the need for disassembly and inspection
of oil seals, seal suriaces , O-rings, water pump gaskets as well as gear housing compo-
nents for damage . If gearcase is rebuilt , gearcase shou ld be pressure checked before
filling with lubricant.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68 · 11

Removal
before
1. Remove (and isolate) spark plug leads from spark plugs.
2. Shift engine into forward gear.
3. Tilt engine to full "Up" position.
4. Remove 4 fasteners.
5. Remove locknut and washer.
6. Remove gear housing.
53992
• - Fasteners (2 Each Side)
b - Locknut and Washer
Page 6B-12 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Disassembly
Water Pump
NOTE: If water tube seal stayed on water tube (inside of drive shaft housing) when gear
housing was removed, pull water tube seal from water tube.
1. Replace water tube seal, if damaged.
2. Remove 4 bolts, washers, and isolators.
3. Remove cover.
a
c
a - Water Tube Seal

b • Bolts (4 each)
c - Cover
IMPORTANT: The circular groove formed by the impeller sealing bead should be dis-
regarded when inspecting cover (Step 5) and plate (Step 9), as the depth 01 the groove
will not affect water pump output.
4. Replace cover jf thickness of steel at the discharge slots is 0.060 in. or less, or if
groove(s) (other than impeller sealing bead groove) in cover roof are more than 0.030
in. (0.762 mm) deep.
5. Lift impeller, drive key, and gasket from drive shaft.
a -Impeller
b - Drive Key
---- 1 9220
c - Gasket
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68-13

6. Inspect impeller. Replace impeller if any of the following conditions exist:

• Impeller blade(s) are cracked, torn, or worn.
• Impeller is glazed or melted (caused by operation without sufficient water supply).
• Rubber portion of impeller is not bonded to impeller hub.
7. Remove plate and gasket.
8. Replace plate if groove(s) (other than impeller sealing bead groove) in plate are more
than 0.030 in. (0.762 mm) deep.
c
a
:::
19219
a - Plate
b - Gasket
c -Impeller Sealing Groove
9. Remove bolts and washers.
o
, 0
a - Bolts and Washers (6 each)

-
192 17
Page 68-14 go-857046 AUGUST 1998

10. Remove water pump base.
,
"
\0
n 19226
a - Water Pump Base
11. Remove (and discard) seals.
a - Seals
=============j 19195
12. Remove gasket.
a
-
19218
a - Gasket
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6B-15
I
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft

1. Remove fasteners.
51117
a - Fasteners
2. With propeller shaft horizontal, pull carrier to break seal with gear housing. Remove
bearing carrier/propeller shaft components as an assembly, taking care not to lose cam
follower or 3 metal balls in end of propeller shaft.
3. Remove propeller shaft from bearing carrier.
c
9 I ~,",-,L
"
51116
a - Bearing Carrier
b - Puller Jaws (91-46086A 1)
c - Puller Bolt (91-85716)
d - Thrust Hub
e - Propeller Shaft
Page 68·16 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

4. Lift reverse gear, thrust bearing and thrust washer from bearing carrier.
5. Replace reverse gear if gear teeth or clutch teeth on reverse gear are chipped or worn.
If reverse gear must be replaced, pinion gear and sliding clutch should be inspected for
damage.
6. Replace thrust bearing and thrust washer if rusted or damaged.
t", , ,
c " " ", '
19202
a - Reverse Gear
b - Thrust Bearing
c - Thrust Washer
7. If bearing is rusted or does not roll freely, replace bearing. Remove bearing using Slide
Hammer (91-34569A 1).
= = = =:[[1:1IJ[~
91-34569A1
19205
a - Bearing
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6B-17

8. If bearing is rusted or does not roll freely, replace bearing. Remove bearing and oil seals
using Mandrel' (91-36569) and Driver Rod' (91-37323). Discard oil seals.
NOTE: 'From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (9 1-31229A7)
91-36569
(~lli~W~__________~)1
1
. 9 1-37323 .
51264
a - Bearing
b - Mandrel (91-26569)
c - Driver Rod (91-37323)
9. Remove (if not removed with bearing in Step 9) propeller shaft seals and bearing carrier
O-ring.
51263
a - O-ring
Page 68·18 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

10. Remove sp ring .
51876
a - Spring
11 . Apply constant pressure to cam follower to prevent cam follower assembly from ejecting
from propeller shaft while pushing cross pin out of clutch dog.
o
t b
51600
a - Cross Pin
b • Cam Follower
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68-19

12. Remove components from propeller shaft.

13. Replace cam follower if worn or pitted.
14. Replace sliding clutch if jaws are rounded or chipped. Rounded jaws indicate one or
more of the following:
• Improper shift cable adjustment.
• Engine idle speed too high while shifting.
• Shifting from neutral to reverse (or forward) too slowly.
51265
a - Cam Follower
b - 3 Metal Salls
c - Guide Block
d - Spring
e - Sliding Clutch
f - Jaws
15. Check bearing surfaces of propeller shaft for pitting or wear. If shaft is worn or pitted,
replace shaft and corresponding bearing.
16. Replace propeller shaft if any of the following exist:
• Splines are twisted or worn.
• Oil seal surface is grooved.
• Shaft has a noticeable 'Wobble" or is bent more than 0.009 in. (0.228 mm). Prop
shaft trueness should be measured with a dial indicator with prop shaft on V-blocks.
®
51sn
a - V-Slocks
b - Bearing Surfaces
c - Measure with Dial Indicator at This Point
Page 6B-20 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Pinion Gear, Drive Shaft, and Forward Gear

1. Hold drive shaft using Drive Shaft Holding Tool ; remove (and discard) pinion nut.
Model Drive Shaft Holding Tool

40/45/50 Bigfoot (4-Stroke) 91-56775
60 Bigfoot 91-817070
75/90/100/115/125 91-56775
2. Remove drive shaft, pinion gear, bearing and forward gear.

3. Replace pinion gear if it is chipped or worn .
4. Replace bearing and race if either are rusted or damaged; or if bearing does not roll free·
Iy. To remove race, refer to "Lower Drive Shaft Bearing Race," following .
5. Replace forward gear if gear teeth or clutch teeth are chipped or worn.
1D
o
19175
a - Drive Shaft Holding Tool
b - Pinion Nut
c - Drive Shaft
d - Pinion Gear
e - Bearing
f - Forward Gear
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6B-2 1

6. Replace bearing if it is rusted or does not roll freely; use a punch and hammer to remove
bearing.
19203
a • Bearing
7. Replace forward gear bearing and race if either are rusted or damaged; or if bearing
does not roll freely. Remove bearing from gear using Universal Puller Plate (91·37241)
and mandrel. To remove race, refer to "Forward Gear Bearing Race ," following.
9t-3724t
5 11 19
a - Forward Gear Bearing

b - Universal Puller Plate (9t -3724 t)
c - Mandrel
Page 6B-22 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

8. Replace drive shaft if splines are worn or twisted .

9. If bearing surface is damaged, replace drive shaft and corresponding bearing.
IMPORTANT: Do not tighten vise against drive shaft.
10. If wear sleeve is deeply grooved allowing water to enter gear case, remove (and discard)
sleeve using Universal Puller Plate (91-37241) and mallet.
19710
a • Splines
b - Bearing Surface
c - Wear Sleeve
d - Universal Puller Plale (91 -37241)
e - Mallet
11 . Remove (and discard) rubber ring.
:::J
='-"ll.--\.......lL--------..llL...L-'--''191S2
:
a • Rubber Ring
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 66-23

Upper Drive Shaft Bearing

1. Replace upper drive shaft bearing and sleeve if either are rust stained, or if bearing will
not roll freely. Remove bearing and then sleeve using Puller Assembly (91-S3165M) with
suitable jaws.
91-83165M
a - Upper Drive Shaft Bearing

b - Sleeve
c - Puller Assembly (91-83165M)
IMPORTANT: Upper drive shaft bearing/sleeve must be removed prior to 011 sleeve
removal. Refer to " Upper Drive Shaft Bearing," preceding.
Page 68-24 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Oil Sleeve
1. Remove oil sleeve (if necessary) using Puller Assembly (91-83165M) with suitable jaws.
cw :
[£B
a
I"
----,
, 0
""
I
U
91-83165M
\ \
19222
a - Oil Sleeve
b - Puller Assembly (9 1-83 165M)
IMPORTANT: Upper drive shaft bearing/sleeve and oil sleeve do not have to be re-
moved for lower drive shaft bearing race removal.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68-25

Lower Drive Shaft Bearing Race

IMPORTANT: Retain shim(s) lor reassembly.
1. Remove race and shim(s) using bearing race tool (91- 14308A1).
~
91-14308A1
\
'--..)
I ']
o
19171
a - Race
b - Shim(s)
c - Bearing Race Tool (91-14308A1)
Page 66-26 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

BIGFOOT GEAR HOUS ING
Shift Shaft
1. Remove shift shaft coupler and nylon spacer.
o~
53925
75 Tiller Model Shown

a - Shift Shaft Coupler
b - Spacer
2. Remove bolts.
53926
a - Bolts
NOTE: Gearcase should be in FORWARD for easiest removal of shift shaft.

3. Remove shift shaft bushing and shift shaft.
53927
a - Bushing
b - Shift Shaft
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 66-27

4. Remove shift cam from housing.

5. Replace shift cam if worn.
60 Bigfoot Shown
/,
\
---
a - Shift Cam
NOTE: If shift shaft splines are rough, shift shaft sea/lips will be cut during removaVinstalla -
lion.
S. Remove shift shaft bushing and clip from shift shaft.
7. Replace shift shaft if splines are worn or shaft is twisted.
8. Remove (and discard) a-ring.
, c
a - Bushing
b - Clip
c - Shift Shaft
d - Splines
e - Q-ring
9. Remove (and discard) seal.
o o
a 53929
a • Seal
Page 68·28 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

Forward Gear Bearing Race

IMPORTANT: Retain shim(s) for reassembly. If shims are damaged, replace with new
shims of equal thickness.
1. Remove race and shim(s) using Slide Hammer (91 -34569A 1).
1 L[~
= = = =:[[1:
91-34569A1
a - Race
b - Shim(s)
c - Slide Hammer (9 1-34569A1)
Trim Tab Adjustment and Replacement

IMPORTANT: The trim tab is now painted and does NOT aid in protecting the drive
shaft housing and gear housing from galvanic corrosion (corrosion and pitting of
metal surfaces). Side anodes now provide protection. Do not paint or place protec-
tive coating on the side anodes, or corrosion protection function will be lost.
1. Replace trim'tab if damaged. Mark location of old trim tab on anti·ventilation plate before
removal; install new trim tab in same location.
2. The trim tab provides a means to offset (balance) some of the steering load that is
caused by propeller torque at higher operating speeds. If at higher speeds the boat turns
more easily to the left, loosen bolt, move the trim tab (trailing edge) to the left (when
viewed from behind); retighten bolt. Turn trim tab (trailing edge) to the right if the boat
turns more easily to the right.
c
5393 1
a - Trim Tab
b - Anti-Ventilation Plate
c - Retaining Bolt and Washer; Torque Bolt to 22 Ib·ft (29.8 Nm)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68-29

Reassembly
Forward Gear Bearing Race
1. Place shim(s) (retained from disassembly) into housing. If shim(s) were lost, or a new
gear housing is being assembled, start with 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) shim(s).
2. Assemble components as shown using mandrel (91-31106); Apply 2-4-C wrreflon to
0.0. of race. Drive race into housing by striking propeller shaft end with lead hammer.
\--il~=b--h~ ~
91-31106
[iLl<> 2-4-C wrretlon (92-850736A 1)
a - Shim(s)
b - Race
c - Mandrel (91 -31106)
d - Disassembled Propeller Shaft
e - Assembled Bearing Carrier
Shift Shaft
1. Apply Loctite 271 on 0.0. of new seal.
2. Press seal into shift shaft bushing until seal is seated against shoulder.
3. Install new a-ring.
4. Apply 2-4-C with Teflon on O-ring and I.D. of seal.
7
o 111111
V~~ "® ~
~ Loctite "27 1 ~ (92-809819) 53930
[iLl<> 2-4-C wfTeflon (92-850736A 1)
a - Seal
b - Bushing
c - Surface
d - O-ring
Page 68·30 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

5. Assemble components as shown.
c 53928
a - Shift Shaft
b - "E" Clip
c - Shift Shaft Bushing
6. Install shift cam ; align hole in shift cam with hole in gear housing.
60 Bigfoot 75/90/100/1151125
/
5 1117
a - Shift Cam (marked with "UP" and part number)

b - Gear Housing Hole
60 Bigfoot 75/90/100/115/125
/
5 1117
a - Shift Cam(marked with part number only)
b - Gear Housing Hole
90-857046 AUGUST 1998

40/45/50 Bigfoot (4-Stroke)
a - Shift Cam (Numbers Down)

b - Hole
7. Install shift shaft assembly; insert splines into shift cam.
53932
a - Shift Shaft Assembly

b - Splines
B. Apply Loclile 271 on bottom half of threads of bolts; install bolts and torque to 60 Ib-in.
(6.B Nm).
7
(
I[LJ:t> - "
Loctile "271" (92-809819)
53926
a - BoilS [Torque to 60 Ib-in. (6 .B Nm)]
Page 68·32 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

Bearing Carrier Reassembly

1. Lubricate 0.0. of bearing and bearing carrier bore with Quicksilver 2-4-C wfTeflon.
2. Protect lip on forward side of bearing carrier, using bearing installation tool (91-13945).
3. Press propeller shaft needle bearing (number side toward mandrel 91-15755) into carri-
er, until bearing bottoms out.
91-15755
~ 2-4-C wlTefion (92-850736A1)

2 1042
a - Bearing Installation Tool (91-13945)
b - Mandrel (91-15755)
c - Suitable Driver Rod
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68-33

4. Place smaller diameter seal on longer shoulder of Oil Seal Driver (91-31108) with seal
lip away from shoulder.
5. Protect lip on front side of bearing carrier using Bearing Installation Tool (91-13945) . Ap-
ply Loctite 271 on 0 .0 . of seal. Press seal into carrier until tool bottoms.
91-31 108
9 1- 13945 1:::,-----,;::::.--
[L:D> Loc.i'e "27'" (92-8098 '9) 21040
a - Seal
b - Oil Seal Driver (91-31108)
c - Bearing Installation Tool (91-13945)
6. Place larger diameter seal on shorter shoulder of Oil Seal Driver (9 1-31108) with seal
lip toward shoulder.
7. Protect lip on front side of bearing carrier using Bearing Installation Tool (91-13945). Ap-
ply Loctite 271 on 0 .0 . of new seal. Press seal into carrier until tool bottoms.
21041
H 7 D> Loc.i•• "27 . " (92-8098 ' 9)
a • Seal
b - Oil Seal Driver (91-31108)
c - Bearing Installation Tool (91 -13945)
Page 68-34 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

8. Install O-ring. Lubricate O-ring with 2-4-C wfTeflon. Lubricate seal lips with 2-4-C
wfTeflon.
9. Lubricate outside diameter of reverse gear bearing and bearing carrier bore with a light
coating of 2-4-C wrreflon.
10. Press bearing into carrier until tool bottoms.
95
91-1 3945
19163
[jLD> 2-4-C wfTefion (92-850736A t)
a • O-ring
b - Bearing. Numbered Side Toward Tool
c - Bearing Installation Tool (91-13945)
11 . Install thrust washer. Coat thrust washer with Super Duty Gear Lubricant.
87
19167
[jLtn Super Duty Gear Lubricant (92-S50737Al)
a - Thrust Washer
90-857046 AUGUST 1996 Page 68-35

12. Install thrust bearing. Coat thrust bearing with Super Duty Gear Lubricant.
19168
m 87 (P Super Duty Gear Lubricant (92-850737 A 1)
a ~ Thrust Bearing
13. Apply Super Duty Gear Lubricant to bearing surface of reverse gear and install reverse
gear.
19202
[!L::IP Super Duty Gear Lubricant (92-850737 A 1)

a ~ Reverse Gear
b - Bearing Surface
Page 68-36 90-857046 AUGUST 1996

Forward Gear Reassembly

1. Press bearing onto gear using mandrel 9 1-37350 (press only on inner race of bearing) .
a
b
91-37350
51869
[jLI:P 2-4-C wfTeflon (92-850736A 1)
a - Mandrel (9 1-37350)
b • Bearing ; Lubricate 1.0 . with Quicksilver 2-4-C wrreflon
2. Inspect reverse gear end of clutch to determine the number of jaws. Refer to chart, fol-
lowing , for tool end selection.
Model Installation End Bearing Position

Tool Stamped
3 Jaw Reverse 9 1-856875 3 0 .155 in. (3.94mm)
Clutch below surface
6 Jaw Reverse 91-856875 6 Flush with surface
Clutch
3 Jaw Reverse Clutch
56783
a - Stamped "3"
b - Numbered end of Needle Bearing
c · 3 Jaw Reverse Clutch
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6B-37

6 Jaw Reverse Clutch
56784
a - Stamped "6"
b - Numbered end of Needle Bearing
c - 6 Jaw Reverse Clutch
3. Apply Quicksilver gear lubricant to 1.0. of forward gear. Press bearing into forward gear
until tool contacts gear.
56785
[jiD> Quicksitver Gear Lu bricant (92- 19007A24)
a - Forward Gear Bearing Instatier (91-856875)

b - Needle Bearing, Numbered Side Toward Installer Tool
Page 68-38 go-857046 AUGUST 1998

Propeller Shaft Reassembly

1. Install components into propeller shaft in sequence shown.
19154
a - Spring
b - Guide Block
c - 3 Metal Balls"
d - Cam Follower·
*Hold in Place With Quicksilver 2-4-C wffeflon
2. Install cross pin.
51800
a - Apply Pressure in This Direction
b - Cross Pin
3. In stall spring. DO NOT overlap springs.
51876
a - Spring
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68-39

Drive Shaft Wear Sleeve Installation

1. Install new rubber ring .
2. Apply a light coat of Loctite 271 on outside diameter of rubber ring .
19152
7 Loctit. "271 " (92-809819)

a - Ring
3. Insert sleeve into holder·.

"Component of Wear Sleeve Installation Tool (91-14310Al).
>------(3
/{ ~\
/
(
19169
a - Sleeve
b "Holder
Page 66-40 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

4. Press sleeve onto drive shaft using Wear Sleeve Instaliation Tool (91-1431 OA 1); contin-
ue pressing until surface contacts surface.
~ eJ
91-14310A1
a
b
19166
a - Drive Shaft
b - Wear Sleeve Instaliation Tool (91-14310A1)
c ~ Surface
d - Sunace
5. Remove excess Loctite from assembled shaft.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68-4 1

Lower Drive Shaft Bearing Race Installation

IMPORTANT: Lower drive shaft bearing cup can be installed with or without upper
drive shaft bearing/sleeve and oil sleeve Installed.
1. Lubricate 0.0. of bearing race with Quicksilver 2·4·C wfTeflon.
2. Install shim(s) and bearing race into housing.
NOTE: Verify shim(s) are not cocked when drawing up race.
a c
~
b 9,.,4310A1
9S
[jLD> 2·4·C wffellon (92·850736A I ) 53933
a - Shim(s); Retained From Disassembly. If Shim(s) Were Lost or a New Gear

Housing is Being Assembled , Start With 0.025 in. (0.635 mm) Shim(s)
b - Bearing Race
c - Mandrel" (13780)
d -Mandrel" (13781)
e - Threaded Rod" " (91-31229)
I - Nut"" (11·24156)
"From Bearing Installation Tool (9,., 4309A 1)
"From Bearing Removal and Instaliation Kit (91-31229A7)
Page 68·42 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Oil Sleeve Installation

1. Install oil sleeve with tab positioned as shown.
53934
a - Oil Sleeve
b - Tab
Upper Drive Shaft Bearing Installation

1. Lubricate I.D. of bearing holder and 0 .0 . of bearing with 2-4-C w/Teflon .
2. Press bearing into sleeve using mandrel from bearing installation tool (91-14309A1).
d
91- 13781
c
[iLl> 2-4-C wrreflon ( 2-850736A 1) 19164
a - Bearing Sleeve
b - Tapered End
c - Bearing; Numbered Side Toward Mandrel
d - Mandrel (91-13781); From Bearing Installation Tool (91-14309A 1)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68-43

IMPORTANT: 011 sleeve must be installed prior to upper drive bearing installation.
IMPORTANT: Upper drive shaft bearing/sleeve can be Installed with or without lower
drive shaft bearing cup installed.
3. Install bearing/sleeve into housing.
91-14310Al
a • Bearing/Sleeve
b - Tapered End
c - Mandrel' (13781)
d - Mandrel' (13780)
e - Threaded Rod " (91·31229)
I - Nut" (11·24156)
'From Bearing Installation Tool (91-14309Al)
"From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A7)
Page 68·44 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Forward Gear, Lower Drive Shaft Bearing, Pinion Gear, and Drive Shaft
Installation
1. Install components in sequence shown.
19175
liJP Loclil. "271 " (92-809819)
~ Super Duty Gear Lubricant (92-850737A1)
Model Drive Shalt Holding Tool

40/45/50 Bigfoot (4-Stroke) 91-56775
60 Bigfoot 91-817070
75/9011 0011151125 91-56775
a - Forward Gear/Bearing: Work Quicksilver gear lube into bearing rollers.
b - Lower Drive Shaft Tapered Roller Bearing : Work Super Duty Gear Lube into
bearing rollers .
c - Pinion Gear
d - Drive Shaft
e - Drive Shaft Holdi ng Tool
f "Pinion Nut (New): Apply Loctite 271 to threads during final assembly (after pin-
ion gear depth and forward gear backlash have been set), torque to 70 Ib-ft.
(95 Nm)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68·45

Pinion Gear Depth and Forward Gear Backlash

DETERMINING PINION GEAR DEPTH
NOTE: Read entire procedure before attempting any change in shim thickness.
IMPORTANT: Forward gear assembly must be installed in gear housing when check-
ing pinion gear depth or an Inaccurate measurement will be obtained.
1. Clean the gear housing bearing carrier shoulder and diameter.
2. With gear housing positioned up right (drive shaft vertical), install Bearing Preload Tool
(91-143 11 A2) over drive shaft in sequence shown.
a - Adaptor: Bearing surfaces clean and free of e - Nut: Threaded all-the-way onto bolt
nicks f - Bolt: Held snug against spring
b - Thrust Bearing: Oiled and able to move freely g - Sleeve: Holes in sleeve must align with set
c - Thrust Washer: Clean and free of nicks and screws
bends h - Set Screw (2): TIghlened against drive shaft,
d - Spring bolt should not slide on drive shaft.
3. Measure distance between top of nut and bottom of bolt head.

4. Increase distance by 1 in. (25.4 mm).
5. Rotate drive shaft 5 to 10 revolutions. This should properly seat drive shaft tapered roller
bearing.
19884
a - 1 in. (25.4 mm)

b - Nut
c - Bolt Head
Page 68-46 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

6. Assemble Pinion Gear Locating Tool (9 1 ~ 1 2349A2) as shown; do not tighten collar retain~
ing bolt at this time .
a - Arbor d - Split Collar

b - Gauging Block; Install With Numbers Away e - Bolt; Collar Retaining
From Split Coilar f - Snap Ring
c - Bolt; Gauging Block Retaining
7. Insert tool into forward gear assembly; position gauging block under pinion gear as
shown.
22067
a ~ Gauging Block
8. Remove tool , taking care not to change gauging block position, and tighten collar retain-
ing bolt.
9. Insert tool into forward gear assembly; position proper numbered flat (from chart) of
gauging block - under pinion gear.
MODEL GEAR RATIO (PINION GEAR

USE FLAT NO. LOCATING DISC NO.
TEETHIREVERSE GEAR TEETH)
40/45/50 Bigfoot (4-stroke) 2.31:1 (13130) 8 3
60 BigfooV60 Seapro/60 2.31:1 (13/30) 8 3
Marathon
75-thru-90 2.31:1 (13/30) 8 3
(3 Cylinder)
100/1151125 2.07:1 (14/29) 2 3
(4 Cylinder)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68-47

10. Install locating disc against bearing carrier shoulder in gear housing.
11 . Position access hole as shown.
a - Locating Disc
b - Access Hole
12. Determine pinion gear depth by inserting a feeler gauge thru access hole in locating
disc.
13. The correct clearance between gauging block and pinion gear is 0.025 in. (0.64 mm).
14. If clearance is correct, leave Bearing Preload Tool on drive shaft and proceed to ~De t er
mining Forward Gear Backlash ,H following.
15. If clearance is incorrect, add (or subtract) shims from above bearing race to lower (or
raise) pinion gear. When reinstalling pinion nut, apply Loctite 271 on threads of nut.
ILiJl> Loctit. "271" (92-809819) 24643
a - Feeler Gauge
b • Gauging Block
c - Pinion Gear
d - Bearing Race
90·857046 AUGUST 1998

DETERMINING FORWARD GEAR BACKLASH

NOTE: Read entire procedure before attempting any change in shim thickness.
1. Obtain correct pinion gear depth; refer to ~ Determining Pinion Gear Depth," preceding.
2. Install Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A2) on drive shaft; refer to ~ Determining Pinion
Gear Depth: preceding.
3. Install components as shown.
IIQJI u
,
8
53936
8 ,
a - Propeller ShaW
b - Bearing Carrier- (Assembled)
c - Puller Jaws (9 t -46086A 1)
d - Puller Bolt (91-85716); Torque to 45 Ibs-in. (5.0 Nm)
-Refer to wBearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft Installation ," following .
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 66·49

4. Rotate drive shaft 5 to 10 revolutions. This should properly seat forward gear tapered
rolier bearing.
5. Install components as shown.
51117
a - Threaded Rod (Obtain Locally)

b - Washers
c - Nuts
d - Oiallndicator Adaptor Kit (91-83155)
e - Oiallndicator (91-58222A 1)
f - Backlash Indicator Tool
6. Position Dial Indicator on appropriate line (from chart) marked on Backlash Indicator
Tool.
BACKLASH INDICATOR ALIGN POINTER OF DIAL INDICATOR

MODEL
TOOL WITH MARK
40/45/ 50 Bigloot
91-78473 4
(4-Stroke)
SO Seapro/SO Mara-
91-78473 4
than/SO Bigfoot
75-thru-90
91-78473 4
(3 Cylinder)
10011151125
91-19S60--1 1
(4 Cylinder)
Page 68-50 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

7. lightly turn drive shaft back-and-forth (no movement should be noticed at propeller
shaft).
8. Dial Indicator registers amount of backlash , which must be between specification shown
in chart.
MODEL DIAL INDICATOR MINIMUM READING MAXIMUM

40/45/50
0.012 in. 0.019 in.
Bigloot
(0.30 mm) (.48 mm)
(4-Stroke)
0.012 in. 0.019 in.
60 Bigfoot
(0 .30 mm) (.48 mm)
75-thru-90 0.012 in. 0.019 in.
(3 Cylinder) (0.30 mm) (.48 mm)
100/115/125 0.Q15 in. 0.022 in.
(4 Cylinder) (0.38 mm) (0.55 mm)
9. If backlash is less than the minimum specification, remove shim(s)· from in front of for-
ward gear bearing race to obtain correct backlash. When reinstalling pinion nut, apply
Loctite 271 on threads of nut.
10. If backlash is more than the maximum specification , add shim(s)· in front of forward gear
bearing race to obtain correct backlash. When reinstalling pinion nut, apply Loctite 271
on threads of nut.
• By adding or subtracling 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) shim, Ihe backlash will change
approximately 0.001 in. (.025 mm).
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft Installation

1. Insert propeller shaft assembly into bearing carrier.
2. Before installing bearing carrier assembly into gear housing, obtain locally a 6 in. (152.4
mm) long by 1-1 /4 in. - 1-1 /2 in. (31 .7 - 38.1 mm) diameter piece 01 PVC pipe. Inslall
the PVC pipe overthe prop shaft and secure the pipe against the bearing carrier assem-
bly with the propeller nut and tab washer. This will allow the reverse gear to apply pres-
sure to the reverse gear thrust bearing to prevent the thrust bearing from being inadver-
tently dislodged as the bearing carrier assembly is installed in the gear housing.
e 21043
a - Bearing Carrier Assembly

b - PVC Pipe
e - Propeller Nut
d - Prop Shaft
e - Tab Washer
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68-51

3. Lubricate O-ring and mating surfaces with 2-4-C wfreflon .

4. Install bearing carrier and propeller shaft into housing with the word "TOP" located on
flange toward top of housing.
[iLD> 2-4-C wlTeflon (92-850736A 1)

a - O-ring
b -TOP
NOTE: Use thick 0.090 in. (2.29mm) washers (12-85594 1) under fasteners if not previously
installed.
Washer Thickness Fastener Torque

0.090 in. (2.29mm) 22 lb. ft. (29.8 N·m)
0.060 in. (1.53mm) 25 lb. ft. (33.9 N·m)
a - Washers
b - Fasteners (If using Bolts - Apply Locti!e 271 on Threads)
Page 68·52 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Water Pump Reassembly and Installation

1. Place upper seal on longershoulder side of Oil Seal Driver (91-13949) with seal lip away
from shoulder.
2. Apply Loctite 271 on 0 .0 . of seal; press seal into water pump base until tool bottoms.
9 1-13949
=
a
51553
~ Loc!i!. "271" (92-809819)

a - Seal - Lip Faces Toward Power Head
b - Spring - Faces Toward Power Head
c - Oil Seal Driver (91- 13949)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68-53

3. Place lower seal on shorter shoulder side of Oil Seal Driver (91-13949) with seal lip to-
ward shoulder.
4. Apply Loctite 271 on 0 .0 . of seal; press seal into water pump base until tool bottoms.
5. Lubricate lip of each seal with Quicksilver 2-4-C wfTeflon (92-825407A12).
91-13949
a b
li=Ito Loctite "271 " (92-809819) ' - - - - ----;;

51553
Lri=P' 2-4-C wfTefion (92-850736A 1)

a - Seal - Lip Faces Toward Gear Case
b - Spring - Faces Toward Gear Case
c - Oil Seal Driver (91-13949)
6. Install gasket.
192 18
a - Gasket
Page 68-54 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

7. Install components as shown. Apply Loctite 271 on bottom half of threads
19217
r--
li=Jfl Loctit. "271" (92-809819)
a - Water Pump Base
b - Bolts and Washers; Torque to 60 Ib-in. (6.8 Nm)
8. Install gasket and plate.
a - Gasket
b - Plate
IMPORTANT: If the old impeller will be re-used, impeller must be installed in original
(clockwise) direction of rotation .
9. Install gasket, drive key and impeller.
=
19220
a - Gasket
b - Drive Key
c - Impeller
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68-55

BIGFOOT GEAR HOUSiNG
10. Lubricate LO. of cover with Quicksilver 2-4-C wlTeflon.

11. Rotate drive shaft clockwise and push cover down over impeller.
12. Install cover.
13. If water tube seal stayed on water tube (inside of drive shaft housing) when gear housing
was removed , pull water tube seal from water tube.
14. Lubricate LO. of water tube seal with Quicksilver 2-4-C wlTefion and install as shown.
95
19212
~'lc....l : •
[iLD> 2-4-C wlTellon (92-850736A I )
a - Cover
b • Seal
c • Bolts (4); Apply Loctite 271 on Threads and Torque to
60 Ib·in. (6.8 Nm)
NOTE: It;s recommended that the gearcase be pressure tested for leaks after reassembly
and BEFORE gear lube is added. Gearcase should hold 10 to 12 psi (69-83 kPa) for 5 min-
utes.
Gear Housing Pressure Test
1. Remove vent plug and install pressure test gauge.
Page 68-56 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

2. Pressu rized housing to 10 to 12 psi (69-83 kPa) and observe gauge for 5 minutes.
3. Rotate drive shaft, prop shaft and move shift shaft while housing is pressurized to check
for leaks.
4. If pressure drop is noted, immerse housing in water.

5. Re-pressurize to 10 to 12 psi (69-83 kPa) and check for ai r bubbles.
6. Replace leaking seals as necessary. Retest housing.
NOTE: Gearcase should hold 10 to 12 psi (69-83 kPa) for 5 minutes.
7. Remove tester from housing and install vent plug.
Filling Gear Housing With Lubricant

NOTE: Gear housing lubricant capacity is 22.5 fI oz (665.2 ml).
installed on engine, to
leads from near the
ACAUTION
00 not use automotive grease in the gear housing. Use only Quicksilver Gear Lube
or Quicksilver Super-Duty Lower Unit Lubricant.
1. Remove any gasket material from "Fill" and ''Vent'' screws and gear housing.
2. Install new gaskets on "Fill" and "Vent" screws.
IMPORTANT: Never apply lubricant to gear housing without first removing " Vent"
screws or gear housing cannot be filled because of trapped air. Fill gear housing only
when housing is in a vertical position.
3. Remove lubricant "Fill" screw and gasket from gear housing.
4. Insert lubricant tube into "Fill" hole, then remove "Vent" screws and gaskets.
5. Fill gear housing with lubricant until excess starts to flow out of one (first) "Vent" screw
hole.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6B-57

BIGFOOT GEAR HOUS ING
6. Replace this lubricant "Vent" screw and gasket only and continue filling until excess
starts to flow out of second lubricant "Vent" screw hole.
b
53922
a - Vent Screw - Torque to 60 Ib-in. (6.8 Nm)

b - Fili/Drain Screw - Torque to 60 Ib-in. (6.8 Nm)
c - Oil Level Ve nt Screw - Torque to 60 Ib-in . (6.8 Nm)
7. Replace second lubricant "Vent" screw and gasket.

IMPORTANT: Do not lose more than one fluid ounce (30cc) of gear lubricant while re-
installing " FILL" screw.
8. Remove lubricant tu be from "Fill" hole; install "Fill" screw and gasket.
Gearcase Installation
i i spark plug leads from spark plugs before installing gear

housing onto drive shaft housing. Failure to follow this warning could result in acci-
dental engine starting and possible injury.
1. Position outboard shift linkage into forward gear position.
Models 40/45/50 Bigfoot (4-Stroke)
Remote Control Model Shown

a - Shift Lever
Page 68-58 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

BIGFOOT GEAR HO US ING
Models 60 Bigfoot
a - Shift Block
Models 75/90/100/1 151125
19679
a - Shift Block; Front of Block MUST Extend 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) Past Front of Rail.
b - Rail
2. Tilt engine to fu ll up position and engage tilt lock leve r.

3. Shift gear housi ng into neutral position. Propeller shaft will rotate freely in either direc-
tion.
4. Install water tube seal ; lube I.D . of seal with Quicksilver 2-4-C wffeflon.
5. Apply a bead of RTV Sealer as shown.
95
~ RTV Silicone Sealer (92-91601 -1)

~ 2-4-C wfTeflon (92-850736A 1)
a - Water Tube Seal
b - RTV Sealer
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 68-59

ACAUTION
Do not use lubricant on top of drive shaft. Excess lubricant, that is trapped in clear·
ance space, will not allow drive shaft to fully engage with crankshaft. Subsequently,
tightening the gear housing fasteners (while lubricant is on top of drive shaft) will
load the drive shaft/crankshaft and damage either or both the power head and gear
housing. Top of drive shaft is to be wiped free of lubricant.
6. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C wfTeflon onto drive shaft splines.
7. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver2-4-C wfTeflon on gear case shift shaft splines and upper
shift shaft splines. Do not use lubricant on ends of shift shafts.
8. Install components as shown in appropriate photo.
ALL EXCEPT 75 W/MECHANICAL REVERSE LOCK
a ~ Nylon Spacer
b - Shift Shaft Coupler
c - Bushing 40/45/50 Bigfoot (4-Stroke) Only
75 W/MECHANICAL REVERSE LOCK
53925
a ~ Nylon Spacer
b - Shift Shaft Coupler
c - Flat; MUST BE Positioned Toward Front of Gear Housing
Page 68-60 90-657046 AUGUST 1998

9. Shift gear housing into forward gear position. In forward gear the gear housing will ratch-
et when propeller shaft is turned clockwise. Resistance wi ll be felt when propeller shaft
is rotated counterclockwise.
10. Apply Loctite Grade 271 on threads of gear housing retaining bolts.
NOTE: If, while performing Step 11, the drive shaft splines will not align with the crankshaft
splines, place a propeller onto propellershaft and turn it counterclockwise as the gear hous-
ing is being pushed toward drive shaft housing.
NOTE: During installation of gear housing, it may be necessary to move the shift block (lo-
cated under cowl) slightly to align upper shift sha ft splines with shift shaft coupler splines.
11 . Position gear housing so that the drive shaft is protruding into drive shaft housing.
12. Move gear housing up toward drive shaft housing, while aligning upper shift shaft
splines with shift shaft coupler splines , water tube with water tube seal , and crank shaft
splines with drive shaft splines.
13. Install 4 fasteners and washers (two each side).
14. Install locknut and washer.
15. Torque bolls and locknut (or nuts only if applicable) to 40 Ib-ft (54.0 Nm).
53922
~ Locm. "271" (92-8098 1") L_--"
a - Fasteners and Washers (2 Each Side)
b - Locknut and Washer
16. Check shift operation as follows:

• Place shift lever in forward gear. Gear housing should ratchet when propeller shaft is
turn ed clockwise. Resistance should be felt when propeller shaft is turned counter-
clockwise.
• Place shift lever in neutral. Propeller shaft should rotate freely in either direction.
• While rotating propeller shaft, place shift lever in reverse gear. Resistance should be
felt when propelle r shaft is rotated in either direction.
IMPORTANT: If shift operation is not as described, preceding, the gear housing must
be removed and the cause corrected.
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 6B-61

Trim Tab Adjustment

1. Check trim tab position as follows:
• Operate boat at the speed at which it normally would be operated.
• If the boat pulls to the right (STARBOARD). the trailing edge of trim tab must be
moved to the right. If the boat pulls to the left (PORT). the trailing edge of trim tab
must be moved to the left.
2. If necessary, adjust trim tab as follows:
• Shift engine control into NEUTRAL and turn ignition key to "OFF" position.
NOTE: Loosen trim tab bolt sufficiently to allow trim tab to disengage from locking ridges
in gear case before attempting to move tab. DO NOT strike trim tab with a hard object to
make adjustments.
• If boat pulls to the left, adjust trailing edge of trim tab to the left. If boat pulls to the
right, adjust trailing edge of trim tab to the right.
3. Tighten trim tab retaining bolt and washer to 22 Ib-ft (29.8 Nm).
Page 68-62 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

THAOTIlElSHIFT LINKAGE
ATTACHMENTS/CONTROL LINKAGE
Section 7A - Throttle/Shift Linkage
Table of Contents
Linkage (Non Bigfoot) . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . . . . . 7A-2 Shift Cable Installation ......... • . . .. • . ... 7 A-6
Linkage (Bigfoot) .. . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . . . . 7 A-4 Throttle Cable Installation ........... • .... 7A-a
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 7A-l

THROTTLEISHIFTL1NKA~ON BIGFOOT)
LINKAGE (
7
9 \
\~
[i~
17 16'\.\
18 \ , \b
~®
\
15
/'
/'
/'
/'
/'
/'
/'
/'
/'
/'
/'
/' 20
« ".rf
I
I
~,
29
27"
L-~ /, ~."Y' 28 \~_::

19 ~"ll
[]UP 2- 4 -C WlTefion (92-850736A 1)
Page 7A-2 90-857046 AU GUST 1998

THRQTTLE/SHIFT LINKAGE
LINKAGE (NON BIGFOOT)

TORQUE
REF.
1 1 SCREW (M8 x 70) 100 11.3
2 1 SCREW (M6 x 55)
3 1 NUT ELECTRIC
4 1 CAP
5 1 RETAINER
6 1 THROTILE LEVER
7 1 BUSHING
8 1 RETAINER
9 1 SHIFT LEVER
10 1 BRACKET NON HANDLE
11 1 LATCH
12 2 SCREW (M6 x 16) 75 8.5
13 2 SLEEVE
14 1 SHIFT ROD
15 1 THROTILECAM
16 1 SPACER
17 1 WASHER
18 1 SCREW (M5 x 16) 75 8.5
19 1 HORIZONTAL SHIFT SHAFT
20 1 RETAINER
21 1 WASHER
22 1 COTIERPIN
23 1 SPRING
24 2 SPRING
25 1 PLATE
26 2 SCREW (M5 x 16)
27 1 SWITCH
28 2 SCREW (M3 x 20) ELECTRIC HANDLE MODELS
29 1 PLATE-Switch
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 7A-3

THROTTLEISHIFT LINKAGE
LINKAGE (BIGFOOT)
2 6
"
~"3~ "
a 8
I
\ ~
\~o
29
21 -----
/
14 ~\
17
~ ®~
/ I 24
26 25 23
f"15J)::D 2-4-C wfTeflon (92-850736A 1)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998

THROTTlElSHIFT LINKAGE
LINKAGE (BIGFOOT)
TORQUE
REF.
1 1 SCREW (M8 x 70) 100 11.3
2 1 SC REW (M6 x 55)
3 1 NUT
4 1 CAP
5 1 RETAINER
6 1 THROTTLE LEVER
7 1 BUSHING
8 1 RETAINER
9 1 SHIFT LEVER
10 1 BRACKET
11 1 LATCH
12 2 SCREW (M6 x 16) 75 8.5
--
13 2 SLEEVE
--
14 1 SH IFT ROD
15 1 GUiDE-Shift Rod
16 1 SHIFT LIN K
17 2 NYLINER
18 2 WASHER
19 1 NUT
20 1 COTTER PIN
21 1 SH IFT SHAFT LEVER
22 1 BUSHING
23 1 THROTTLE CAM
24 1 SPACE R
25 1 WASHER
26 1 SCREW (M5 x 16) 75 8.5
27 1 SWIVEL LINKAGE (MANUAL BIGFOOT)
28 1 SHIFT ROD (MANUAL BIGFOOT)
29 1 SHIFT ROD (MANUAL BIGFOOT)
30 1 SHIFT DETENT (MANUAL BIGFOOT)
31 1 SP RING (MANUAL BIGFOOT)
32 1 SWITCH ELECTRIC
1"3 1 PLATE-Switch HANDLE MODELS
34 2 SC REW 1M3 x 20)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 7A-5

THROTTLEJSHIFT LINKAGE
Shift Cable Installation

Install cables into the remote control following the instructions provided with the remote con-
trol.
NOTE: Install the shift cable to the engine first. The shift cable is the first cable to move when
the remote control handle is moved out of neutral.
•
2. Shift outboard into neutral.
3. Measure the distance between pin and center of lower hole.
I II II I I II II I I I
,10 I, ,10 I, , I, I, 01 01, 01, 10 , I 01, .I, I, .1,1, ,I , I , ,1,1 ,
'---@
a • Distance Between Pin And Center of Lower Hole

b - Pin
c - Lower Hole
4. Fit shift cable through rubber grommet.
Page 7A-6 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

5. Push in on the cable end until resistance is felt.
J:@;o~E===innm"""~
6. While pushing in on the cable end, adjust the cab le barrel to attain the measured dis-
tance taken in Step 3.
1:::::1.:.::1:::::1::::.1:::::1.,'.',.1:::::1 .•'::.1:::::1,::::1
a - Adjust Cable Barrel To Attain The Measured Distance Taken In Step 3

b - Cable Barrel
7. Place cable barrel into the barrel holder. Fasten cable with retainer.
a - Place Barrel Into Barrel Holder

b - Retainer
8. Check shift cable adjustments as follows :

a. Shift remote control into forward . The propeller shaft should be locked in gear. If not,
adjust the barrel closer to the cable end.
b. Shift remote control into neutral. The propeller shaft should turn freely without drag.
If not, adjust the barrel away from the cable end. Repeat steps a and b.
c. Shift remote control into reverse wh ile turning propeller. The propeller shaft should
be locked in gear. If not, adjust the barrel away from the cable end. Repeat steps a
thru c.
d. Shift remote control back to neutral. The propeller shaft should turn freely without
drag. If not, adjust the barrel closer to the cable end. Repeat steps a thru d. 8
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 7A-7
i
j
Throttle Cable Installation

•
2. Fit throttle cable through rubber grommet.
3. Install throttle cable with retainer pin. Lock retainer pin in place.
Page 7A-8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

4. Adjust the th rottle cable barrel until a 1/16 in . (1.6 mm) gap exists between the oval
shaped boss and the cam. .
/--::::::..21~
/1~6~in~. (1.6 mm)
a - Throttle Cable
b • Retainer Pin
c - Throttle Cable Barrel
d - Oval Shaped Boss
e - Cam
5. Fasten control cables with the cable latch.

'fJ I
/
/..i..!;
I
IMPORTANT: After installation, move the remote control handle a few times from the
neutral position to the wide-open-throttle position in forward gear. Check for the spe-
cified gap between the oval shaped boss and the throttle cam. If necessary, readjust
the barrel.
90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 7A·9

TILLER HANDLE
ATTACHMENTS/CONTROL LINKAGE
Section 78 - Tiller Handle
Table of Contents
Ti11er Handle ........................ . .. . 78·2 Cleaning/Inspection/Repair .. . . ..•.... . . . 78-8
Ti11er Handle Assembly Removal ...... . . . . 78·4 Ti11er Handle Reassembly . ......•........ 78-9
Tiller Handle Disassembly ............ . .. . 78-6 Ti11er Handle Installation .. . .... .. . ....... . 78-13
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 78-1

TILLER HANDLE
TILLER HANDLE
40
/
«<19
Chemtool Duralub eSpecial (92-82450 1)
Page 78-2 90-857046 A UGUST 1998

TILLER HANDLE
TILLER HANDLE
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb . in. lb. ft. N·m
1 1 COVER KIT
2 1 PULLEY
3 1 CASE
4 1 SCREW (10-16 x 112 IN. Self Tapping) 20 2.3
5 1 THROTTLE CABLE (30-112 IN.)
6 1 THROTTLE CABLE (41-112 IN.)
7 1 SLEEVE
8 2 SCREW (M8 x 25) 135 15.3
9 1 COVER
10 1 BUSH ING
11 1 ARM- Steering Handle
12 1 RETAINER
13 1 SC REW (M5 x 16) (MANUAL) 35 3.9
14 1 SCREW (M6 x 25)
15 1 LOCK-Throttle
16 1 SPRING
17 1 KNOB-Throttle
18 1 TILLER TUBE
19 1 DECAL
20 1 HANDLE Throttle
21 1 GRIP
22 1 SWITCH (STOP)
23 1 SCR EW (M5 x 12)(MANUAL)
24 1 WASHER (MANUAL)
25 1 ALARM (MANUAL)
26 2 CLIP
27 1 SWITCH (STOP)
28 1 RETAINER
29 1 BRACKET Tiller
30 1 WAVE WASHER
31 1 BUSHING
32 1 WASHER
33 1 CONDUIT
34 1 CABLE TIE
35 1 DECAL-Shift (F-N-R)
36 1 LANYARD SWITCH
37 1 SCREW (MB x 35) 100 , 1.3
38 1 SHIFT HANDLE
39 1 BUSHING
40 1 SHIFT ROD
41 1 TAB WASHER
42 2 SCREW (Ml0 x 90)
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 78-3

TILLER HANOLE
Tiller Handle Assembly Removal

1. Remove lower cowl.
•
a - Screws-M6x30 (6)
b - Screw-M6x60
2. Remove shift handle.
a - Shift Handle
b - Bushing
c - Screw-M8x35
Page 78-4 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

TILLER HANDLE
3. Loosen the jam nuts and disconnect the throttle cables from the throttle lever.
a - Throttle Cable
b - Throttle Cable (Short)
4. Disconnect the tiller handle wiring.

5. Remove two screws (b) securing the tiller handle. Remove the tiller handle assembly
from the outboard.
BLK --< ~ YELJRED

BLK------,
r---------~~~
' ..-,§:'~~SiEFE~
r~~~~B~~EL +:~ :~~EL
Y~<JH'ED I
BLK
BLK
0< +--&-
BLKNEL ~ >--L-
-< t-'--
TANIBLU ..0-( t-'--
BLK
BLKNEL
BLK
TAN
PUR ~ >--:-- RED
,
,, ..
b
54272
a - Disconnect Tiller Handle Wires
b - Screws-M10x90 (2)
c - Tab Washer
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 78-5

TILLER HANDLE
Tiller Handle Disassembly

I . Pry Ihe 1wo clips oul of the hand grip.
2. Remove the side cover.
_11 ' -==-1
• - Clips (2)
b • Side Cover
3. Pull the arm along with the throttle cables and wiring from the bracket.
Page 7B-6 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

TILLER HANDLE
4. Remove retainer and slide out the tiller tube assembly.

5. Remove the throttle lock assembly.
a - Retainer
b - Throttle Lock Assembly
c - Tiller Tube Assembly
6. Use a flat tip screwdriver to pry/push the rubber grip off the handle.
7. pun out the stop switch harness.

8. Push the tiller tube out of the handle.
® c
a - Stop Switch Harness

b - Tiller Tube
e - Handle
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 7B-7

TILLER HANDLE
9. Remove cover and disconnect throttle cables from pulley.
b
a
= -
a - Cover
b - Throttle Cables
c - Pulley
1. Inspect throttle cables for bending/damage and replace if necessary.
2. Inspect steering handle arm for cracks/damage and replace if necessary.
Page 7B·8 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

TILLER HANDLE
Tiller Handle Reassembly

1. Wrap cables around pulley as shown.
b
a
a - Short Throttle Cable (30-1 /2 in.) Place in Top Groove
b - Long Throttle Cable (40 -1/2 in.) Place in Bottom Groove
e - Pulley
2. Place pulley and cables into case .

3. Install cover with screw.
a - Pulley
b - Cover
c - Screw 10-16x 1/2 in .
Pulley Cover Bolt Torque

20 lb. in. (2.3 N·m)
TILLER HANDLE
4. Match tiller tube end with the slots and pull the tube end into the handle until it bottoms
out.
5. Install the throttle lock components on tiller tube.
~~
b
...
c
a - Tiller Tube
b • Handle
e - Match the Tube End with Slots
d - Screw
e - Lock
f • Spring
9 • Knob
6. Check to make sure tiller tube is pushed in 7/8 in. (22.2mm).
7. Insert the engine stop switch harness through the tiller tube. Place the stop switch into
end on handle.
@
c
7/8 in. (22.2mml--i
a -7/8 in. (22.2 mm) between Tiller Tube and end of Handle
b - Engine Stop Switch Harness
c . Stop Switch
8. Align the grooves inside the rubber grip with the ridges on the handle. Push the rubber
..
grip onto the handle.
NOTE: Applying a soapy/water solution to the inside of the rubber grip will ease installation.
-~~
~l ~].
.. )
9. Place pulley assembly into arm.
10. Slide the tiller tube into the arm. Position the throttle lock knob into its slot.
11 . Match the end of the tiller tube with the slots in the pulley assembly. Insert the tiller tube
end into the pulley assembly.
TILLER HANDLE
12. Secure tiller tube with retainer.

13. Snap the engine start switch on the tiller tube.
a - Pulley Assembly
b - Throille Lock Knob
c - Retainer
d - Screw-M5x16
Tiller Tube Retainer Screw Torque

35 lb. in. (3.9 N·m)
14. Place bushing components on the arm mounts.
i
~ ~ ~-@
~ fl -1: ,
~~ -®
~ -@
~t:hl\
~ , --@
~ 2-4-C wlTellon (92-S50736A1)
a - Flat Washer
b - Bushing
c - Wave Washer (2)
d - Bushing
TILLER HANDLE
15. Pull the th rottle cables and wiring into the bracket.
16. Fasten arm with cover.
/ /
Arm Cover Bolt Torque

135 lb. in. (15.3 N·m)
ACAunON
Wiring passing through the hand grip opening must be protected from chaffing or
being cut, by using the wiring conduit described In the following steps. Failure to
protect wiring as described could result in electrical system failure.
17. Place the throttle cables through the hand grip opening as shown.
18. Place all wiring inside the wiring conduit.
19. Route the wiring through the hand grip opening and position the wiring conduit inside
the opening so that at least 112 in. (12.7mm) extends inside the handle grip .
...... ..... ~ ... . " " ....... '''' .... 4''...''

TILLER HANDLE
20. Push the wiring and throttle cables down into the handle grip and hold in place with two
clips.
14--1 /2 in. (12mm)
c
1/2 in. (12mmrJ l...@
a - Wiring Conduit (Place all Wiring Inside - See CAUTION above)

b Place Wiring Conduit inside opening 1/2 in. (12.7mm)
a
C a Throttle Cables (Position toward outer side)

d - Clips (2)
Tiller Handle Installation

1. Install tiller handle, tab washer, and bolts.
2. Bend tabs onto flats of bolts.
a - Tiller Handle
b - Tab Washer
c - Bolts (2) M12x90
Tiller Handle Mounting Bolt Torque

35 lb. ft . (47 .5 N·m)
TIlleR HANDLE
3. Connect wires as shown in wiring diagram.

ELECTRIC START TILLER HANDLE WIRING DIAGRAM·30/40 (4·STROKE)
m
m
,
.~=
• ," 0
•
if" ,,
J BlK '" Black
BL.U '" Blue
BRN '" Brown
I GRY '" Gray
I , GRN '" GrlHln
I ORN '" Orange
I "
L-~ PNK '" Pink
I PUR", Purple
I RED", Red
TAN :: Tan
WHT '" White
YEL. '" Yellow
L.IT = LIght
DRK :: Dark
a - Ground Harness Under Bottom Solenoid Bolt

b - Harness Extension
c - Harness Connection
d - Keyswitch Assembly Transom Mount
e - Keyswitch
f - Hom
9 - Lanyard Stop Switch
nLLER HANDLE
4. Secure wires at connectors with cable tie as shown.
----!l~
a - Cable Tie
TIL.LER HANDLE
5. Rotate throttle grip to idle position.

6. Insert the anchor on the shorter th rottle cable into the anchor slot on the throttle lever.
7. Secure cable in position by tightening jam nuts onto bracket (finger tighten only).
8. Insert anchor on remaining cable into the anchor slot on the throttle lever.
9. Secure cable in position by tightening jam nuts onto bracket (finger tighten only).
a - Throttle Lever
b - Anchor of Shorter Throttle Cable Positioned in Anchor Slot
c - Jam Nuts Securing shorter Cable Onto Bracket
d - Anchor of remai ning Throttle Cable Positioned in Anchor Slot
e - Jam Nuts Securing remai ning Cable Onto Bracket
TILLER HANDLE
10. Rotate throttle grip to full throttle and adjust jam nuts until throttle stop screw hits plate.
NOTE: No free-play should exist in throttle grip handle once throttle stop screw has hit plate,
if this condition exists re-adjust jam nuts.
a - T hrottle Stop Screw Hitting Plate

b - No Free play should exist in throttle gri p handle past full th rottle once th rottle
stop screw has hit plate. If this condition exists re-adjust jam nuts.
IMPORTANT: After installation, move the throttle grip a few times from the idle posi-
tion too the wide-open-throttle position. If necessary, re-adjust the jam nuts.
TILLER HANDLE
11 . Install lower cowl.
a - Screw (6)-M6x30
b - Lower Cowl
c - Screw-M6x20
Bottom Cowl Bolt Torque

60 lb. in. (7 N·m)
12. Cables, wires, and shift rod should be routed through grommet as shown. Seat grommet
between cowl halves.
I
e
a - Fuel Connector
b - Battery Cables
c - Throttle Cables
d - Shift Rod
e - Tiller Handle Harness Wires
f - Remote Key Harness
TILLER HANDLE
13. Assemble the shift rod into the shift handle.
a
a - Shift Rod
b - Shift Handle
14. Install shift handle assembly, bushing, and bolt.
I[jL[jo 2-4-C wfTefion (92-850736A 1)
a - Handle Assembly
b - Bolt-M8x35
c - Bushing
Shill Handle Bolt Torque

100 lb. in. (11.3 N·m)
MANUAL STARTER
MANUAL STARTER
Section 8
Table of Contents
Manual Starter . . ............... • ........ 8-2 Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Interlock Cable Adjustment ..... . • . . . . . . .. 8-4 Rewind Starter Reassembly . .. .... . . . . . . . 8-9
Manual Starter Removal ........ • . . . ..... 8-5 Adjusting Rewind Spring Tension ....... 8-10
Manual Starter Disassembly ..... • ..•..... 8-6 Manual Starter Installation . . ... . . . . . 8-14
MANUAL STARTER
MANUAL STARTER
30 / · 28
29
26
; "
c:::::::J- 32
19 : 1 ' 21
95 " 0
18
17-
20 23
23
~ 2-4-C wfTeflon (92-850736A 1)

MANUAL STARTER
MANUAL STARTER
TORQUE
REF.
- 1 RECOIL STARTER ASSEMBLY
-- 1 1 RECOIL HOUSING
-- -
2 1 SEAL
-
3 1 ROLLER
-
4 1 BUSHING
5 1 WASHER
--
6 1 SCREW (M6 x 30) 70 8.0
-- -- -- -
7 1 WASHER-Finger Spring
-- -- -
8 1 SPRING
--
9 1 STARTER SHEAVE
-- - - -- --
10 2 DOG·CAM
11 2 SPRING
12 2 RETAINING RING
--
-- 13 1 SPRING
-
14 1 CAM
--
-
15 1 SCR EW (1/4-20 ) 135 15.3
-- 16 1 STARTER CORD
--
17 1 CAM
--
18 1 SPRING
19 1 INTERLOCK LEVER
--
--
20 1 ----WETAINER
-- --
--
21 1 SPRING
22 1 BUSHIN G
--
-- -- -- -
23 5 SCREW (10-1 6 x 1) Drive TIght
24 1 HANDLE
-- -
25 1 RETAINER
26 4 SCREW (M6 x 25) 60 7.0
--
27 1 INTERLOCK CABLE
28 1 SCREW (10-16 x .625) Drive Tight
29 1 WASHER
30 1 COTTER PIN
-
31 1 SC REW (M5 x 16) 33.6 3.8
32 1 DECAL-EPA Information
MANUAL STARTER
Interlock Cable Adjustment

IMPORTANT: Lubricate core wire of Interlock cable with light oil prior to making ad·
justments.
1. While rotating the propeller shaft, place the gear shift lever into REVERSE.
2. Return the gear shift lever to NEUTRAL without going past neutral detent.
3. Place end of interlock cable over pin of cam lever and secure with retaining clip .
4. Secure interlock cable to starter housing using adjusting screw. Do not tighten screw at
this time.
S. Adjust interlock cable to align raised mark of cam lever with pointer of rewind housing.
a • Interlock Cable
b • Retaining Clip
c • Adjustment Screw
d • Raised Mark of Cam Lever
e • Pointer of Rewind Housing
6. Tighten cable adjustment screw and check adjustment after 4 or S shift cycles .
MANUAL STARTER
Manual Starter Removal

1. Remove the adjustment screw from the rewind housing.
2. Remove the retaining clip from the start interlock.
3. Remove the interlock cable.
~
I~
\
a - Adjustment Screw
b - Retaining Clip
4. Remove bolts and manual starter.
a • Bolts (4)· M6x25

b - Manual Starter
MANUAL STARTER
Manual Starter Disassembly
When disassembling and rea,s""mll>lIrlg ",wind

worn in case rewind spring uncoils
1. Remove cam retainer.
2. Remove cam , interlock lever, and springs.
a - Screws (3) - 10-16x.625 (1 /4 in. Hex) d - Spring (Cam)

b - Cam Retainer e - Interlock Lever
c -Cam I - Spring (Interlock Lever)
3. Pull starter rope handle out from rewind starter about 1 ft . (3D .Scm) and tie a overhand
knot at this point to prevent rope from being pulled back into rewind starter.
4. Untie the knot in the starter rope handle. Untie knot in starter rope (from previous step) .
Release starter rope and allow rewind spri ng to unwind.
a - Knot in Starter Rope

b - Knot in Starter Rope Handle
MANUAL STARTER
5. Remove cam and spring.

6. Remove starter sheave asse mbly from recoil housing.
a - Screw
b -Cam
c - Spring
d - Starter Sheave Assembly
e - Recoil Housing
7. Remove rope from starter sheave assembly.

NOTE: If re -using rope leave end knot tied.
a - Knot
MANUAL STARTER
8. Remove springwasher and spring assembly from starter sheave.

9. Remove retaining rings, pawls, and springs from starter sheave.
e
, c
;'3>
0
a - Springwasher d - Retaining Rings (2)

b - Spring Assembly e - Pawls (2)
c - Starter Sheave f - Springs (2)

1. Clean components in solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Inspect rewind spring for kinks, burrs, corrosion of breakage. Replace as necessary.
3. Inspect starter sheave, rope guide and recoil housing for nicks, grooves, cracks, wear
or distortion, especially area of rope travel. Replace as necessary.
4. Inspect cam , pawls and springs for wear or damage. Replace as necessary.
MANUAL STARTER
5. Inspect starte r rope for wear. Replace as necessary.

NOTE: Rope measures 66 in. (1.68 m) long
Rewind Starter Reassembly
uncoils out 01 the

1. Install springs, pawls, and retaining rings onto starter sheave.
NOTE: Position straight end of spring into recess of startersheave and angled end of spring
across back of pawl as shown.
2. Install spring assembly and springwasher into starter sheave.
, fA ~
~ 2·4-C wfTeflon (92-850736A 1)
a - Springs (2)
b - Pawls (2)
c • Retaining Rings (2)
d - Spring Assembly
e - Springwasher
1 - Starter Sheave
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 8·9

MANUAL STARTER
3. Install starter sheave assembly into recoil housing.

NOTE: Looped end of spring must engage "V" notch in hub of recoil housing.
4. Secure cam and starter sheave assembly to recoil housing.
NOTE: Cam should be positioned as shown with "x" facing up.
a - Recoil Housing d - Spri ng

b - Starter Sheave Assembly e -Cam
c - Looped End of Spri ng f - Screw
Cam Screw Torque

135 lb. in. (15.3 N·m)
Adjusting Rewind Spring Tension

1. Rotate sheave counterclockwise until it stops (coil is bound).
o
Page 8-10 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAL STARTER
2. Back sheave off until knot recess in sheave aligns with rope bushing.
a ~ Rope Bushing
b ~ Knot Recess
3. Thread starter rope thru knot recess in starter sheave, rope guide, and starter housing.
Place knot into recess .
a - Starter Rope
b - Knot
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 8-11

MANUAL STARTER
4. Allow starte r rope to pull back into starter until about 1 ft . (30.Scm) of rope is left. Tie a
overhand knot at this point to prevent rope from being pulled back into rewind starter.
5. Route starte r rope through starter handle. Tie a knot into end of rope and secure in rope
retainer.
6. Untie overhand knot from step (4).
a - Starter Rope
b - Starter Handle
c - Retainer
7. Install springs, interlock lever, and cam .

IMPORTANT: Interlock lever spring should be installed with squared end of spring
seated on interlock lever.
IMPORTANT: Cam spring ends should be seated on recoil housing and cam boss.
Spring tension should be noticeable when turning cam clockwise.
[iLI:P 2-4-C wfTeflon (92-8S0736A 1)

a - Spring (Interlock Lever) e - Cam
b - Squared End of Spring f - Spring (Cam)
c - Interlock Lever g - Recoil Housing
d - Sp ring (Cam) h - Cam Boss (Hidden)
Page 8-12 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

MANUAl. STARTER
8. Install cam retainer. Orive screws tight.

NOTE: Cam should be held with some pre-load until retainer is seated.
a - Cam Retainer
b -Cam
c - Screws (3) - 10-16x.625 Drive l1ghl
NOTE: Hold interlock lever back and check the operation of the rewind and rewind tension
before installation.
90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 8-13

MANUAL STARTER
Manual Starter Installation

1. Secure manual starter with bolts.
y Y
I
co
a - Bolts (4) - M6x25

b - Manual Starter
Manual Starter Bolt Torque

60 lb. in. (7 N·m)
2. Install interlock cable onto cam boss and secure with retaining clip.
3. Secure interlock cable to rewind housing with adjustment screw.
NOTE: Interlock cable should be adjusted aher installation. Refer to interlock cable adjust·
ment procedures.
a - Retaining Clip
b - Adjustment Screw
Page 8-14 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Outboards

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Outboards

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Outboards

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

rP

With Serial Numbers

Printed in U.S.A. C l 99S, Mercury Marine 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Notice to Users of This Manual

90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page i

Cleanliness and Care of Outboard Motor

Page ii 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page iii

Models 30/40 (4-Stroke)

.100 .36 Use Quicksilver 4-Cycle Marine Oil with

IMPORTANT: Use resistive spark plugs only.

90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 1A-1

Type Capacitor Discharge Ignition

Page 1A-2 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Idle rpm (Out Of Gear) 900 ± 25 rpm

Type 4 Siroke Cycle Over Head Camshaft

90·857046 AUG UST 1998 Page 1A·3

Intake "A" 1.216 - 1.220 in. (30.89 - 30.99 mm)

Run-out Limit ...-B 0.0039 in. (0.1 mm)

Free Length "a" 1.491-1 .569 in. (37.85-39.85 mm)

Compressed Pressure (Installed)

Page 1A·4 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

ValveNalve Seat/Valve Guides:

ROCKER SHAFT Outside Diameter 0.6288 - 0.6296 in.

90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 1A-5

Pump Type Trochoid

Page 1A-6 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Propeller Information Charts

Mercury/Mariner 30 (4-Stroke) 2.00:1 Non-Bigfoot

Approx. Approx. Speed

90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 1A·7

Mercury/Mariner 40 (4-Stroke) 2.00:1 Non-Bigfoot

Approx. Approx. Speed

Page 1A-8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

2. Crankcase Oil Pump PI N 90265A2

3. O il Filter Wrench PI N 91-802653

90·857046 AUG UST 1998 Page 1B-l

2. 2-4-C Marine Lubricant with Teflon PIN 92-825407A12

3. Special Lubricant 101 PIN 92-13872A 1

4 . Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid PIN 92-1901 OOA 12

Page 18-2 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

5. Quicksilver 4-Stroke Outboard Oil PI N 92-828000A 12

6. Gear Lube-Premium Blend PIN 92-19007A24

7. Quicksilver4-Cycle Marine Engine Oil PIN 92-832 111A1

90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 1B-3

Inspection And Maintenance Schedule

Neglected Inspection and maintenance service of your outboard or attempting to

Page 18-4 90·857046 AUGUST 1998

After Each Use

Before Periods of Storage

90-857046 AUGUST 1998 Page 18-5

Corrosion Control Anode

Page 1 B·6 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

Spark Plug Inspection

90·857046 AUGUST 1998 Page lB·7

Fuse Replacement - Electric Start Models

Timing Belt Inspection

Page 19-8 90-857046 AUGUST 1998

4. Tilt Tube-Lubricate through fitting .